Grizzly Service Manual

YFM7FGPW
SERVICE MANUAL
LIT-11616-20-11
3B4-28197-10
EBS00001
YFM7FGPW SERVICE MANUAL 2006 by Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A. First Edition, May 2006 All rights reserved. Any reproduction or unauthorized use without the written permission of Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A. is expressly prohibited. Printed in U.S.A. LIT-11616-20-11
EBS00002
NOTICE
This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company primarily for use by Yamaha dealers and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual, so it is assumed that anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha vehicle has a basic understanding of the mechanical ideas and the procedures of vehicle repair. Repairs attempted by anyone without this knowledge are likely to render the vehicle unsafe and unfit for use. This model has been designed and manufactured to perform within certain specifications in regard to performance and emissions. Proper service with the correct tools is necessary to ensure that the vehicle will operate as designed. If there is any question about a service procedure, it is imperative that you contact a Yamaha dealer for any service information changes that apply to this model. This policy is intended to provide the customer with the most satisfaction from his vehicle and to conform to federal environmental quality objectives. Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all its models. Modifications and significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers and will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable. NOTE: This Service Manual contains information regarding periodic maintenance to the emission control system. Please read this material carefully. Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
_
EBS00003
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following notations. The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED! WARNING CAUTION: NOTE: Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the vehicle operator, a bystander or a person checking or repairing the vehicle. A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage to the vehicle. A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
EBS00004
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MANUAL ORGANIZATION
This manual consists of chapters for the main categories of subjects. (See symbols) 1st title 1: This is the title of the chapter with its symbol in the upper right corner of each page. 2nd title 2: This title indicates the section of the chapter and only appears on the first page of each section. It is located in the upper left corner of the page. 3rd title 3: This title indicates a sub-section that is followed by step-by-step procedures accompanied by corresponding illustrations.
EXPLODED DIAGRAMS
To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each removal and disassembly section. 1. An easy-to-see exploded diagram 4 is provided for removal and disassembly jobs. 2. Numbers 5 are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A number that is enclosed by a circle indicates a disassembly step. 3. An explanation of jobs and notes is presented in an easy-to-read way by the use of symbol marks 6. The meanings of the symbol marks are given on the next page. 4. A job instruction chart 7 accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of parts, notes in jobs, etc. 5. For jobs requiring more information, the step-by-step format supplements 8 are given in addition to the exploded diagram and the job instruction chart.
EBS00006
SYMBOLS
The following symbols are not relevant to every vehicle. Symbols 1 to 0 indicate the subject of each chapter.
1 General information 2 Specifications 3 Periodic checks and adjustments 4 Engine 5 Cooling system 6 Fuel injection system 7 Drive train 8 Chassis 9 Electrical 0 Troubleshooting
GEN INFO
3
SPEC
4
CHK ADJ
5
ENG
6
COOL
7 8
FI CHAS
0
+
DRIV
9
ELEC
A
TRBL SHTG
B
Symbols A to H indicate the following

A Can be serviced with engine mounted B Filling fluid C Lubricant D Special tool E Torque F Wear limit, clearance G Engine speed H Electrical data (, V, A)
E
T.
R.
Symbols I to N in the exploded diagrams indicate the types of lubricants and lubrication points.
M
I Apply engine oil J Apply gear oil K Apply molybdenum disulfide oil L Apply wheel bearing grease M Apply lithium-soap-based grease N Apply molybdenum disulfide grease
E
L
B
G
M
LS
N
M
O LT
New
Symbols O to P in the exploded diagrams indicate where to apply a locking agent O and when to install a new part P.
O Apply the locking agent (LOCTITE) P Replace
EBS00008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DRIVE TRAIN CHASSIS ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING
GEN INFO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+
SPEC
CHK ADJ
ENG
COOL
FI
DRIV
CHAS
ELEC
9 10
TRBL SHTG
CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION............................................................................1-1 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .....................................................1-1 MODEL LABEL.......................................................................................... 1-1 FEATURES...................................................................................................... 1-2 OUTLINE OF THE FI SYSTEM.................................................................1-2 FI SYSTEM................................................................................................1-3 OUTLINE OF THE EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM...... 1-4 EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ..... 1-5 INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS ..................................................................... 1-6 IMPORTANT INFORMATION ......................................................................... 1-9 PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY........................... 1-9 REPLACEMENT PARTS...........................................................................1-9 GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS .................................................... 1-9 LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS ................................... 1-10 BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS .................................................................. 1-10 CIRCLIPS ................................................................................................1-10 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS.......................................................... 1-11 SPECIAL TOOLS .......................................................................................... 1-12
CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 2-1 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................2-5 CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................2-12 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................2-14 TIGHTENING TORQUES .............................................................................. 2-16 ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES......................................................... 2-16 CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES.......................................................2-19 HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE.................................................. 2-22
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS...............................2-22 LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES .................................... 2-23 ENGINE................................................................................................... 2-23 COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS ..................................................................... 2-25 OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS ................................................................................. 2-26 CABLE ROUTING ......................................................................................... 2-28
CHAPTER 3 PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................. 3-1 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 3-1 GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART............................ 3-2 ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS .......................3-4 ENGINE SKID PLATES.............................................................................3-4 SEAT AND SIDE PANELS ........................................................................ 3-5 FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD ................................................. 3-6 FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL................................................... 3-8 REAR CARRIER AND REAR FENDER .................................................... 3-9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY........................................................... 3-10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY 1/2 ............................................... 3-10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY 2/2 ............................................... 3-12 FOOTREST BOARDS ...................................................................................3-14 AIR FILTER CASE ........................................................................................ 3-15
ENGINE .........................................................................................................3-16 ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE ................................................ 3-16 ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED ...........................................3-19 ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY ..............................3-20 ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER........................................................ 3-22 CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG ............................................................. 3-23 CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING.......................................................3-24 MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE..................................3-25 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL....................................................3-28 CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ...............................................................3-29 CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT................................................ 3-31 CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT...........................................3-33 CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE ................................................................3-34 CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES ...................................................3-34 CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL.......................................................3-35 CHANGING THE COOLANT................................................................... 3-35 CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM ....................................................3-39 CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT.........3-40 CHECKING THE V-BELT........................................................................3-41 CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM....................................................3-42 CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER ....................................................3-43 CHASSIS ....................................................................................................... 3-44 ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE ......................................................... 3-44 ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE............................................................ 3-44 CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL................................................. 3-46 CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS ................................................ 3-47 CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS .................................................. 3-48 CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE HOSE PROTECTORS ........................ 3-48 CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES........................................................... 3-49 BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM ................................... 3-49 ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD ............................................................................................ 3-51 CHECKING THE FINAL GEAR OIL LEVEL ............................................3-53 CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL........................................................ 3-53 CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEVEL............................. 3-55 CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ........................................ 3-55 CHECKING THE CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT DUST BOOTS ..........3-56 CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM .................................................. 3-57 ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN....................................................................... 3-59 CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS ............... 3-60 ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS .................................3-61 ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS.................................... 3-62 CHECKING THE TIRES..........................................................................3-62 CHECKING THE WHEELS ..................................................................... 3-65 CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES .................................... 3-65 LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS .........................................3-66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM................................................................................. 3-67 CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY....................................... 3-67 CHECKING THE FUSES ........................................................................3-73 ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS................................................. 3-76 REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS ................................................. 3-76
CHAPTER 4 ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL ........................................................................................4-1 AIR DUCTS, MUFFLER AND EXHAUST PIPE ........................................ 4-1 SELECT LEVER UNIT ..............................................................................4-3 LEADS, CABLES AND HOSES ................................................................4-4 ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS ...................................................................4-6 INSTALLING THE ENGINE....................................................................... 4-8 INSTALLING THE SELECT LEVER UNIT ................................................ 4-9 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................... 4-10 REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................4-12 CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET............................................4-13 CHECKING THE TAPPET COVERS ......................................................4-13 CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER...................................... 4-13 CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD .......................................................4-14 INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD .....................................................4-15 ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT ..............................................................4-18 REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT............................ 4-20 CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT.................................................................4-20 CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION SYSTEM..................................... 4-21 CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM SHAFTS ........ 4-21 INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS .......................... 4-22 VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS.................................................................. 4-25 REMOVING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ...............................4-26 CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ................................4-27 INSTALLING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ..............................4-31 CYLINDER AND PISTON.............................................................................. 4-34 REMOVING THE PISTON ...................................................................... 4-35 CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON ...........................................4-35 CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS........................................................... 4-37 CHECKING THE PISTON PIN ................................................................4-38 INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER .........................................4-39
AC MAGNETO...............................................................................................4-42 REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR.............................................. 4-45 CHECKING THE STATOR COIL AND CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ................................................................................................4-46 CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH ....................................................4-46 CHECKING THE TORQUE LIMITER......................................................4-47 INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR ............................................4-47 BALANCER GEARS AND OIL PUMP GEARS ............................................4-49 REMOVING THE BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR ....................................................................................... 4-51 CHECKING THE OIL PUMP DRIVE .......................................................4-51 CHECKING THE BALANCER DRIVE .....................................................4-51 INSTALLING THE BALANCER DRIVE GEAR, BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR, AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR ................................................ 4-52 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES....................................................4-53 PRIMARY SHEAVE................................................................................. 4-55 SECONDARY SHEAVE ..........................................................................4-56 REMOVING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES ................. 4-57 DISASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE.................................... 4-57 CHECKING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE ....................................................4-58 CHECKING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE .............................................. 4-58 ASSEMBLING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE ................................................ 4-59 ASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE..........................................4-60 INSTALLING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES................ 4-62 CLUTCH ........................................................................................................4-63 REMOVING THE CLUTCH ..................................................................... 4-65 CHECKING THE CLUTCH...................................................................... 4-66 INSTALLING THE CLUTCH.................................................................... 4-67 CRANKCASE ................................................................................................4-68 TIMING CHAIN AND OIL FILTER ........................................................... 4-68 CRANKCASE .......................................................................................... 4-70 CRANKCASE BEARINGS....................................................................... 4-71 SEPARATING THE CRANKCASE.......................................................... 4-72 CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND GUIDE....................................... 4-72 CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE ........................................................... 4-72 CHECKING THE BEARINGS.................................................................. 4-73 CHECKING THE CRANKCASE ..............................................................4-73 ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE.......................................................... 4-73 INSTALLING THE SHIFT LEVER ........................................................... 4-74
CRANKSHAFT AND OIL PUMP ................................................................... 4-75 OIL PUMP ...............................................................................................4-76 REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ........................................................... 4-77 CHECKING THE OIL PUMP ................................................................... 4-77 CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER ........................................................... 4-78 CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT ............................................................ 4-78 ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP...............................................................4-79 INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT .......................................................... 4-79 TRANSMISSION............................................................................................ 4-81 DRIVE AXLE ........................................................................................... 4-83 REMOVING THE TRANSMISSION ........................................................ 4-85 CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS............................................................. 4-85 CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ..............................................................4-86 CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION ......................................................... 4-86 CHECKING THE SECONDARY SHAFT................................................. 4-87 CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER AND STOPPER WHEEL.............. 4-87 ASSEMBLING THE SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY ...................................... 4-87 INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION .......................................................4-88 MIDDLE GEAR ..............................................................................................4-89 MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ..........................................................................4-89 MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT........................................................................4-90 REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ............................................. 4-92 REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT...........................................4-93 CHECKING THE PINION GEARS .......................................................... 4-95 SELECTING MIDDLE DRIVE AND DRIVEN GEAR SHIMS................... 4-96 INSTALLING THE BEARING AND OIL SEALS ...................................... 4-99 INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT .......................................4-100 INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ..........................................4-102 MEASURING THE MIDDLE GEAR BACKLASH................................... 4-102
CHAPTER 5 COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR ...................................................................................................... 5-1 CHECKING THE RADIATOR.................................................................... 5-3 INSTALLING THE RADIATOR..................................................................5-4 THERMOSTAT ................................................................................................5-5 CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT.............................................................. 5-6 INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT............................................................ 5-6 WATER PUMP.................................................................................................5-7 DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP.................................................... 5-9 CHECKING THE WATER PUMP .............................................................. 5-9 ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP........................................................ 5-10
CHAPTER 6 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM............................................................................6-1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................. 6-3 ECU SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION......................................................6-5 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE .................................................. 6-6 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART .................................................................6-7 DIAGNOSTIC MODE ................................................................................ 6-8 TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS ............................................................ 6-12 CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR PRESSURE SENSOR ........................... 6-26 CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ....................6-26 FUEL TANK................................................................................................... 6-28 REMOVING THE FUEL TANK ................................................................6-30 REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP ...............................................................6-30 CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP BODY.....................................................6-31 CHECKING THE ROLLOVER VALVE ....................................................6-31 INSTALLING THE FUEL PUMP..............................................................6-31 INSTALLING THE FUEL HOSE ..............................................................6-32 THROTTLE BODY......................................................................................... 6-33 REMOVING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY .................................6-36 CHECKING THE FUEL INJECTOR ........................................................ 6-36 CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY ......................................................6-36 INSTALLING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY................................6-37 CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND PRESSURE REGULATOR OPERATION .......................................................................................... 6-38 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ................................................................................................6-39
CHAPTER 7 DRIVE TRAIN

TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................................................7-1 CHECKING NOISES ................................................................................. 7-1 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART .................................................................7-3
FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND DIFFERENTIAL GEAR........ 7-4 REMOVING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR ASSEMBLY........................... 7-10 CHECKING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS................... 7-10 CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEARS ............................................. 7-11 CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR MOTOR .................................7-11 ASSEMBLING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS .............. 7-12 ASSEMBLING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEARS.........................................7-13 MEASURING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR LASH ..................................7-14 ADJUSTING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR LASH.................................... 7-15 CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OPERATION ......................... 7-16 REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND FINAL DRIVE GEAR ...........7-17 ASSEMBLING THE REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS................. 7-24 DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY....... 7-25 POSITIONING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR AND RING GEAR ... 7-25 ADJUSTING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR BACKLASH ................ 7-25 ADJUSTING THE FINAL DRIVEN PINION GEAR BACKLASH ............. 7-27 MEASURING THE FINAL DRIVEN PINION GEAR THRUST WASHER CLEARANCE .........................................................................7-29 MEASURING THE WHEEL GEAR THRUST CLEARANCE ................... 7-30 CHECKING THE REAR DRIVE SHAFT.................................................. 7-31 CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..........................................7-31 MEASUREMENT THE FINAL GEAR LASH............................................7-32 ADJUSTING THE FINAL GEAR LASH ...................................................7-33 ASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY............. 7-34 ASSEMBLING THE FINAL GEAR CASE................................................ 7-35
CHAPTER 8 CHASSIS
FRONT AND REAR WHEELS ........................................................................ 8-1 FRONT WHEELS ......................................................................................8-1 REAR WHEELS ........................................................................................8-3 CHECKING THE WHEELS ....................................................................... 8-5 CHECKING THE WHEEL HUBS............................................................... 8-5 CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS .............................................................. 8-6 INSTALLING THE BRAKE DISCS ............................................................ 8-6 INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUBS............................................................. 8-6 INSTALLING THE WHEELS ..................................................................... 8-7
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES......................................................................... 8-8 FRONT BRAKE PADS ..............................................................................8-8 REAR BRAKE PADS................................................................................. 8-9 REPLACING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE PADS........................... 8-10 FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER....................................................8-12 REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ......................................................8-15 CHECKING THE MASTER CYLINDERS................................................ 8-18 ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS ........................................................................................... 8-18 INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER......................8-19 INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ........................ 8-21 FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS .................................................................... 8-23 REAR BRAKE CALIPERS....................................................................... 8-25 DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS ..........8-27 CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS ....................8-27 ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS ................ 8-28 INSTALLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS .................. 8-29 STEERING SYSTEM .....................................................................................8-31 HANDLEBAR........................................................................................... 8-31 REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS.................................................. 8-33 CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR ..............................................................8-33 INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR ............................................................ 8-33 INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS ................................................ 8-34 INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ........................ 8-34 INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER......................8-35 INSTALLING THE THROTTLE LEVER ASSEMBLY ..............................8-35 STEERING STEM ...................................................................................8-36 CHECKING THE STEERING STEM .......................................................8-38 INSTALLING THE STEERING STEM .....................................................8-38 INSTALLING THE PITMAN ARM............................................................ 8-40 TIE-RODS AND STEERING KNUCKLES ............................................... 8-41 REMOVING THE STEERING KNUCKLES ............................................. 8-43 CHECKING THE TIE-RODS ................................................................... 8-43 CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLES.............................................. 8-43 INSTALLING THE TIE-RODS .................................................................8-46 FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES ............. 8-47 REMOVING THE FRONT ARMS ............................................................ 8-49 CHECKING THE FRONT ARMS............................................................. 8-49 CHECKING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS................................... 8-51 INSTALLING THE FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS ......................................................................................... 8-51 REAR KNUCKLES AND STABILIZER ......................................................... 8-52 CHECKING THE REAR KNUCKLES ......................................................8-54 CHECKING THE STABILIZER................................................................8-54
REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES ................. 8-55 CHECKING THE REAR ARMS ...............................................................8-57 CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES................ 8-57 INSTALLING THE REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES ......................................................................................... 8-58
CHAPTER 9 ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS........................................................................ 9-1 CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY................................................................9-4 CHECKING THE SWITCHES..........................................................................9-5 CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS .......................................... 9-7 TYPES OF BULBS .................................................................................... 9-7 CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULBS ....................................... 9-8 CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB SOCKETS .......................9-9 IGNITION SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 9-10 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-10 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-11 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM .................................................................. 9-16 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-16 STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION......................................................... 9-17 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-18 STARTER MOTOR........................................................................................ 9-22 CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR .....................................................9-24 ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR................................................. 9-26 CHARGING SYSTEM....................................................................................9-27 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-27 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-28 LIGHTING SYSTEM ......................................................................................9-30 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-30 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-31 CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM....................................................9-32 SIGNALING SYSTEM ...................................................................................9-34 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-34 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-36 CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM ................................................. 9-37
COOLING SYSTEM....................................................................................... 9-45 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-45 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-46 FUEL PUMP SYSTEM...................................................................................9-50 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-50 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-51 2WD/4WD SELECTING SYSTEM.................................................................9-53 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-53 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................9-54 EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM.........................................9-58 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................................ 9-58 EPS CONTROL UNITS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION .....................9-59 EPS WARNING LIGHT DURING NORMAL OPERATION......................9-60 DIAGNOSTIC MODE .............................................................................. 9-61 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE (EPS SYSTEM)......................9-64 TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS (EPS SYSTEM) ..................................9-65 CHECKING THE EPS MOTOR...............................................................9-69 CHECKING THE EPS TORQUE SENSOR............................................. 9-69
CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING .....................................................10-1 FUEL SYSTEM........................................................................................ 10-1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM...........................................................................10-1 COMPRESSION SYSTEM...................................................................... 10-2 POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE ......................................................... 10-2 POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE...................................................10-2 POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE................................10-2 POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE ......................... 10-2 FAULTY DRIVE TRAIN ................................................................................. 10-3 FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING............................................................................10-4 HARD SHIFTING.....................................................................................10-4 SHIFT LEVER DOES NOT MOVE .......................................................... 10-4 JUMPS OUT OF GEAR...........................................................................10-4
FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE ............................................................ 10-4 ENGINE OPERATES BUT VEHICLE WILL NOT MOVE ........................ 10-4 CLUTCH SLIPPING ................................................................................ 10-4 POOR STARTING PERFORMANCE......................................................10-4 POOR SPEED PERFORMANCE............................................................ 10-5 OVERHEATING............................................................................................. 10-5 OVERHEATING ......................................................................................10-5 OVERCOOLING ............................................................................................ 10-5 COOLING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 10-5 FAULTY BRAKE ........................................................................................... 10-5 POOR BRAKING EFFECT...................................................................... 10-5 SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION ......................................................... 10-6 MALFUNCTION....................................................................................... 10-6 UNSTABLE HANDLING................................................................................ 10-6 UNSTABLE HANDLING ..........................................................................10-6 LIGHTING SYSTEM ......................................................................................10-6 HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON ......................................................10-6 BULB BURNT OUT ................................................................................. 10-6
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
EBS00009
GEN INFO
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
EBS00010
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number 1 is stamped into the front left side of the frame.
EBS00011
MODEL LABEL The model label 1 is affixed at the location in the illustration. This information will be needed to order spare parts.
1-1
FEATURES
EAS20170
GEN INFO
FEATURES
OUTLINE OF THE FI SYSTEM The main function of a fuel supply system is to provide fuel to the combustion chamber at the optimum air-fuel ratio in accordance with the engine operating conditions and the atmospheric temperature. In the conventional carburetor system, the air-fuel ratio of the mixture that is supplied to the combustion chamber is created by the volume of the intake air and the fuel that is metered by the jet used in the respective carburetor. Despite the same volume of intake air, the fuel volume requirement varies with the engine operating conditions, such as acceleration, deceleration, or operating under a heavy load. Carburetors that meter the fuel through the use of jets have been provided with various auxiliary devices, so that an optimum air-fuel ratio can be achieved to accommodate the constant changes in the operating conditions of the engine. As the requirements for the engine to deliver more performance and cleaner exhaust gases increase, it becomes necessary to control the air-fuel ratio in a more precise and finely tuned manner. To accommodate this need, this model has adopted an electronically controlled fuel injection (FI) system, in place of the conventional carburetor system. This system can achieve an optimum air-fuel ratio required by the engine at all times by using a microprocessor that regulates the fuel injection volume according to the engine operating conditions detected by various sensors. The adoption of the FI system has resulted in a highly precise fuel supply, improved engine response, better fuel economy, and reduced exhaust emissions.
1 2 3 4
56 7
D
1 ECU (engine control unit) 2 Lean angle sensor 3 Fuel injection system relay 4 Engine trouble warning light 5 Intake air pressure sensor 6 TPS (throttle position sensor) 7 Intake air temperature sensor 8 Fuel injector
BA
0
9 Fuel pump 0 Speed sensor A Crankshaft position sensor B Coolant temperature sensor C Spark plug D Ignition coil
1-2
FEATURES
GEN INFO
FI SYSTEM The fuel pump delivers fuel to the fuel injector via the fuel filter. The pressure regulator maintains the fuel pressure that is applied to the fuel injector at only 324 kPa (3.24 kg/cm2, 46.1 psi). Accordingly, when the energizing signal from the ECU energizes the fuel injector, the fuel passage opens, causing the fuel to be injected into the intake manifold only during the time the passage remains open. Therefore, the longer the length of time the fuel injector is energized (injection duration), the greater the volume of fuel that is supplied. Conversely, the shorter the length of time the fuel injector is energized (injection duration), the lesser the volume of fuel that is supplied. The injection duration and the injection timing are controlled by the ECU. Signals that are input from the throttle position sensor, crankshaft position sensor, intake air pressure sensor, intake air temperature sensor, coolant temperature sensor, lean angle sensor and speed sensor enable the ECU to determine the injection duration. The injection timing is determined through the signals from the crankshaft position sensor. As a result, the volume of fuel that is required by the engine can be supplied at all times in accordance with the driving conditions. Illustration is for reference only.
1 3 A C B 0 9 2 7
5 4 6
1 Fuel pump 2 Fuel injector 3 Ignition coil 4 ECU (engine control unit) 5 Speed sensor 6 Lean angle sensor 7 Coolant temperature sensor 8 Crankshaft position sensor 9 Intake air pressure sensor 0 Throttle body
A Throttle position sensor B Intake air temperature sensor C Air filter case Fuel system Air system Control system
1-3
FEATURES
OUTLINE OF THE EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM
GEN INFO
Speed information from speed sensor
Engine starting RPM information from ECU
Battery
4. EPS control unit calculates assist power
1. Operates steering
5. Electricity output switched by EPS control unit
3. Sends the torque sensor signal
2. Twists torsion bar
6. Activates EPS motor
Steering stem
EPS control unit
EPS motor EPS unit
Torque sensor
CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the EPS unit, it must not be disassembled.
1-4
FEATURES
EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
GEN INFO
Meter assembly
Multifunction display
Odometer/Tripmeter A/Tripmeter B/Clock/Fuel meter/Gear position EPS UNIT
Indicator and warning lights

EPS warning/Engine trouble warning/Coolant temperature warning/Reverse indicator/Neutral indicator/Park indicator/High-range indicator/ Low-range indicator/Differential lock EPS motor FI and EPS self-diagnostic error codes
Torque sensor
Coolant temperature sensor signal Crankshaft position sensor signal Speed sensor signal
EPS control unit Engine rpm signal
ECU
Fuel injector Fuel pump Intake air temperature sensor signal Ignition coil
Battery
Throttle position sensor signal Intake air pressure sensor signal Lean angle sensor signal
1-5
FEATURES
4 3 2 1 7 6 5
EBU27291
GEN INFO
INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS Multifunction display

1 CLOCK button 2 RESET button 3 SELECT button 4 Speedometer 5 Fuel meter 6 Clock/Hour meter 7 Odometer/Tripmeter A/Tripmeter B
The multifunction display is equipped with the following: a speedometer (which shows the riding speed) an odometer (which shows the total distance traveled) two tripmeters (which show the distance traveled since they were last set to zero) a clock an hour meter (which shows the total time the key has been turned to ON) a fuel meter a self-diagnosis device
Odometer and tripmeter modes Pushing the SELECT button switches the display between the odometer mode ODO and the tripmeter modes A and B in the following order: ODO TRIP A TRIP B ODO To reset a tripmeter, select it by pushing the SELECT button, and then push the RESET button for at least three seconds. The tripmeters can be used to estimate the distance that can be traveled with a full tank of fuel. This information will enable you to plan future fuel stops. NOTE: Holding in the SELECT button and then turning the key to ON switches the display between mph and km/h.
1-6
FEATURES
GEN INFO
Clock mode Pushing the CLOCK button switches the display between the clock mode CLOCK and the hour meter mode HOUR in the following order: CLOCK HOUR CLOCK To set the clock 1. Set the display to the clock mode. 2. Push the SELECT button and RESET button together for at least three seconds. 3. When the hour digits start flashing, push the RESET button to set the hours. 4. Push the SELECT button, and the minute digits will start flashing. 5. Push the RESET button to set the minutes. 6. Push the SELECT button and then release it to start the clock. Fuel meter The fuel meter indicates the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The display segments of the fuel meter disappear from F (full) towards E (empty) as the fuel level decreases. When the E segment disappears and the fuel level warning indicator flashes, refuel as soon as possible. NOTE: This fuel meter is equipped with a self-diagnosis system. If the electrical circuit is defective, all the display segments and fuel level warning indicator will start flashing. If this occurs, check the electrical circuit. Refer to SIGNALING SYSTEM in chapter 9.
1 Fuel level warning indicator 2 Fuel meter 3 E segment
2 3
1-7
FEATURES
1
GEN INFO
Self-diagnosis device This model is equipped with a self-diagnosis device for various electrical circuits. If any of those circuits are defective, the multifunction display will indicate a two-digit error code. If the multifunction display indicates such an error code, note the code number, and check the vehicle.
ECB00810
CAUTION: If the multifunction display indicates an error code, the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible in order to avoid engine damage.
1 Error code display
1-8
EBS00013
GEN INFO
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1. Before removal and disassembly remove all dirt, mud, dust and foreign material. 2. Use only the proper tools and cleaning equipment. Refer to SPECIAL TOOLS. 3. When disassembling always keep mated parts together. This includes gears, cylinders, pistons and other parts that have been mated through normal wear. Mated parts must always be reused or replaced as an assembly. 4. During disassembly, clean all of the parts and place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly and allow for the correct installation of all parts. 5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
EBS00014
REPLACEMENT PARTS 1. Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all replacements. Use oil and grease recommended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs. Other brands may be similar in function and appearance, but inferior in quality.
EBS00015
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS 1. When overhauling the engine, replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. All gasket surfaces, oil seal lips and O-rings must be cleaned. 2. During reassembly properly oil all mating parts and bearings, and lubricate the oil seal lips with grease.
1-9
EBS00016
GEN INFO
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS After removal, replace all lock washers/plates 1 and cotter pins. After the bolt or nut has been tightened to specification, bend the lock tabs along a flat of the bolt or nut.
EBS00017
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS Install bearings and oil seals so that the manufacturers marks or numbers are visible. When installing oil seals, lubricate the oil seal lips with a light coat of lithium-soap-based grease. Oil bearings liberally when installing, if appropriate.
1 Oil seal
CAUTION:
_
Do not spin the bearing with compressed air because this will damage the bearing surfaces.
1 Bearing
EBS00018
CIRCLIPS Before reassembly, check all circlips carefully and replace damaged or distorted circlips. Always replace piston pin clips after one use. When installing a circlip 1, make sure the sharp-edged corner 2 is positioned opposite the thrust 3 that the circlip receives.
4 Shaft
1 - 10
EBS00019
GEN INFO
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS Check the leads, couplers, and connectors for stains, rust, moisture, etc. 1. Disconnect: lead coupler connector 2. Check: lead coupler connector Moisture Dry with an air blower. Rust/stains Connect and disconnect several times. 3. Check: all connections Loose connection Connect properly. NOTE: If the pin 1 on the terminal is flattened, bend it up.
_
4.
_
Connect: lead coupler connector
NOTE: Make sure all connections are tight.
5. Check: continuity (with the pocket tester) Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C NOTE: If there is no continuity, clean the terminals. When checking the wire harness, perform steps (1) to (3). As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer available at most part stores.
_
1 - 11
SPECIAL TOOLS
EBS00021
GEN INFO
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use only the appropriate special tools; this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate tools or improvised techniques. Special tools may differ by shape and part number from country to country. In such a case, two types are provided. When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes. For US and CDN P/N. YM-, YU-, YS-, YK-, ACCExcept for US and CDN P/N. 90890Tool No. Tool name/How to use
Slide hammer bolt Slide hammer bolt 6 mm This tool is used to remove the rocker arm shaft. Weight
Illustration
90890-01083 YU-01083-1
90890-01084 YU-01083-3
YU-01083-3
This tool is used to remove the rocker arm shaft. Crankcase separating tool Crankcase separator
90890-01135 YU-01135-B
This tool is used to separate the crankcase. Coupling gear/middle shaft tool Gear holder This tool is needed when removing or installing the coupling gear nut. Valve spring compressor attachment Valve spring compressor adapter (26 mm) This tool is needed to remove and install the valve assemblies.
90890-01229 YM-01229
90890-01243 YM-01253-1
1 - 12
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No. Tool name/How to use
Crankshaft installer pot Installing pot Pot installer 90890-01274 YU-90058 YU-90059
GEN INFO
Illustration
YU-90058/YU-90059
This tool is used to install the crankshaft. Crankshaft installer bolt Bolt
90890-01275 YU-90060
This tool is used to install the crankshaft. Piston pin puller set Piston pin puller
90890-01304 YU-01304
YU-01304
This tool is used to remove the piston pin. Spacer Pot spacer
35
90890-01309 YU-90059
This tool is used to install the crankshaft. Tappet adjusting tool Valve adjuster 3 mm & 4 mm
90890-01311 YM-08035-A
This tool is necessary for adjusting the valve clearance.
1 - 13
SPECIAL TOOLS
Radiator cap tester Radiator pressure tester
GEN INFO
Illustration
90890-01325 YU-24460-01
YU-24460-01
This tool is used to check the cooling system. Locknut wrench
90890-01348 YM-01348
This tool is needed when removing or installing the secondary sheave spring. Radiator cap tester adapter Radiator pressure tester adapter
90890-01352 YU-33984
YU-33984
This tool is used to check the cooling system. Flywheel puller Heavy duty puller This tool is used to remove the AC magneto rotor. Oil filter wrench 90890-01426 YU-38411
90890-01362 YU-33270-B
This tool is needed to loosen or tighten the oil filter cartridge. Ring nut wrench
90890-01430 YM-38404
This tool is needed to removing and installing the middle driven shaft bearing retainer.
1 - 14
SPECIAL TOOLS
Ball joint remover 90890-01474 YM-01474
GEN INFO
Illustration
These tools are used to removing or installing the ball joints. Gear lash measurement tool Middle drive gear lash tool This tool is used to measure the gear lash. Ball joint remover attachment set Ball joint adapter set These tools are used to removing or installing the ball joints. Final gear backlash band
90890-01475 YM-01475
90890-01480 YM-01480
90890-01511 This tool is needed when measuring the final gear backlash. Ball joint remover short shaft set 90890-01514 These tools are used to removing or installing the ball joints. Sheave holder Primary clutch holder This tool is needed to hold the primary sheave when removing or installing the sheave nuts. Thickness gauge Narrow gauge set This tool is used to measure the valve clearance. Compression gauge Engine compression tester This tool is needed to measure engine compression. Pocket tester Analog pocket tester This instrument is needed for checking the electrical systems.
90890-01701 YS-01880-A
90890-03079 YM-34483
90890-03081 YU-33223
90890-03112 YU-03112-C
1 - 15
SPECIAL TOOLS
Timing light Inductive clamp timing light This tool is necessary for checking ignition timing. Pressure gauge 90890-03153 YU-03153
GEN INFO
Illustration
90890-03141 YU-03141
This tool is used to measure fuel pressure. Belt tension gauge Rear drive belt tension gauge This tool is used to measure the steering tension. Digital circuit tester Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer This tool is used to check the electrical systems. Fuel pressure adapter
90890-03170 YM-03170
90890-03174 YU-A1927
90890-03176 YM-03176
This tool is used to measure fuel pressure. Valve spring compressor
90890-04019 YM-04019
This tool is used to remove or install the valve assemblies. Middle driven shaft bearing driver Bearing driver 40 mm This tool is used to install the water pump seal. Valve guide remover (6) Valve guide remover (6.0 mm) This tool is needed to remove and install the valve guides. Valve guide installer (6) Valve guide installer (6.0 mm) This tool is needed to install the valve guides.
90890-04058 YM-04058
90890-04064 YM-04064-A
90890-04065 YM-04065-A
1 - 16
SPECIAL TOOLS
Valve guide reamer (6) Valve guide reamer (6.0 mm) This tool is needed to rebore the new valve guides. Spacer (crankshaft installer) Pot spacer
GEN INFO
Illustration
90890-04066 YM-04066
90890-04081 YM-91044
YM-91044
This tool is used to install the crankshaft. Extension 90890-04082 This tool is used to measure engine compression. Universal clutch holder
90890-04086 YM-91042 This tool is needed to hold the clutch carrier when removing or installing the carrier nut. Bearing retainer wrench Middle gear bearing retainer This tool is needed when removing or installing the bearing retainers. Adapter (M16) Adapter #13
90890-04128 YM-04128
90890-04130 YM-04059
This tool is used to install the crankshaft. Mechanical seal installer Water pump seal installer This tool is used to install the water pump seal.
90890-04132 YM-33221-A
1 - 17
SPECIAL TOOLS
Sheave spring compressor
GEN INFO
Illustration
90890-04134 YM-04134
This tool is needed when removing or installing the secondary sheave spring. Sheave fixed block Sheave fixed bracket
90890-04135 YM-04135
This tool is needed when removing or installing the secondary sheave spring. Ignition checker Opama pet-4000 spark checker This instrument is necessary for checking the ignition system components. Digital tachometer 90890-06760 YU-39951-B
90890-06754 YM-34487
This tool is needed for checking engine rpm. Yamaha bond No. 1215 (Three bond No.1215)
90890-85505 This bond is used on crankcase mating surfaces, etc.
1 - 18
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
EBS01001
SPEC
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Model code Dimensions Overall length Overall width Overall height Seat height Wheelbase Minimum ground clearance Minimum turning radius Basic weight With oil and fuel Engine Engine type Cylinder arrangement Displacement Bore stroke Compression ratio Standard compression pressure (at sea level) Starting system Lubrication system Oil type or grade Engine oil
0 10 30 50 70 90 110 130F
Standard 3B41 3B45 3B48 2,065 mm (81.3 in) 1,180 mm (46.5 in) 1,240 mm (48.8 in) 905 mm (35.6 in) 1,250 mm (49.2 in) 275 mm (10.8 in) 3,200 mm (126.0 in) 294.0 kg (648 lb) Liquid-cooled 4-stroke, SOHC Forward-inclined single cylinder 686.0 cm3 (41.86 cu. in) 102.0 84.0 mm (4.02 3.31 in) 9.20 : 1 450 kPa (4.50 kg/cm2, 64.0 psi) Electric starter Wet sump
API service SE, SF, SG type or higher JASO standard MA
YAMALUBE4 (20W40) or SAE 20W40 YAMALUBE4 (10W30) or SAE 10W30 SAE 5W30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
50C
Final gear oil Differential gear oil
SAE 80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil SAE 80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil
2-1
Item Oil quantity Engine oil Periodic oil change With oil filter replacement Total amount Final gear oil Periodic oil change Total amount Differential gear case oil Periodic oil change Total amount Radiator capacity (including all routes) Air filter Fuel Type Fuel tank capacity Fuel reserve amount Fuel injector Type/quantity Manufacturer Spark plug Type/manufacturer Spark plug gap Clutch type Transmission Primary reduction system Secondary reduction system Secondary reduction ratio Transmission type Operation Single speed automatic Sub transmission ratio low high Reverse gear Chassis Frame type Caster angle Camber angle Kingpin angle Kingpin offset Trail Tread front (STD) Tread rear (STD) Toe-in (with tires touching the ground)
SPEC
Standard
2.00 L (1.76 Imp qt, 2.11 US qt) 2.10 L (1.85 Imp qt, 2.22 US qt) 2.40 L (2.11 Imp qt, 2.54 US qt) 0.20 L (0.18 Imp qt, 0.21 US qt) 0.25 L (0.22 Imp qt, 0.26 US qt) 0.215 L (0.19 Imp qt, 0.23 US qt) 0.23 L (0.20 Imp qt, 0.24 US qt) 1.99 L (1.75 Imp qt, 2.10 US qt) Wet type element Unleaded gasoline only 20.0 L (4.40 Imp gal, 5.28 US gal) 4.5 L (0.99 Imp gal, 1.19 US gal) 297500-1010/1 DENSO CR8E/NGK 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in) Wet, centrifugal automatic V-belt Shaft drive 41/21 24/18 33/9 (9.544) V-belt automatic Left hand operation 2.380 ~ 0.700 : 1 31/16 (1.938) 29/25 (1.160) 23/14 28/23 (2.000) Steel tube frame 5.0 0 11.0 0 mm (0 in) 26.0 mm (1.02 in) 940.0 mm (37.01 in) 915.0 mm (37.01 in) 0 ~ 10.0 mm (0 ~ 0.39 in)
2-2
Item Tire Type Size Manufacturer/model Tire pressure (cold tire) Maximum load* Off-road riding front rear front rear front rear Tubeless Tubeless AT25 8-12 AT25 10-12 DUNLOP/KT421 DUNLOP/KT425
SPEC
Standard
front rear *Load is total weight of cargo, rider, accessories, and tongue Brake Front brake type operation Rear brake type operation Suspension Front suspension Rear suspension Shock absorber Front shock absorber Rear shock absorber Wheel travel Front wheel travel Rear wheel travel Electrical system Ignition system Generator system Battery type Battery capacity Bulb type
220.0 kg (485 lb) 32 ~ 38 kPa (0.32 ~ 0.38 kg/cm2, 4.6 ~ 5.5 psi) 27 ~ 33 kPa (0.27 ~ 0.33 kg/cm2, 3.9 ~ 4.8 psi)
Dual disc brake Right hand operation Dual disc brake Left hand and right foot operation Double wishbone Double wishbone Coil spring/oil damper Coil spring/oil damper 180 mm (7.1 in) 230 mm (9.1 in) Transistorized coil ignition (digital) AC magneto YTX20L-BS 12 V 18.0 Ah Halogen bulb
2-3
Item Bulb voltage/wattage quantity Headlight Tail/brake light Indicator light Neutral indicator light Reverse indicator light Coolant temperature warning light Engine trouble warning light EPS warning light Park indicator light On-command four-wheel drive/differential gear lock indicator High-range indicator light Low-range indicator light Differential gear lock indicator light
SPEC
Standard 12 V 35.0 W/35.0 W 2 12 V 21.0/5.0 W 1 LED LED LED LED LED LED LCD LED LED LED
2-4
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
EBS01002
SPEC
Item Cylinder head Maximum warpage ---Standard Limit 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
Cylinder Bore Measuring point
102.000 ~ 102.010 mm (4.0157 ~ 4.0161 in) 50.0 mm (1.97 in)
102.080 mm (4.0189 in) ----
Maximum taper Out of round Camshaft Drive system Camshaft lobe dimensions
0.05 mm (0.002 in) 0.05 mm (0.002 in) Chain drive (left) ----
Intake measurement
A B
Exhaust measurement
A B
Maximum camshaft runout
43.488 ~ 43.588 mm (1.7121 ~ 1.7161 in) 43.388 mm (1.7082 in) 36.959 ~ 37.059 mm (1.4551 ~ 1.4590 in) 36.859 mm (1.4511 in) 43.129 ~ 43.229 mm (1.6980 ~ 1.7019 in) 43.029 mm (1.6941 in) 37.007 ~ 37.107 mm (1.4570 ~ 1.4609 in) 36.907 mm (1.4530 in) ---0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
2-5
Item Timing chain Model/number of links Tensioning system Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft Rocker arm inside diameter Shaft outside diameter Arm-to-shaft clearance Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance Valve, valve seat, valve guide Valve clearanceintake (cold) Valve clearanceexhaust (cold) Valve dimensions Standard 98XRH2010/126 Automatic
SPEC
Limit -------------------
12.000 ~ 12.018 mm (0.4724 ~ 0.4731 in) 11.981 ~ 11.991 mm (0.4717 ~ 0.4721 in) 0.009 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) 0.009 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)
0.09 ~ 0.13 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0051 in) 0.16 ~ 0.20 mm (0.0063 ~ 0.0079 in)
-------
B A
Head Diameter Face Width
C D
Seat Width Margin Thickness
Valve head diameter A Intake Exhaust Valve face width B Intake Exhaust Valve seat width C Intake Exhaust Valve margin thickness D Intake Exhaust Valve stem diameter Intake Exhaust Valve guide inside diameter Intake Exhaust
37.90 ~ 38.10 mm (1.4921 ~ 1.5000 in) 31.90 ~ 32.10 mm (1.2559 ~ 1.2638 in) 2.26 mm (0.0890 in) 2.26 mm (0.0890 in) 1.00 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0394 ~ 0.0472 in) 1.00 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0394 ~ 0.0472 in)
------------1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in) ------5.945 mm (0.2341 in) 5.930 mm (0.2335 in) 6.050 mm (0.2382 in) 6.050 mm (0.2382 in)
0.80 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0472 in) 0.80 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0472 in) 5.975 ~ 5.990 mm (0.2352 ~ 0.2358 in) 5.960 ~ 5.975 mm (0.2346 ~ 0.2352 in)
6.000 ~ 6.012 mm (0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in) 6.000 ~ 6.012 mm (0.2362 ~ 0.2367 in)
2-6
Item Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance Intake Exhaust Valve stem runout Standard
SPEC
Limit 0.080 mm (0.0031 in) 0.100 mm (0.0039 in) 0.040 mm (0.0016 in)
0.010 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) ----
Valve seat width Intake Exhaust Valve spring Free length Intake Exhaust Installed length (valve closed) Intake Exhaust Compressed spring force (installed) Intake Exhaust Spring tilt
1.00 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0394 ~ 0.0472 in) 1.00 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0394 ~ 0.0472 in)
1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in)
38.79 mm (1.53 in) 38.79 mm (1.53 in)
36.85 mm (1.45 in) 36.85 mm (1.45 in) -------------
35.00 mm (1.38 in) 35.00 mm (1.38 in) 169 ~ 199 N (17.23 ~ 20.29 kgf, 37.99 ~ 44.73 lb) 169 ~ 199 N (17.23 ~ 20.29 kgf, 37.99 ~ 44.73 lb)
Intake Exhaust Winding direction (top view) Intake Exhaust
-------
2.5/1.70 mm (2.5/0.067 in) 2.5/1.70 mm (2.5/0.067 in) -------
Clockwise Clockwise
2-7
Item Piston Piston-to-cylinder clearance Diameter D Standard
SPEC
Limit 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) ----
0.030 ~ 0.055 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0022 in) 101.955 ~ 101.970 mm (4.0140 ~ 4.0146 in)
H D
Height H Offset Offset direction Piston pin bore inside diameter Piston pin outside diameter Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance Piston rings Top ring
B T
10.0 mm (0.39 in) ---0.50 mm (0.0197 in) ---Intake side ---23.004 ~ 23.015 mm (0.9057 ~ 0.9061 in) 23.045 mm (0.9073 in) 22.991 ~ 23.000 mm (0.9052 ~ 0.9055 in) 22.971 mm (0.9044 in) 0.004 ~ 0.024 mm (0.0002 ~ 0.0009 in) 0.074 mm (0.0029 in)
Ring type Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Ring side clearance 2nd ring
B T
Barrel 1.20 3.80 mm (0.05 0.15 in) 0.20 ~ 0.35 mm (0.008 ~ 0.014 in) 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in)
------0.60 mm (0.024 in) 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
Ring type Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Ring side clearance
Taper 1.20 4.00 mm (0.05 0.16 in) 0.75 ~ 0.90 mm (0.030 ~ 0.035 in) 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in)
------1.25 mm (0.049 in) 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)
2-8
Item Oil ring
B T
SPEC
Limit
Standard
Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Ring side clearance Crankshaft

F C C
2.50 2.80 mm (0.10 0.11 in) 0.20 ~ 0.70 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in) 0.060 ~ 0.150 mm (0.0024 ~ 0.0059 in)
----------
E D A
Crank width A Maximum runout C Big end side clearance D Big end radial clearance E Small end free play F Balancer Balancer drive method Automatic centrifugal clutch Clutch shoe thickness Clutch-in revolution Clutch-stall revolution Transmission Maximum main axle runout Maximum drive axle runout Shifting mechanism Shift mechanism type Decompression device Device type Air filter oil grade Throttle body Model/manufacturer quantity Engine idle speed Intake vacuum
74.95 ~ 75.00 mm (2.951 ~ 2.953 in) ---0.350 ~ 0.650 mm (0.0138 ~ 0.0256 in) 0.010 ~ 0.025 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0010 in) 0.16 ~ 0.40 mm (0.0063 ~ 0.0157 in) Gear 1.5 mm (0.06 in) 1,850 ~ 2,250 r/min 3,500 ~ 4,100 r/min -------
---0.030 mm (0.0012 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) ---------1.0 mm (0.04 in) ------0.06 mm (0.0024 in) 0.06 mm (0.0024 in) -------------------
Shift drum and guide bar Auto decomp Foam air filter oil or equivalent oil 44EIS/MIKUNI 1 1,350 ~ 1,450 r/min 35.0 kPa (263 mmHg, 10.3 inHg)
2-9
Item Fuel pump Pump type Model/manufacturer Oil filter type Oil pump Oil pump type Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-andouter-rotor clearance Oil pressure (hot) Pressure check location Cooling system Radiator core Width Height Depth Radiator cap opening pressure Coolant reservoir capacity Up to the maximum level mark From low to full level Water pump Water pump type Reduction ratio Shaft drive Middle gear backlash Final gear backlash Differential gear backlash Standard Electrical 3B4/DENSO Cartridge (paper) Trochoid Less than 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
SPEC
Limit ------------0.20 mm (0.0079 in) 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) 0.17 mm (0.0067 in) -------
0.090 ~ 0.170 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0067 in) 0.03 ~ 0.10 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0039 in) 50.0 kPa at 1,600 r/min (0.50 kg/cm2 at 1,600 r/min, 7.1 psi at 1,600 r/min) Cylinder head
340.0 mm (13.39 in) 248.2 mm (9.77 in) 22.0 mm (0.87 in) 93.3 ~ 122.7 kPa (0.933 ~ 1.227 kg/cm2, 13.27 ~ 17.45 psi) 0.17 L (0.15 Imp qt, 0.18 US qt) 0.14 L (0.12 Imp qt, 0.15 US qt) Single-suction centrifugal pump 32/31 (1.032) 0.10 ~ 0.30 mm (0.004 ~ 0.012 in) 0.10 ~ 0.20 mm (0.0039 ~ 0.0079 in) 0.05 ~ 0.25 mm (0.0020 ~ 0.0098 in)
-------------
----------------------
2 - 10
Cylinder head tightening sequence
SPEC
5 7 2
1 8 4 6
2 - 11
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
EBS01003
SPEC
Item Steering system Steering bearing type Steering tension Front suspension Shock absorber travel Spring free length Installed length Spring rate (K1) Spring stroke (K1) Optional spring available Rear suspension Shock absorber travel Spring free length Installed length Spring rate (K1) Spring rate (K2) Spring stroke (K1) Spring stroke (K2) Optional spring available Front wheel Type Rim size Rim material Maximum radial wheel runout Maximum lateral wheel runout Rear wheel Type Rim size Rim material Maximum radial wheel runout Maximum lateral wheel runout Standard Ball and race bearing 50 N (5.0 kgf) 90.7 mm (3.57 in) 292.0 mm (11.50 in) 237.0 mm (9.33 in) 23.00 N/mm (2.35 kg/mm, 131.33 lb/in) 0 ~ 90.7 mm (0 ~ 3.57 in) No 109.2 mm (4.30 in) 314.5 mm (12.38 in) 271.0 mm (10.67 in) 33.50 N/mm (3.42 kg/mm, 191.28 lb/in) 36.00 N/mm (3.67 kg/mm, 205.56 lb/in) 0 ~ 46.5 mm (0 ~ 1.83 in) 46.5 ~ 109.2 mm (1.83 ~ 4.30 in) No Panel wheel 12 6.0 AT Aluminum ------Limit ---------------------------------------------------------2.0 mm (0.08 in) 2.0 mm (0.08 in) ---------2.0 mm (0.08 in) 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Panel wheel 12 7.5 AT Aluminum -------
2 - 12
Item Front disc brake Type Disc outside diameter thickness Brake disc minimum thickness Brake disc maximum deflection Pad thickness inner Pad thickness outer Master cylinder inside diameter Caliper cylinder inside diameter Brake fluid type Rear disc brake Type Disc outside diameter thickness Brake disc minimum thickness Brake disc maximum deflection Pad thickness inner Pad thickness outer Master cylinder inside diameter Caliper cylinder inside diameter Brake fluid type Brake lever and brake pedal Brake pedal position Brake pedal free play Throttle lever free play Standard Dual 220.0 3.5 mm (8.66 0.14 in) 3.0 mm (0.12 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 4.4 mm (0.17 in) 4.4 mm (0.17 in) 12.70 mm (0.50 in) 33.96 mm (1.34 in) DOT 4 Dual 205.0 3.5 mm (8.07 0.14 in) 3.0 mm (0.12 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in) 5.8 mm (0.23 in) 5.8 mm (0.23 in) 12.70 mm (0.50 in) 33.96 mm (1.34 in) DOT 4 56.7 mm (2.23 in) 0 ~ 5.0 mm (0 ~ 0.20 in) 3.0 ~ 5.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in)
SPEC
Limit ------------1.0 mm (0.04 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) ---------------------1.0 mm (0.04 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) -------------------
2 - 13
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
EBS01004
SPEC
Item System voltage Ignition system Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) Advancer type Transistorized coil ignition Crankshaft position sensor resistance/color ECU Model/manufacturer Ignition coil Model/manufacturer Minimum ignition spark gap Primary coil resistance Secondary coil resistance Spark plug cap Material Resistance AC magneto Model/manufacturer Standard output Stator coil resistance/color Rectifier/regulator Type Model/manufacturer No load regulated voltage Rectifier capacity Withstand voltage Electric starting system Type Starter motor Model/manufacturer Power output Armature coil resistance Brush overall length Spring force Commutator diameter Mica undercut 12 V 12/1,400 r/min Digital 459 ~ 561 at 20 C (68 F)/ black-green/yellow 3B4/MITSUBISHI JO226/DENSO 6.0 mm (0.24 in) 3.4 ~ 4.6 at 20 C (68 F) 10.4 ~ 15.6 k at 20 C (68 F) Resin 10.0 k F4T393/MITSUBISHI 14.0 V 35.0 A at 5,000 r/min 0.108 ~ 0.132 at 20 C (68 F)/ white-white Semiconductor-short-circuit FH012AA/SHINDENGEN 14.2 ~ 14.8 V 50.0 A 40.0 V Constant mesh SM-13/MITSUBA 0.80 kW 0.0250 ~ 0.0350 at 20 C (68 F) 12.5 mm (0.49 in) 7.65 ~ 10.01 N (780 ~ 1,021 gf, 27.54 ~ 36.03 oz) 28.0 mm (1.10 in) 0.70 mm (0.03 in) Standard Limit -------------
-------------------------------
(DC)
---------------------------5.00 mm (0.20 in) ---27.0 mm (1.06 in) ----
2 - 14
Item Starter relay Model/manufacturer Amperage rating Coil winding resistance Fuel gauge Sender unit resistance (full) Sender unit resistance (empty) Starting circuit cut-off relay Model/manufacturer Coil resistance Radiator fan motor relay Model/manufacturer Coil resistance Circuit breaker Circuit breaker type Fuses Main fuse Headlight fuse Signaling system fuse Ignition fuse Auxiliary DC jack fuse Fuel injection system fuse Four-wheel-drive motor fuse EPS fuse Radiator fan motor fuse Spare fuse Standard 2768113-A/JIDECO 180.0 A 4.18 ~ 4.62 at 20 C (68 F) 19.00 ~ 21.00 139.00 ~ 141.00 ACM33211/MATSUSHITA 96.0 ACM33211/MATSUSHITA 96.0 Fuse 40.0 A 15.0 A 5.0 A 10.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 10.0 A 40.0 A 15.0 A 40.0 A 15.0 A 10.0 A 5.0 A
SPEC
Limit ----------------------------------------------------------------------
2 - 15
TIGHTENING TORQUES
EBS01005
SPEC
TIGHTENING TORQUES
ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES Item Cylinder head (exhaust pipe) Cylinder head Cylinder head Cylinder head Spark plug Oil gallery bolt Cylinder AC magneto rotor Balancer driven gear Thermostat cover Cylinder head air bleed bolt Valve adjusting screw Decompression assembly Timing chain guide (intake side) Timing chain tensioner cap Timing chain tensioner Bearing retainer (camshaft) Camshaft sprocket cover Tappet cover Camshaft sprocket Crankcase Part name Stud bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Union bolt Bolt Nut Nut Bolt Bolt Nut Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Union bolt Union bolt Union bolt Bolt Nut Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Nut Bolt Bolt Bolt Thread Qty size M8 M9 M9 M6 M10 M8 M10 M16 M18 M6 M6 M6 M7 M6 M16 M6 M6 M6 M6 M7 M8 M6 M6 M14 M20 M20 M14 M10 M6 M10 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M6 M6 M6 4 4 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 2 1 4 2 2 1 2 2 2 8 2 2 4 8 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 4 2 1 1 Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 15 35 38 10 13 10 50 70 80 10 10 14 20 10 20 10 10 10 10 20 26 10 10 30 17 68 35 20 10 22 10 7 20 20 20 10 10 10 1.5 3.5 3.8 1.0 1.3 1.0 5.0 7.0 8.0 1.0 1.0 1.4 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.6 1.0 1.0 3.0 1.7 6.8 3.5 2.0 1.0 2.2 1.0 0.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 11 25 27 7.2 9.4 7.2 36 50 58 7.2 7.2 10 14 7.2 14 7.2 7.2 7.2 7.2 14 19 7.2 7.2 22 12 49 25 14 7.2 16 7.2 5.1 14 14 14 7.2 7.2 7.2 Use a lock washer. Remarks
M
E
See NOTE.
E
LT
LT
Engine oil drain bolt Oil filter cartridge Oil filter cartridge union bolt Oil delivery pipe Oil delivery pipe Oil pump Oil pump driven gear Bearing retainer (crankcase) Exhaust pipe protector Muffler and frame Muffler and muffler bracket Exhaust pipe Water pump housing Coolant drain bolt Water pump air bleed bolt
Use a lock washer.

LT
2 - 16
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item Water pump outlet pipe Water jacket joint Timing chain guide Crankshaft end accessing screw Timing mark accessing screw Drive belt cover Bearing housing (primary sheave assembly) AC magneto/crankshaft position sensor lead holder Starter one-way clutch Clutch housing assembly Clutch carrier assembly Middle drive pinion gear nut Middle driven shaft bearing housing Middle drive shaft bearing retainer Front drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) Middle driven shaft bearing retainer Part name Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Screw Bolt Nut Nut Bolt Bolt Nut Nut Thread Qty size M6 M6 M6 M36 M14 M6 M6 M5 M8 M6 M22 M22 M8 M6 M16 M55 1 2 2 1 1 12 4 2 3 9 1 1 4 4 1 1
SPEC
Remarks
Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 10 10 10 10 6 10 10 7 30 10 190 180 32 29 115 80 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.6 1.0 1.0 0.7 3.0 1.0 19.0 18.0 3.2 2.9 11.5 8.0 7.2 7.2 7.2 7.2 4.3 7.2 7.2 5.1 22 7.2
LT
LT
LT
Left-hand thread 140 Stake.

M
130 Stake. 23 21 85 58 Left-hand thread

LT
Middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer Rear drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) Middle driven pinion gear bearing housing Primary sheave assembly Secondary sheave spring retainer Secondary sheave assembly Shift lever 2 assembly Shift drum stopper Stopper lever stopper Stator coil assembly Crankshaft position sensor Coolant temperature sensor Gear position switch Reverse switch Speed sensor
Nut Nut Bolt Nut Nut Nut Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt
M60 M16 M8 M16 M36 M16 M6 M14 M14 M6 M5 M12 M6 M10 M6
1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1
130 150 25 140 90 100 14 18 18 7 7 18 7 17 10
13.0 15.0 2.5 14.0 9.0 10.0 1.4 1.8 1.8 0.7 0.7 1.8 0.7 1.7 1.0
94 110 18 100 65 72 10 13 13 5.1 5.1 13 5.1 12 7.2
Left-hand thread
LT
LT
LT LT
2 - 17
TIGHTENING TORQUES
SPEC
NOTE: Temporarily tighten the cylinder bolts to 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb) and then tighten them to 50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb).
2 - 18
TIGHTENING TORQUES
EBS01006
SPEC
CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES Part to be tightened Engine and front rubber damper Engine and front rubber damper Engine and rear rubber damper Engine and rear rubber damper Rubber damper and frame Differential gear case and frame Differential gear case and frame Final gear case and frame Radiator and frame Coolant reservoir and frame Shift arm Select lever shift rod locknut Select lever unit and frame Select lever guide and frame Front grill and front grill bracket Front grill bracket and frame Front fender and frame Rear fender and frame Radiator bracket and frame Rear upper arm and frame Rear lower arm and frame Rear shock absorber and frame Rear shock absorber and rear lower arm Rear knuckle and rear upper arm Rear knuckle and rear lower arm Rear brake hose guide and rear lower arm Stabilizer joint and stabilizer Stabilizer joint and rear lower arm Stabilizer holder and frame Rear arm protector and rear lower arm Front upper arm and frame Front lower arm and frame Front shock absorber and frame Front shock absorber and front lower arm Front brake hose holder and front upper arm Select lever shift rod end Steering stem bushing and steering stem bracket Steering stem joint bolt EPS unit and frame Steering stem bracket and frame Steering stem bearing and frame Thread size M10 M6 M10 M6 M10 M10 M10 M10 M6 M6 M6 M8 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M6 M10 M10 M8 M6 M10 M10 M10 M10 M6 M10 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 42 10 42 10 42 55 55 55 7 7 14 15 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 45 45 45 45 45 45 7 50 50 30 7 45 45 45 45 7 15 23 30 30 50 50 4.2 1.0 4.2 1.0 4.2 5.5 5.5 5.5 0.7 0.7 1.4 1.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.7 5.0 5.0 3.0 0.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.7 1.5 2.3 3.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 30 7.2 30 7.2 30 40 40 40 5.1 5.1 10 11 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 32 32 32 32 32 32 5.1 36 36 22 5.1 32 32 32 32 5.1 11 17 22 22 36 36 Remarks
LT
LT
LT
LS LS
LS LS
Left-hand thread
LT LT LT LT
2 - 19
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Part to be tightened Pitman arm nut EPS motor cover Pitman arm and tie-rod Steering knuckle and tie-rod Steering knuckle and front lower arm Front arm protector and front lower arm Fuel tank and fuel pump Fuel tank and frame Fuel tank side cover and frame Front wheel and front wheel hub Front wheel axle nut Front brake caliper and steering knuckle Front brake caliper bleed screw Front brake disc and front wheel hub Rear brake disc and rear wheel hub Rear wheel and rear wheel hub Rear wheel axle nut Rear brake caliper and rear knuckle Rear brake caliper bleed screw Brake pad holding bolt Rear knuckle and brake disc guard Steering knuckle and brake disc guard Brake master cylinder and brake master cylinder holder Brake lever pivot Handlebar holder and steering shaft Brake hose joint and frame Brake hose joint and brake hose Brake hose union bolt Rear knuckle and brake hose protector Footrest bracket and frame Footrest board and footrest bracket Footrest and footrest board Brake pedal adjusting nut Shift control cable and shift lever cover Front guard and frame Front carrier and front guard Front carrier and front carrier bracket Front carrier bracket and frame Front carrier and front fender Rear carrier and rear carrier bracket Rear carrier bracket and frame Thread size M16 M6 M10 M10 M12 M6 M6 M6 M6 M10 M20 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M20 M8 M8 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M6 M10 M10 M6 M10 M6 M6 M6 M14 M8 M8 M8 M8 M6 M8 M10
SPEC
Remarks
Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 210 7 25 25 30 7 7 7 7 55 260 30 5 30 30 55 260 30 5 17 7 7 7 6 20 10 19 27 7 53 7 7 7 17 26 26 26 26 7 34 48 21.0 0.7 2.5 2.5 3.0 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 5.5 26.0 3.0 0.5 3.0 3.0 5.5 26.0 3.0 0.5 1.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.6 2.0 1.0 1.9 2.7 0.7 5.3 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.7 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 0.7 3.4 4.8
150 5.1 18 18 22 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 40 190 Stake. 22 3.6 22 22 40 190 Stake. 22 3.6 12 5.1 5.1 5.1 4.3 14 7.2 13 19 5.1 38 5.1 5.1 5.1 12 19 19 19 19 5.1 24 35
LT LT
Silicone grease
2 - 20
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Part to be tightened Rear carrier and rear fender Engine skid plates Trailer hitch and frame Battery holding bracket Battery bracket and fitting screw Fitting screw and frame Electrical components tray and frame Differential gear case filler bolt Differential gear case drain bolt Differential gear case cover and differential gear case Differential gear motor and differential gear case cover Front drive shaft coupling gear and differential drive pinion gear Final gear case filler plug Final gear case drain bolt Final gear oil level check bolt Final gear case and final gear case cover Final drive pinion gear bearing housing and final gear case Thread size M6 M6 M10 M6 M6 M6 M6 M14 M10 M8 M6 M14 M14 M14 M8 M8 M8
SPEC
Remarks
Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 7 7 55 7 7 7 7 23 10 24 11 62 23 23 10 23 23 0.7 0.7 5.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 2.3 1.0 2.4 1.1 6.2 2.3 2.3 1.0 2.3 2.3 5.1 5.1 40 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 17 7.2 17 8.0 45 17 17 7.2 17 17
LT
2 - 21
HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE/ GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

EBS00022 EBS00023
SPEC
HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE

All specification data in this manual are listed in SI and METRIC UNITS. Use this table to convert METRIC unit data to IMPERIAL unit data. Ex. METRIC ** mm 2 mm MULTIPLIER 0.03937 0.03937 = = IMPERIAL ** in 0.08 in
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

This chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch. Tightening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter of this manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross pattern and progressive stages until the specified tightening torque is reached. Unless otherwise specified, tightening torque specifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature. A: Distance between flats B: Outside thread diameter A (nut) 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 17 mm 19 mm 22 mm B (bolt) 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm General tightening torques Nm 6 15 30 55 85 130 m kg 0.6 1.5 3.0 5.5 8.5 13.0 ft lb 4.3 11 22 40 61 94
CONVERSION TABLE
METRIC TO IMPERIAL Metric unit Torque m kg m kg cm kg cm kg kg g km/hr km m m cm mm cc (cm3) cc (cm3) lt (liter) lt (liter) kg/mm kg/cm2 Centigrade (C) Multiplier 7.233 86.794 0.0723 0.8679 2.205 0.03527 0.6214 0.6214 3.281 1.094 0.3937 0.03937 0.03527 0.06102 0.8799 0.2199 55.997 14.2234 9/5+32 Imperial unit ft lb in lb ft lb in lb lb oz mph mi ft yd in in oz (IMP liq.) cu in qt (IMP liq.) gal (IMP liq.) lb/in psi (lb/in2) Fahrenheit (F)
Weight Speed
Distance
Volume/ Capacity
Misc.
2 - 22
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

EBS00024
SPEC

ENGINE Lubrication point Oil seal lips Bearings O-ring Cylinder head bolts Crankshaft pin Connecting rod big end thrust surface Crankshaft sprocket Inner race (crankshaft) Buffer boss (crankshaft) Crankshaft seal Piston pin Piston and ring groove Valve stems (intake and exhaust) Valve stem ends (intake and exhaust) Rocker arm shafts Camshaft lobes Decompressor lever pin Decompressor lever spring Rocker arms (intake and exhaust) Oil pump shaft O-ring (oil filter cartridge) Water pump impeller shaft Dipstick mating surface Starter idler gear inner surface Starter idler gear shaft Starter wheel gear Torque limiter Clutch housing shaft end Clutch carrier assembly One-way clutch bearing Clutch dog and middle drive gear Reverse idle gear shaft Middle driven shaft splines Shift drum Shift forks and shift fork guide bar Ball (shift drum stopper) Stopper lever and stopper lever shaft
LS
E
Lubricant
LS
E
LS
M
E
M
E
M
E
LS
M
E
2 - 23

Lubrication point Shift lever 2 inner surface Shift lever 1 Shift lever 1 gear teeth and shift lever 2 gear teeth Stopper lever stopper Bearing (final drive pinion gear assembly) Bearing (final gear) AC magneto lead grommet Crankcase mating surface
SPEC
Lubricant
LS
E
Yamaha bond No.1215 (Three bond No.1215) Yamaha bond No.1215 (Three bond No.1215)
2 - 24
COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS

EBS00025
SPEC
COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS

1 Coolant reservoir hose 2 Radiator inlet hose 3 Fast idle plunger outlet hose 4 Coolant reservoir 5 Water pump 6 Water pump outlet pipe 7 Water pump outlet hose 8 Radiator outlet hose 9 Radiator 0 Fast idle plunger inlet hose
A 1 2 3 4 A
2 - 25
OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

EBS00026
SPEC
OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

1 Oil delivery pipe 2 Oil filter cartridge 3 Oil strainer 4 Drive axle 5 Relief valve assembly 6 Reverse idle gear shaft
2 B 4 3
2 6
B-B
2 - 26
OIL FLOW DIAGRAMS

1 Camshaft 2 Crankshaft 3 Oil strainer 4 Oil pump rotor 5 Oil pump driven gear
SPEC
2 - 27
CABLE ROUTING
EBS00028
SPEC
CABLE ROUTING
1 Front brake light switch lead 2 On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch lead 3 Front brake hose 4 Throttle cable 5 Rear brake cable 6 Shift control cable 7 Rear brake hose 8 Left handlebar switch lead 9 Rear brake light switch lead 0 Radiator fan motor breather hose A Differential gear case breather hose B EPS motor breather hose C Radiator fan motor lead D Meter assembly lead E Final gear case breather hose
1234
6 5
7 8 9
2 2 1 A-A E 8 9 B-B 0 A D C D C-C 0 D-D D C C 1 A A B B 8 9 0 A B
2 - 28
CABLE ROUTING
Pass the front brake hose and throttle cable through the guide on the handlebar cover. Pass the rear brake cable, shift control cable, and rear brake hose through the guide on the handlebar cover. Route the rear brake cable, shift control cable, and rear brake hose in front of the left handlebar switch lead and rear brake light switch lead.
SPEC
Pass the rear brake hose and throttle cable through the guide, making sure to route the cable behind the hose. Pass the rear brake cable and shift control cable through the guide. Pass the front brake hose through the guide. Route the throttle cable behind the rear brake cable and shift control cable.
1234
6 5
7 8 9
2 - 29
CABLE ROUTING
Route the front brake light switch lead, on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch lead, left handlebar switch lead, and rear brake light switch lead over the throttle cable, rear brake cable, and shift control cable, then to the front of where the cables cross.
SPEC
Fasten the left handlebar switch lead and rear brake light switch lead with the plastic bands at the bends in the handlebar, making sure to route the leads under the handlebar and to face the ends of the bands forward. Pass the radiator fan motor breather hose through the guide on the meter bracket, making sure to face the end of the hose downward. Pass the differential gear case breather hose through the guide on the meter bracket, making sure to face the end of the hose downward.
1234
6 5
7 8 9
2 - 30
CABLE ROUTING
Pass the EPS motor breather hose through the guide on the meter bracket, making sure to face the end of the hose downward. Route the radiator fan motor breather hose and differential gear case breather hose in front of the frame. Fasten the differential gear case breather hose to the frame with the plastic band, making sure to face the end of the band inward. Route the differential gear case breather hose to the inside of the frame.
SPEC
Fasten the front brake light switch lead, on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch lead, left handlebar switch lead, and rear brake light switch lead with a plastic locking tie. Be sure to fasten the plastic locking tie above the couplers and fasten it around the protective sleeves of the leads, not the leads themselves. Pass the final gear case breather hose through the guide on the meter bracket, making sure to face the end of the hose downward.
1234
6 5
7 8 9
2 - 31
CABLE ROUTING
Fasten the front brake light switch lead and oncommand four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch lead with the plastic bands at the bends in the handlebar, making sure to route the leads under the handlebar and to face the ends of the bands forward. 20 ~ 50 mm (0.79 ~ 1.97 in)
SPEC
1234
6 5
7 8 9
2 - 32
CABLE ROUTING
1 Coolant reservoir hose 2 Radiator fan motor breather hose 3 Differential gear case breather hose 4 EPS motor breather hose 5 Ground lead 6 Coolant reservoir breather hose 7 Throttle cable 8 Fuel injector lead 9 Final gear case breather hose 0 Speed sensor lead A Crankshaft position sensor lead
SPEC
B Differential gear motor lead C EPS torque sensor lead D Fast idle plunger outlet hose E Radiator outlet hose F Gear position switch lead G Reverse switch lead H Shift control cable I Starter motor lead Face the end of the coolant reservoir breather hose downward.
2 1 34 5 6 7
A D B C B C A D
9 C E E B 0 A
A-A F 0
1 4 B-B
1 4 C-C E
A I G D 5 H A 9 E-E
2 - 33
CABLE ROUTING
Route the ground lead, radiator fan motor breather hose, differential gear case breather hose, and EPS motor breather hose to the inside of the fast idle plunger outlet hose. Pass the radiator fan motor breather hose through the larger diameter guide. Route the coolant reservoir breather hose to the outside of the fast idle plunger outlet hose. Route the fuel injector lead under the fuel hose.
SPEC
Fasten the radiator outlet hose to the frame with the plastic band, making sure to face the end of the band inward. Route the EPS motor breather hose under the coolant reservoir hose. Place the EPS torque sensor lead and differential gear motor lead in the holder, and then insert the ends of the holder into the hole in the stay on the frame. Route the differential gear case breather hose to the inside of the frame.
2 1 34 5 6 7
A D B C B C A D
9 C E E B 0 A
A-A F 0
1 4 B-B
1 4 C-C E
A I G D 5 H A 9 E-E
2 - 34
CABLE ROUTING
Fasten the differential gear case breather hose to the frame with the plastic band, making sure to face the end of the band inward. Attach the ground lead terminal to the frame using the bolt. Route the radiator fan motor breather hose and differential gear case breather hose to the inside of the fast idle plunger outlet hose and radiator outlet hose. Make sure that the catch of the holder is facing outward.
SPEC
Face the end of the plastic band inward. Route the fuel tank drain hose and position the end of the hose as shown in the illustration. Pass the speed sensor lead, AC magneto lead, and final gear case breather hose through the guide in the order listed. Route the speed sensor lead, AC magneto lead, and final gear case breather hose to the right of the reverse switch. Route the final gear case breather hose above the reverse switch lead and ground leads.
2 1 34 5 6 7
A D B C B C A D
9 C E E B 0 A
A-A F 0
1 4 B-B
1 4 C-C E
A I G D 5 H A 9 E-E
2 - 35
CABLE ROUTING
Route the shift control cable under the gear position switch lead, speed sensor lead, and crankshaft position sensor lead.
SPEC
2 1 34 5 6 7
A D B C B C A D
9 C E E B 0 A
A-A F 0
1 4 B-B
1 4 C-C E
A I G D 5 H A 9 E-E
2 - 36
CABLE ROUTING
1 Wire harness 2 Fuel injector lead 3 Fuel hose 4 Intake air temperature sensor lead 5 Final gear case breather hose 6 Ground lead 7 Starter motor lead 8 Air filter case breather hose 9 Main switch lead 0 Auxiliary DC jack lead A EPS motor lead
SPEC
B Differential gear motor lead C EPS torque sensor lead D Radiator fan motor lead E Radiator inlet hose F EPS motor breather hose G Spark plug lead H Rear brake cable I Shift control cable J Fuel tank drain hose K Gear position switch lead L AC magneto lead
567 8 4 3 2 1 B A N M L K A F E E B
90A B C D
C C D
J 5 L A-A 1 6 N 7 1 B C A D-D
I 7 1 5 6
H G B P B-B I G E-E F-F H I O C-C
2 - 37
CABLE ROUTING
M Speed sensor lead N Coolant temperature sensor lead O EPS motor lead coupler P EPS torque sensor lead coupler Route the fuel hose between the wire harness and the fuel tank drain hose. Route the coolant temperature sensor lead above the fast idle plunger inlet hose. Route the final gear case breather hose above the V-belt cooling duct 1.
SPEC
Route the radiator fan motor lead between the electrical components tray and the radiator inlet hose. Fasten the radiator fan motor lead to the frame with the plastic band, making sure to face the end of the band inward. Route the fuel tank drain hose to the inside of the leads and fuel hose, making sure to position the end of the drain hose as shown in the illustration.
567 8 4 3 2 1 B A N M L K A F E E B
90A B C D
C C D
J 5 L A-A 1 6 N 7 1 B C A D-D
I 7 1 5 6
H G B P B-B I G E-E F-F H I O C-C
2 - 38
CABLE ROUTING
Fasten the final gear case breather hose, ground lead, starter motor lead, fuel injector lead, coolant temperature sensor lead, AC magneto lead, and wire harness with the plastic band, making sure to position the band near the split in the wire harness. Route the fuel injector lead and coolant temperature sensor lead to the inside of the ground lead, starter motor lead, final drive gear case breather hose, and wire harness.
SPEC
Face the end of the plastic band inward. Pass the plastic band through the hole in the plastic cover, and then fasten the leads and hose with the band, making sure to face the end of the band downward. Insert the projection on the coupler into the hole in the frame from the inside of the frame. Face the end of the plastic band inward. Fasten the spark plug lead with the larger diameter section of each holder.
2 - 39
CABLE ROUTING
1 Tail/brake light lead 2 Rectifier/regulator lead 3 AC magneto lead 4 Speed sensor lead 5 Final gear case breather hose 6 Fuel hose 7 Fuel pump lead 8 Wire harness
SPEC
To tail/brake light Fasten the tail/brake light lead to the frame with a plastic locking tie, making sure to face the end of the tie downward. Install the plastic band near the split in the wire harness. Route the tail/brake light lead to the outside of the frame. Face the end of the plastic band downward. Pass the final gear case breather hose through the guide.
3 B
C C
7 6
1 6 2
8 3
A-A 3 B-B
C-C
2 - 40
CABLE ROUTING
1 Left headlight lead 2 Negative battery lead 3 Right headlight lead 4 Radiator fan motor lead 5 EPS control unit lead 6 Auxiliary DC jack lead 7 Main switch lead 8 Final gear case breather hose 9 Starter motor lead 0 Differential gear motor lead A Ignition coil lead
SPEC
B Meter lead C Lean angle sensor lead D Coolant reservoir breather hose E Positive battery lead F Coolant reservoir hose G EPS motor breather hose H Differential gear case breather hose I Radiator fan motor breather hose J Ground lead K Relay lead L Wire harness
I H G F
C A A
4 5
E D IHG 2 G B D J G E
6 7
B 5 A D C 09
D 8 C
L 34 K A-A 1 K C-C 3 4 F F 5 5 F-F M D-D 2 B-B L
G-G
K5
L E-E
2 - 41
CABLE ROUTING
M Joint coupler lead To left headlight Connect the headlight lead coupler, and then fasten the coupler with the holder on the electrical components tray. Route the negative battery lead along the guide on the electrical components tray. To right headlight Place the couplers on the inside of the electrical components tray.
SPEC
To main switch and auxiliary DC jack Fasten the left handlebar switch lead, on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch lead, front brake light switch lead, and rear brake light switch lead with the clamp. Fasten the joint coupler lead with the clamp. Pass the coolant reservoir breather hose through the guides on the plastic cover and electrical components tray and route it under the positive battery lead and starter motor lead.
I H G F
C A A
4 5
6 7
B 5 A D C 09
D 8 C
G-G
K5
L E-E
2 - 42
CABLE ROUTING
Route the hoses under the positive battery lead, and then route them upward, to the inside of the coolant reservoir breather hose. Fasten the coolant reservoir breather hose with the holder on the electrical components tray. Fasten the coolant reservoir hose with the holder on the electrical components tray. Pass the hoses and ground lead through the opening in the electrical components tray. Route the coolant reservoir breather hose above the other hoses.
SPEC
Route the hoses to the inside of the bolt.
I H G F
C A A
4 5
6 7
B 5 A D C 09
D 8 C
G-G
K5
L E-E
2 - 43
CABLE ROUTING
1 Throttle cable 2 Rear brake hose 3 Rear brake cable 4 Front brake hose 5 Negative battery lead 6 Final gear case breather hose 7 Starter motor lead 8 Intake air pressure sensor lead 9 TPS lead 0 Intake air temperature sensor lead A Fuel injector lead
SPEC
B Coolant temperature sensor lead C Rectifier/regulator lead D AC magneto lead E Fuel hose F Tail/brake light lead G Fuel pump lead H Fast idle plunger outlet hose I Wire harness Route the final gear case breather hose on top of the leads.
3 2 1 A A
4 5 6 7 8
H B
B 9 0 A B C D
G E
1 C A-A C
F F I 0 9
B-B
C-C
2 - 44
CABLE ROUTING
To engine To air filter case Route the fuel injector lead and coolant temperature sensor lead to the outside of the frame. Pass the tail/brake light lead through the hole in the rear fender. Fasten the tail/brake light lead with the holder, making sure that the coupler is positioned to the rear of the holder. Route the throttle cable under the plastic cover.
SPEC
Route the fast idle plunger outlet hose above the plastic cover. Pass the throttle cable through the guide on the plastic cover. Insert the projection on the wire harness holder into the hole in the plastic cover.
3 2 1 A A
4 5 6 7 8
H B
B 9 0 A B C D
G E
1 C A-A C
F F I 0 9
B-B
C-C
2 - 45
INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

EBS00029
CHK ADJ
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended checks and adjustments. These preventive maintenance procedures, if followed, will ensure more reliable vehicle operation and a longer service life. The need for costly overhaul work will be greatly reduced. This information applies to vehicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All service technicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.
EBU21742
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

NOTE: For ATVs not equipped with an odometer or an hour meter, follow the month maintenance intervals. For ATVs equipped with an odometer or an hour meter, follow the km (mi) or hours maintenance intervals. However, keep in mind that if the ATV isnt used for a long period of time, the month maintenance intervals should be followed. Items marked with an asterisk should be performed by a Yamaha dealer as they require special tools, data and technical skills.
INITIAL NO. ITEM CHECK OR MAINTENANCE JOB Whichever comes first month km (mi) hours 1 * 2 3 * 4 * 5 * Fuel line Spark plug Valves Fuel injection Crankcase breather system Check fuel hoses for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Check condition and clean, regap, or replace if necessary. Check valve clearance and adjust if necessary. Check and adjust engine idle speed. Check breather hose for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Check for leakage and replace gasket(s) if necessary. Check for looseness and tighten all screw clamps and joints if necessary. Clean. 1 320 (200) 20 3 1300 (800) 80 6 2500 (1600) 160 6 2500 (1600) 160 EVERY 12 5000 (3200) 320
6 *
Exhaust system
Spark arrester
3-1
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART

EBU21863
CHK ADJ
EVERY 6 2500 (1600) 160 6 2500 (1600) 160 12 5000 (3200) 320

INITIAL NO. ITEM CHECK OR MAINTENANCE JOB Whichever comes first month km (mi) hours 1 Air filter element Clean and replace if necessary. Check operation and correct if necessary. Check fluid level and ATV for fluid leakage, and correct if necessary. Replace brake pads. Check operation and correct if necessary. Check brake pedal free play and adjust if necessary. Check fluid level and ATV for fluid leakage, and correct if necessary. Replace brake pads. 4 * Brake hoses Rear brake hose protectors Wheels Check for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Replace. 5 6 * * Check for wear, cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Check runout and for damage, and replace if necessary. Check tread depth and for damage, and replace if necessary. Check air pressure and balance, and correct if necessary. Check for looseness or damage, and replace if necessary. Lubricate with lithium-soap-based grease. Check for wear, cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. 1 320 (200) 20 3 1300 (800) 80
Every 2040 hours (more often in wet or dusty areas)
Front brake
Whenever worn to the limit
Rear brake
Whenever worn to the limit Every 4 years
Tires
8 9
* *
Wheel bearings Upper and lower arm pivots V-belt
10 * 11 * 12 * 13 * 14 * 15 * 16 * 17 * 18 * 19 * 20 *
Drive shaft univer Lubricate with lithium-soap-based grease. sal joint Chassis fasteners Shock absorber assemblies Stabilizer bushes Knuckle pivots Knuckle shafts Steering shaft Steering system Engine mount Axle boots Make sure that all nuts, bolts, and screws are properly tightened. Check operation and correct if necessary. Check for oil leakage and replace if necessary. Check for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Lubricate with lithium-soap-based grease. Lubricate with lithium-soap-based grease. Lubricate with lithium-soap-based grease. Check operation and repair or replace if damaged. Check toe-in and adjust if necessary. Check for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Check for cracks or other damage, and replace if necessary. Change. Check ATV for oil leakage, and correct if necessary.
21
Engine oil
3-2

INITIAL NO. ITEM CHECK OR MAINTENANCE JOB Whichever comes first month km (mi) hours 22 Engine oil filter cartridge Replace. 1 320 (200) 20 3 1300 (800) 80
CHK ADJ
EVERY 6 2500 (1600) 160 6 2500 (1600) 160 12 5000 (3200) 320
23
Change. Differential gear oil Check ATV for oil leakage, and correct if necessary. Final gear oil Change. Check ATV for oil leakage, and correct if necessary. Check coolant level and ATV for coolant leakage, and correct if necessary. Replace coolant.
24
Every 2 years
25
Cooling system Moving parts and cables Drive select lever safety system cable
26 *
Lubricate.
27 *
Check operation and adjust or replace if necessary.
28 *
Check operation and correct if necessary. Check throttle cable free play and adjust if necesThrottle lever sary. housing and cable Lubricate throttle lever housing and cable. Front and rear brake switches Lights and switches Check operation and correct if necessary. Check operation and correct if necessary. Adjust headlight beams.
29 * 30 *
EBU23070
NOTE: The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas. Hydraulic brake service Regularly check and, if necessary, correct the brake fluid level. Every two years replace the internal components of the brake master cylinders and calipers, and change the brake fluid. Replace the brake hoses every four years and if cracked or damaged.
3-3
ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS
ENGINE SKID PLATES
CHK ADJ
2 1
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 1 2 3
Job/Part Removing the engine skid plates Front engine skid plate Center engine skid plate Rear engine skid plate
Qty 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-4
ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS
CHK ADJ
SEAT AND SIDE PANELS
2 5 3 1
4 6
Order 1
Job/Part Removing the seat and side panels Seat
Qty 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. NOTE: Pull up the seat lock lever, then pull up on the rear of the seat.
2 3 4 5 6
Battery cover Fuel tank cover Left side panel Right side panel Dipstick accessing panel
1 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-5

EBS00037
CHK ADJ
FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD

26 Nm (2.6 m kg, 19 ft Ib) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T. T.
R.
R.
2 2 7 8
(4) (4)

T.
T.
R.
R.
Order
1 2 3 4
Job/Part Removing the front carrier and front guard Front engine skid plate Seat/side panels Front carrier Front carrier bracket Battery holding bracket Battery lead
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES. Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
1 2 1 2
Disconnect. CAUTION: First disconnect the negative battery lead, then disconnect the positive lead.
5 6
Battery Upper panel
1 1
3-6
CHK ADJ

T.
T.
R.
R.
2 2 7 8
(4) (4)

T.
T.
R.
R.
Order 7 8
Job/Part Front guard Front guard cover
Qty 1 2
Remarks
3-7
CHK ADJ
FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL
(3)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
Order
R.
1 4
2 (3)
5 5
6
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
1
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Job/Part Removing the front fenders and front grill Seat/side panels Front carrier/front guard Front fender inner panel Auxiliary DC jack coupler Main switch coupler Front fender Headlight coupler Front grill
R.
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD.
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1 1 2 2 1
Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-8

EBS00040
CHK ADJ
REAR CARRIER AND REAR FENDER

34 Nm (3.4 m kg, 24 ft Ib)
T.
48 Nm (4.8 m kg, 35 ft Ib)
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
2 (4) 5 2
T.
3
T
Order
R.
.
R.
(6)
T.
R.
(6)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Job/Part Removing the rear carrier and rear fender Seat/side panels Rear carrier Rear carrier bracket Storage compartment Tail/brake light cover Tail/brake light connector Rear fender
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
1 2 1 1 3 1
Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-9
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY 1/2
CHK ADJ
10 9 8 7
11 12
T.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
R.
6 6 14 6 2 2
15 6
13
3 4
Order
Job/Part Removing the electrical components tray Front fender/front grill Battery holding bracket Battery lead
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL.
1 2
1 2
Disconnect. CAUTION: First disconnect the negative battery lead, then disconnect the positive lead.
3 4 5 6
Battery Lean angle sensor coupler Lean angle sensor EPS control unit coupler
1 1 1 5
Disconnect. Disconnect.
3 - 10
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY
CHK ADJ
10 9 8 7
11 12
T.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
R.
6 6 14 6 2 2
15 6
13
3 4
Order 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Job/Part EPS (electric power steering) control unit Four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 Rear brake relay Four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 Four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 Headlight relay Radiator fan motor coupler ECU coupler ECU (engine control unit)
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
Disconnect. Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3 - 11
CHK ADJ
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY 2/2
15
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
11 14 10 3 7 8 9 5 4 6 (4) 19
12
13
20 2 17 16
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
18
T.
R.
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Job/Part Removing the electrical components tray Starter relay coupler Starter relay Fuse box EPS fuse Main fuse Spare fuse Radiator fan motor relay Fuel injection system relay Starting circuit cut-off relay Left handlebar switch coupler On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch coupler
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Disconnect.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
3 - 12
CHK ADJ
15
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
11 14 10 3 7 8 9 5 4 6 (4) 19
12
13
20 2 17 16
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
18
T.
R.
Order 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Job/Part Front brake light switch connector Rear brake light switch connector Meter assembly coupler Meter assembly Frame ground terminal Ignition coil connector Differential gear motor coupler Wire harness Electrical components tray
Qty 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Remarks Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
3 - 13
FOOTREST BOARDS
EBS00045
CHK ADJ
FOOTREST BOARDS
(5) 1 (4)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)

T.
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
R.
1
T.
R.
2 3 2 (4) (5) (5) (4)
(5)
3
53 Nm (5.3 m kg, 38 ft Ib)
(4)
T.
Order
1 2 3
T.
R.
53 Nm (5.3 m kg, 38 ft Ib)
R.
Job/Part Removing the footrest boards Seat/side panels Footrest Footrest board Footrest bracket
Qty
2 2 2 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3 - 14
AIR FILTER CASE AIR FILTER CASE
CHK ADJ
9 New
10 New
5 7 6 8
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job/Part Removing the air filter case Seat/side panels Air filter case cover Air filter element Air filter element frame Air filter case joint clamp screw Intake air temperature sensor coupler Breather hose (air filter case to throttle body) Breather hose (air filter case to fast idle plunger unit) Cylinder head breather hose Intake air temperature sensor Air filter case
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Loosen. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
3 - 15
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE

EAS00049
CHK ADJ
ENGINE
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE The following procedure applies to all of the valves. NOTE: Valve clearance adjustment should be made on a cold engine, at room temperature. When the valve clearance is to be measured or adjusted, the piston must be at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke. 1. Remove: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. front fender Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL. footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS. air filter case Refer to AIR FILTER CASE.
2. Remove: fast idle plunger unit 1
3.
Remove: intake tappet cover 1 exhaust tappet cover camshaft sprocket cover 2
3 - 16

1
4. 5. Disconnect: spark plug cap 1 Remove: spark plug 2
CHK ADJ
1 2
6. Remove: timing mark accessing screw 1 crankshaft end accessing screw 2
7. Measure: valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Valve clearance (cold) Intake valve 0.09 ~ 0.13 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0051 in) Exhaust valve 0.16 ~ 0.20 mm (0.0063 ~ 0.0079 in)
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. b. When the piston is at the top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke, align the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. NOTE: To position the piston at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke, align the I mark c on the camshaft sprocket with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head, as shown in the illustration.
d c
3 - 17
CHK ADJ
c. Measure the valve clearance with a thickness gauge 1. Thickness gauge 90890-03079 Narrow gauge set YM-34483
1
Out of specification Adjust.
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
8. Adjust: valve clearance
3 1 2
a. Loosen the locknut 1. b. Insert a thickness gauge 2 between the end of the adjusting screw and the valve tip. c. Turn the adjusting screw 3 with the tappet adjusting tool 4 until the specified valve clearance is obtained. Tappet adjusting tool 90890-01311 Valve adjuster 3 mm & 4 mm YM-08035-A
d. Hold the adjusting screw to prevent it from moving and tighten the locknut to the specified torque. Locknut 14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft lb)
e. Measure the valve clearance again. f. If the valve clearance is still out of specification, repeat all of the valve clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is obtained.
9. Install: timing mark accessing screw

6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb)
crankshaft end accessing screw

T.
10.Install: spark plug 11.Connect: spark plug cap
T.
R.
T.
R. R.
T.
R.
3 - 18
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE/ ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED

12.Install: O-ring New camshaft sprocket cover
CHK ADJ
1 New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
O-ring 1 New intake tappet cover

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
O-ring New exhaust tappet cover

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
13.Install: fast idle plunger unit 14.Install: air filter case Refer to AIR FILTER CASE. footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS. front fender Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL. left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
EBS00051
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED 1. Remove: fuel tank cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. 2. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes. 3. Attach: tachometer (to the spark plug lead) Digital tachometer 90890-06760, YU-39951-B 4. Measure: engine idling speed Out of specification Adjust. Engine idling speed 1,350 ~ 1,450 r/min
3 - 19
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED/ ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY
5. Adjust: engine idling speed
CHK ADJ
1 a b
a. Turn the idle speed adjusting screw 1 in direction a or b until the specified idling speed is obtained. Direction a Direction b Idling speed becomes higher. Idling speed becomes lower.
6. 7.
Detach: tachometer Adjust: throttle lever free play Refer to ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY. Throttle lever free play 3.0 ~ 5.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in)
8. Install: fuel tank cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EBS00052
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY NOTE: Engine idling speed should be adjusted properly before adjusting the throttle lever free play.
_
1. Measure: throttle lever free play a Out of specification Adjust. Throttle lever free play 3.0 ~ 5.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in) 2. Remove: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 20
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY

3. Adjust: throttle lever free play
CHK ADJ
b 2 1 3 a
First step: a. Slide back the rubber cover 1. b. Loosen the locknut 2 on the throttle body side. c. Turn the adjusting nut 3 in direction a or b until the correct free play is obtained. Direction a Direction b Free play is increased. Free play is decreased.
d. Tighten the locknut. e. Slide the rubber cover to its original position. NOTE: If the free play cannot be adjusted here, adjust it at the throttle lever side of the cable.
_
Second step: f. Slide back the rubber cover 4. g. Loosen the locknut 5. h. Turn the adjusting bolt 6 in direction c or d until the correct free play is obtained. Direction c Direction d Free play is increased. Free play is decreased.
i. Tighten the locknut. j. Slide the rubber cover to its original position. WARNING
_
After adjusting the free play, turn the handlebar to the right and left to make sure that the engine idling speed does not increase.
4. Install: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 21
ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER

EBS00053
CHK ADJ
ADJUSTING THE SPEED LIMITER The speed limiter keeps the throttle from becoming fully-opened even when the throttle lever is applied to the maximum position. Screwing in the adjusting screw stops the engine speed from increasing. 1. Measure: speed limiter length a Out of specification Adjust. Speed limiter length Less than 12 mm (0.47 in) 2. Adjust: speed limiter length a. Loosen the locknut 1. b. Turn the adjuster 2 in direction b or c until the specified speed limiter length is obtained. Direction b Direction c Speed limiter length is decreased. Speed limiter length is increased.
c. Tighten the locknut. WARNING

_
Particularly for a beginner rider, the speed limiter should be screwed in completely. Screw it out little by little as their riding technique improves. Never remove the speed limiter for a beginning rider. For proper throttle lever operation do not turn out the adjuster more than 12 mm (0.47 in). Also, always adjust the throttle lever free play to 3.0 ~ 5.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in).
3 - 22
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG

EBS00057
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG 1. Remove: right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. 2. Disconnect: spark plug cap 3. Remove: spark plug 4. Check: spark plug type Incorrect Change. Standard spark plug CR8E/NGK
5. Check: electrode 1 Wear/damage Replace. insulator 2 Abnormal color Replace. Normal color is a medium-to-light tan color. 6. Clean: spark plug (with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush) 7. Measure: spark plug gap a Use a wire gauge or thickness gauge. Out of specification Regap. Spark plug gap 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in) 8. Tighten: spark plug
_
13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb)
NOTE: Before installing a spark plug, clean the gasket surface and plug surface. 9. Connect: spark plug cap 10.Install: right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
T.
R.
3 - 23
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING

EBS00058
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING NOTE: Engine idling speed and throttle cable free play should be adjusted properly before checking the ignition timing.
_
1. Remove: left side panel right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS. 2. Attach: tachometer timing light (to spark plug lead) Digital tachometer 90890-06760, YU-39951-B Timing light 90890-03141 Inductive clamp timing light YU-03141
3. Check: ignition timing

a. Warm up the engine and keep it at the specified speed.
Engine speed 1,350 ~ 1,450 r/min b. Remove the timing mark accessing screw 1.
3 - 24
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING/ MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
CHK ADJ
c. Visually check the stationary pointer a to verify it is within the required firing range b indicated on the AC magneto rotor. Incorrect firing range Check the pulser coil assembly.
b a
NOTE: When checking the ignition timing, make sure that the timing light cord does not come in contact with the exhaust muffler. d. Install the timing mark accessing screw. Timing mark accessing screw 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb)
T.
R.
4. 5.
Detach: timing light tachometer Install: footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS. right side panel left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EBS00061
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE NOTE: Insufficient compression pressure will result in a loss of performance.
_
1. Measure: valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Refer to ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE. 2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off. 3. Remove: right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. V-belt cooling duct 2 Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL in chapter 4.
3 - 25
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE

4. 5.
_
CHK ADJ
Disconnect: spark plug cap Remove: spark plug
CAUTION: Before removing a spark plug, use compressed air to blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug well to prevent it from falling into the cylinder.
2 1
6. Attach: extension 1 compression gauge 2 Compression gauge 90890-03081 Engine compression tester YU-33223 Extension 90890-04082 7. Measure: compression pressure Out of specification Refer to steps (c) and (d). Compression pressure (at sea level) Minimum 392 kPa (3.92 kg/cm2, 55.8 psi) Standard 450 kPa (4.50 kg/cm2, 64.0 psi) Maximum 504 kPa (5.04 kg/cm2, 71.7 psi)
a. Set the main switch to ON.
3 - 26
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
CHK ADJ
b. With the throttle wide open, crank the engine until the reading on the compression gauge stabilizes. WARNING
_
To prevent sparking, ground the spark plug lead before cranking the engine. c. If the compression pressure is above the maximum specification, check the cylinder head, valve surfaces and piston crown for carbon deposits. Carbon deposits Eliminate. d. If the compression pressure is below the minimum specification, squirt a few drops of oil into the cylinder and measure again. Refer to the following table. Compression pressure (with oil applied into the cylinder) Reading Higher than without oil Diagnosis Piston ring(s) wear or damage Repair. Piston, valves, cylinder head gasket or piston rings possibly defective Repair.
Same as without oil
8. Install: spark plug 13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb) 9. Connect: spark plug cap 10.Install: V-belt cooling duct 2 Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL in chapter 4. right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
T.
R.
3 - 27
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

EBS00064
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Check the engine oil level on a cold engine. NOTE: If the engine was started before checking the oil level, be sure to warm up the engine sufficiently, and then wait at least 10 minutes until the oil settles for an accurate reading.
_
3. Remove: dipstick accessing panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
4. Check: engine oil level Oil level should be between the minimum level mark a and maximum level mark b. Oil level low Add oil to the proper level.
b a
NOTE: To obtain an accurate oil level reading, the dipstick must be inserted completely into the oil filter hole. Recommended engine oil type YAMALUBE 4, SAE5W30, SAE10W30 or SAE20W40 Recommended engine oil grade API service SG type or higher, JASO standard MA CAUTION: Do not allow foreign material to enter the crankcase. 5. Check the engine oil level again. CAUTION: Be sure the engine oil is at the correct level, otherwise engine damage may result.
10
30
50
70
90
110
130F
YAMALUBE 4 (20W40) or SAE 20W40 YAMALUBE 4 (10W30) or SAE 10W30 SAE 5W30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
50C
3 - 28
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/ CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
CHK ADJ
6. Install: dipstick accessing panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EBS00069
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL 1. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off. 2. Place a container under the engine oil drain bolt. 3. Remove: dipstick accessing panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. 4. Remove: dipstick 1
5. Remove: engine oil drain bolt 1 (along with the gasket) 6. Drain: engine oil (completely from the crankcase)
7. If the oil filter cartridge is also to be replaced, perform the following procedure.
a. Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with an oil filter wrench 2. Oil filter wrench 90890-01426, YU-38411
3 - 29
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
CHK ADJ
b. Lubricate the O-ring 3 of the new oil filter cartridge with a thin coat of engine oil. CAUTION:
_
Make sure the O-ring 3 is positioned correctly in the groove of the oil filter cartridge. c. Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to specification with an oil filter wrench. Oil filter cartridge 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb)
8. Check: engine oil drain bolt gasket Damage Replace. 9. Install: engine oil drain bolt (along with the gasket)
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
10.Fill: crankcase (with the specified amount of the recommended engine oil) Quantity Total amount 2.40 L (2.11 Imp qt, 2.54 US qt) Without oil filter cartridge replacement 2.00 L (1.76 Imp qt, 2.11 US qt) With oil filter cartridge replacement 2.10 L (1.85 Imp qt, 2.22 US qt) 11.Install: dipstick 12.Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off. 13.Check: engine (for engine oil leaks) 14.Check: engine oil level Refer to CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL.
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 - 30
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL/ CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT

15.Check: engine oil pressure
CHK ADJ
a. Slightly loosen the oil gallery bolt 1. b. Start the engine and keep it idling until engine oil starts to seep from the oil gallery bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one minute, turn the engine off so that it will not seize. c. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter cartridge and the oil pump for damage or leakage. Refer to CRANKSHAFT AND OIL PUMP in chapter 4. d. Start the engine after solving the problem(s) and check the engine oil pressure again. e. Tighten the oil gallery bolt to specification. Oil gallery bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
EBS00073
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT 1. Remove: fuel tank cover left side panel right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. NOTE: There are two check hoses 1 at the bottom of the air filter case. If dust and/or water collects in them, clean the air filter element, air filter mesh and air filter case.
_
T.
R.
3 - 31
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT

1
2. Remove: air filter case cover 1
CHK ADJ
3. Remove: air filter element 1 air filter element frame 2 CAUTION:

_
The engine should never be run without the air filter; excessive piston and/or cylinder wear may result. 4. Check: air filter element air filter element frame Damage Replace. 5. Clean: air filter element Use compressed air to blow off dust from the inner surface of the element.
a. Wash the element gently, but thoroughly in solvent. WARNING

_
Use a cleaning solvent which is designed to clean parts only. Never use gasoline or low flash point solvents as they may cause a fire or explosion. b. Squeeze the excess solvent out of the element and let it dry. CAUTION:
_
Do not twist or wring out the element. This could damage the foam material. c. Apply Yamaha foam air filter oil or other quality foam air filter oil to the element.
3 - 32
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT/ CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT
CHK ADJ
d. Squeeze out the excess oil. NOTE: The element should be wet but not dripping.
_
6. Install: air filter element frame air filter element NOTE: Make sure its sealing surface matches the sealing surface of the case so there is no air leak.
_
7. 8.
Install: air filter case cover Install: right side panel left side panel fuel tank cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EAS00094
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY JOINT 1. Remove: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. 2. Check: throttle body joint 1 Cracks/damage Replace. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in chapter 6. 3. Install: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 33
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE/ CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES

EAS00096
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE FUEL HOSE 1. Remove: seat right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. rear fender Refer to REAR CARRIER AND REAR FENDER. V-belt cooling duct 2 Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL in chapter 4. 2. Check: fuel hose 1 Cracks/damage Replace. Loose connection Connect properly. 3. Install: V-belt cooling duct 2 Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL in chapter 4. rear fender Refer to REAR CARRIER AND REAR FENDER. right side panel seat Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EAS00098
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSES 1. Remove: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. air filter case Refer to AIR FILTER CASE. 2. Check: cylinder head breather hose 1 breather hose (air filter case to throttle body) 2 breather hose (air filter case to fast idle plunger unit) 3 Cracks/damage Replace. Loose connection Connect properly. CAUTION: Make sure the breather hoses are routed correctly.
3 - 34
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL/ CHANGING THE COOLANT

EBS00076
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. NOTE: The coolant level must be checked on a cold engine since the level varies with engine temperature. 2. Check: coolant level The coolant level should be between the minimum level mark a and maximum level mark b in the coolant reservoir. CAUTION:
_
Adding water instead of coolant lowers the antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is used instead of coolant, check and if necessary, correct the antifreeze concentration of the coolant. Use only distilled water. However, soft water may be used if distilled water is not available. 3. If the coolant is at or below the minimum level mark, remove the left side panel. Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
1
FULL
4. Remove the reservoir cap 1, add coolant or distilled water to the maximum level mark a, install the reservoir cap, and then install the panel. Coolant reservoir capacity (up to the maximum level mark): 0.17 L (0.15 Imp qt, 0.18 US qt)
LOW
EBS00075
CHANGING THE COOLANT 1. Remove: right side panel left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. front carrier upper panel Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD.
3 - 35
CHANGING THE COOLANT

1
2. 3. 4.
CHK ADJ
Remove: coolant reservoir cap 1 Disconnect: coolant reservoir hose 2 Drain: coolant (from the coolant reservoir) 5. Connect: coolant reservoir hose 6. Remove: radiator cap 1
1
_
WARNING A hot radiator is under pressure. Therefore, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown out, which could cause serious injury. When the engine has cooled, open the radiator cap as follows: Place a thick rag or a towel over the radiator cap and slowly turn the radiator cap counterclockwise toward the detent to allow any residual pressure to escape. When the hissing sound has stopped, press down on the radiator cap and turn it counterclockwise to remove.
7. Remove: coolant drain bolt 1 (along with the copper washer) 8. Drain: coolant (from the engine and radiator)
9. Check: coolant drain bolt 1 Damage Replace. 10.Install: copper washer 2 New coolant drain bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 - 36
CHK ADJ
11.Fill: cooling system (with the specified amount of the recommended coolant) Recommended antifreeze High-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing corrosion inhibitors for aluminum engines Mixing ratio 1:1 (antifreeze:water) Quantity Total amount 1.99 L (1.75 Imp qt, 2.10 US qt) Coolant reservoir capacity (up to the maximum level mark) 0.17 L (0.15 Imp qt, 0.18 US qt) From minimum to maximum level mark 0.14 L (0.12 Imp qt, 0.15 US qt) Handling notes for coolant Coolant is potentially harmful and should be handled with special care. WARNING
_
If coolant splashes in your eyes, thoroughly wash them with water and consult a doctor. If coolant splashes on your clothes, quickly wash it away with water and then with soap and water. If coolant is swallowed, induce vomiting and get immediate medical attention. CAUTION:
_
Adding water instead of coolant lowers the antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is used instead of coolant, check, and if necessary, correct the antifreeze concentration of the coolant. Use only distilled water. However, if distilled water is not available, soft water may be used. If coolant comes into contact with painted surfaces, immediately wash them with water. Do not mix different types of antifreeze.
3 - 37
CHK ADJ
1
FULL
LOW
12.Fill: coolant reservoir (with the recommended coolant to the maximum level mark a) 13.Install: coolant reservoir cap 1
14.Bleed: coolant system a. Remove the V-belt cooling duct 2 1. b. Loosen the water pump air bleed bolt 2, without removing it, to allow all of the air to escape from the air bleed bolt hole. c. When coolant begins to flow out of the bolt hole, tighten the water pump air bleed bolt to specification.
Water pump air bleed bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
d. Loosen the cylinder head air bleed bolt 3, without removing it, to allow all of the air to escape from the air bleed bolt hole. e. When coolant begins to flow out of the bolt hole, tighten the cylinder head air bleed bolt to specification. Cylinder head air bleed bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
f. Install the V-belt cooling duct 2.

15.Start the engine, warm it up for ten minutes, and then rev the engine five times. 16.Pour the recommended coolant into the radiator until it is full. 17.Stop the engine and allow it to cool. If the coolant level has dropped after the engine has cooled, add sufficient coolant until it reaches the top of the radiator, and then install the radiator cap. 18.Start the engine, and then check for coolant leakage.
3 - 38
CHANGING THE COOLANT/ CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM
CHK ADJ
19.Install: upper panel front carrier Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD. left side panel right side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EAS00104
CHECKING THE COOLING SYSTEM 1. Remove: front fenders Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL. left footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS.
3 4
1 5
Check: radiator 1 radiator inlet hose 2 coolant reservoir 3 coolant reservoir hose 4 radiator outlet hose 5 water jacket 6 water pump outlet hose 7 water pump outlet pipe 8 water pump housing 9 Cracks/damage Replace. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in chapter 5. 3. Install: left footrest board Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS. front fenders Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL.
2.
7 6 8 9
3 - 39
CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

EBS00077
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

1 Coolant temperature warning light
Coolant temperature warning light checking method Turn the main switch ON and the engine stop switch to RUN.
Coolant temperature warning light does not come on.
Coolant temperature warning light comes on.
Push start switch with transmission in neutral.
Coolant temperature warning light comes on momentarily. Coolant temperature and electrical circuit are OK. Go ahead with riding.
Coolant temperature warning light does not come on.
Check the electrical circuit. Refer to SIGNALING SYSTEM in chapter 9.
3 - 40
CHECKING THE V-BELT

EBS00078
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE V-BELT 1. Remove: drive belt cover Refer to PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES in chapter 4. 2. Check: V-belt 1 Cracks/wear/scaling/chipping Replace. Oil/grease Check primary sheave and secondary sheave. 3. Measure: V-belt width 2 Out of specification Replace. V-belt width 31.7 mm (1.25 in) <Limit>: 31.3 mm (1.23 in)
4. Replace: V-belt a. Install the bolts 1 (90101-06016) into the secondary fixed sheave hold.
_
NOTE: Tightening the bolts 1 will push the secondary sliding sheave away, causing the gap between the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves to widen.
b. Remove the V-belt 1 from the primary sheave and secondary sheave.
3 - 41
CHECKING THE V-BELT/ CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM

c. Install the V-belt.
CHK ADJ
NOTE: Install the V-belt so that its arrow faces the direction shown in the illustration.
_
d. Remove the bolts.

9 8 2 5
EAS00099
1 6
4 6 5
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM The following procedure applies to all of the exhaust pipe gaskets. 1. Check: exhaust pipe 1 muffler 2 exhaust pipe protector 3 muffler bracket 4 springs 5 Cracks/damage Replace. gaskets 6 Exhaust gas leaks Replace. 2. Check: tightening torques Exhaust pipe nut 7 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) Muffler and muffler bracket bolt 8 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) Muffler bolt 9 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) Exhaust pipe protector bolt 0 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 - 42
CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER
CHK ADJ
CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER 1. Clean: spark arrester

WARNING Select a well-ventilated area free of combustible materials. Always let the exhaust system cool before performing this operation. Do not start the engine when removing the tailpipe from the muffler. Make sure that the transmission is in neutral. a. Remove the bolts 1. b. Remove the tailpipe 2 by pulling it out of the muffler and the gasket. c. Tap the tailpipe lightly with a soft-face hammer or suitable tool, then use a wire brush to remove any carbon deposits from the spark arrester portion of the tailpipe and inside of the tail pipe housing. d. Install the gasket, and then insert the tailpipe into the muffler and align the bolt holes. e. Insert the bolts 1 and tighten them. Bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
f. Remove the purging bolt 3. g. Start the engine and rev it up approximately twenty times while momentarily creating exhaust system back pressure by blocking the end of the muffler with a shop towel. h. Stop the engine and allow the exhaust pipe to cool. i. Install the purging bolt 3 and tighten it.
T.
R.
3
T.
Purging bolt 27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft lb)
R.
3 - 43
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE/ ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE

EBS00080
CHK ADJ
CHASSIS
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE 1. Measure: front brake lever free play a Out of specification Bleed the front brake system. Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM. Front brake lever free play (at the end of the brake lever) 0 mm (0 in)
EBS00085
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE

a
_
WARNING Always adjust both the brake pedal and the rear brake lever whenever adjusting the rear brake. 1. Measure: rear brake lever free play a Out of specification Bleed the rear brake system. Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM. Rear brake lever free play (at the end of the brake lever) 0 mm (0 in)
2. Measure: brake pedal free play b Out of specification Adjust. Brake pedal free play 0 ~ 5.0 mm (0 ~ 0.20 in)
3 - 44
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
CHK ADJ
3. Measure: brake pedal height c Out of specification Adjust. Brake pedal height 56.7 mm (2.23 in)
d Measuring points
4. 5.
Adjust: brake pedal free play brake pedal height Remove: front fender inner panel Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL.
a. Loosen the locknut 1. b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 until the brake pedal height is within the specified limits. Brake pedal height 56.7 mm (2.23 in) c. Tighten the locknut 1. Locknut 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
b 3 4 a
d. Loosen the locknut 3. e. Turn the adjusting nut 4 in direction a or b until the specified brake pedal free play is obtained. Direction a Direction b Brake pedal free play is increased. Brake pedal free play is decreased.
f. Tighten the locknut 3. Locknut 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 - 45
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE/ CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
CHK ADJ
g. Adjust the shift control cable. Refer to ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD. WARNING
_
After this adjustment is performed, lift the front and rear wheels off the ground by placing a block under the engine, and spin the rear wheels to ensure there is no brake drag. If any brake drag is noticed perform the above steps again.
6. Install: front fender inner panel Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL.
EBS00087
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. NOTE: When checking the brake fluid level, make sure that the top of the brake fluid reservoir top is horizontal.
_
2. Check: brake fluid level Below the minimum level mark a Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level. Recommended brake fluid DOT 4
Front brake Rear brake
WARNING
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to deteriorate, causing leakage and poor brake performance.
3 - 46
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL/ CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
CHK ADJ
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance. When refilling, be careful that water does not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock. CAUTION:
_
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up any spilt brake fluid immediately. NOTE: In order to ensure a correct reading of the brake fluid level, make sure that the top of the brake master cylinder reservoir is horizontal.
_
EBS00088
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS 1. Remove: front wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8. 2. Check: brake pads Wear indicator groove a almost disappeared Replace the brake pads as a set. Refer to FRONT AND REAR BRAKES in chapter 8. Brake pad wear limit a 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 3. Operate the brake lever. 4. Install: front wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8.
3 - 47
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS/ CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE HOSE PROTECTORS
EBS00089
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS 1. Remove: rear wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8. 2. Check: brake pads Wear indicator groove a almost disappeared Replace the brake pads as a set. Refer to FRONT AND REAR BRAKES in chapter 8. Brake pad wear limit a 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 3. Operate the brake lever or brake pedal. 4. Install: rear wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8.
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE HOSE PROTECTORS 1. Remove: rear wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8. 2. Check: rear brake hose protectors 1 Wear indicator 2 becomes visible Replace the rear brake hose protector. Refer to REAR KNUCKLES AND STABILIZER in chapter 8. 3. Install: rear wheels Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8.
3 - 48
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES/ BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM

EBS00092
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES 1. Check: front brake hoses 1 rear brake hoses 2 Cracks/wear/damage Replace. 2. Check: brake hose holders Loosen Tighten. 3. Hold the vehicle in an upright position and apply the front or rear brake. 4. Check: brake hoses Apply the brake lever several times. Fluid leakage Replace the hoses. Refer to FRONT AND REAR BRAKES in chapter 8.
EBS00094
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING

_
Bleed the hydraulic brake system whenever: the system is disassembled, a brake hose is loosened, disconnected or replaced, the brake fluid level is very low, brake operation is faulty. NOTE: Be careful not to spill any brake fluid or allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to overflow.
_
3 - 49
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
CHK ADJ
When bleeding the hydraulic brake system, make sure there is always enough brake fluid before applying the brake. Ignoring this precaution could allow air to enter the hydraulic brake system, considerably lengthening the bleeding procedure. If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let the brake fluid settle for a few hours. Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny bubbles in the hose have disappeared. 1. Remove: rear wheel Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8. 2. Bleed: hydraulic brake system
a. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the proper level with the recommended brake fluid. b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylinder reservoir). c. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the bleed screw 2.
Front Rear
2 1
d. Place the other end of the hose into a container. e. Slowly apply the brake several times. f. Fully squeeze the brake lever or fully depress the brake pedal and hold it in position. g. Loosen the bleed screw. NOTE: Loosening the bleed screw will release the pressure and cause the brake lever to contact the handlebar grip or the brake pedal to fully extend.
_
h. Tighten the bleed screw and then release the brake lever or brake pedal. i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the air bubbles have disappeared from the brake fluid in the plastic hose. j. Tighten the bleed screw to specification. Bleed screw 5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 - 50
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM/ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD
CHK ADJ
k. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the proper level with the recommended brake fluid. Refer to CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. WARNING
_
After bleeding the hydraulic brake system, check the brake operation.
3. Install: rear wheel Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8.
EBS00100
2 3
ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD

1 NEUTRAL 2 HIGH 3 LOW 4 REVERSE 5 PARK 6 Control cable 7 Select lever shift rod
WARNING
_
Before moving the select lever, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and return the throttle lever to its closed position. Otherwise the transmission may be damaged. 1. Adjust: brake pedal free play Refer to ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE. 2. Remove: left side panel Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 51
ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD

3. Adjust: shift control cable shift rod
CHK ADJ
1 3
Shift control cable: a. Make sure that the select lever is in NEUTRAL. b. Squeeze the brake lever 30 mm (1.18 in) a, loosen the locknut 1, and then adjust the shift control cable 2 with the adjuster 3 so that the select lever can be shifted to REVERSE from NEUTRAL, and to PARK from REVERSE. c. Release the brake lever so that a is 0 mm (0 in), and then verify that the select lever cannot be shifted to REVERSE from NEUTRAL, or to PARK from REVERSE. d. If the operation of the select lever is incorrect, repeat steps (a) to (c). e. Tighten the locknut.
Shift rod: a. Make sure that the select lever and transmission are in HIGH. b. Loosen both locknuts 1. c. Adjust the length a of the shift rod to 413 mm (16.3 in). d. Tighten the locknuts. Locknut 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
e. Start the engine, and then check that the select lever can be shifted to each shift position and that the appropriate indicator light comes on when the lever is in each position. f. Adjust the shift control cable again.
T.
R.
3 - 52
CHECKING THE FINAL GEAR OIL LEVEL/ CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL
EBS00101
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE FINAL GEAR OIL LEVEL 1. Place the vehicle on a level place. 2. Remove: final gear oil level check bolt 1 3. Check: oil level Oil level should be up to the bottom brim 2 of the hole. Oil level low Add oil to the proper level. Recommended oil SAE80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil CAUTION:
_
Take care not allow foreign material to enter the final gear case. 4. Install: final gear oil level check bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
EBS00102
CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Remove: final gear oil filler bolt 1 3. Place a receptacle under the final gear case.
4. 5.
Remove: final gear oil level check bolt final gear oil drain bolt 1 Drain: final gear oil
3 - 53
CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL

6. Install: final gear oil drain bolt
CHK ADJ
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
NOTE: Check the gasket (drain bolt). If it is damaged, replace it with a new one.
_
T.
R.
7. Fill: final gear case Periodic oil change 0.20 L (0.18 Imp qt, 0.21 US qt) Total amount 0.25 L (0.22 Imp qt, 0.26 US qt) Recommended oil SAE80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil CAUTION:
_
Take care not to allow foreign material to enter the final gear case. 8. Check: oil level Refer to CHECKING THE FINAL GEAR OIL LEVEL. 9. Install: final gear oil level check bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
final gear oil filler bolt

T.
T.
R. R.
3 - 54
CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEVEL/ CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
EBS00103
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEVEL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Remove: differential gear oil filler bolt 1 3. Check: oil level Oil level should be up to the brim 2 of hole. Oil level low Add oil to proper level. Recommended oil SAE80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil CAUTION:
_
Take care not allow foreign material to enter the differential gear case. 4. Install: differential gear oil filler bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
T.
R.
EBS00104
CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Place a receptacle under the differential gear case.
3. 4. 5.
Remove: differential gear oil filler bolt differential gear oil drain bolt 1 Drain: differential gear oil Install: differential gear oil drain bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 - 55
CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL/CHECKING THE CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT DUST BOOTS
6. Fill: differential gear case
CHK ADJ
Periodic oil change 0.215 L (0.19 Imp qt, 0.23 US qt) Total amount 0.23 L (0.20 Imp qt, 0.24 US qt) Recommended oil SAE80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil NOTE: If gear oil is filled to the brim of the oil filler hole, oil may start leaking from the differential gear case breather hose. Therefore, check the quantity of the oil, not its level.
_
CAUTION:
_
Take care not to allow foreign material to enter the differential gear case. 7. Install: differential gear oil filler bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
T.
R.
EBS00105
CHECKING THE CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT DUST BOOTS 1. Check: dust boots 1 Damage Replace. Refer to FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND DIFFERENTIAL GEAR and REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND FINAL DRIVE GEAR in chapter 7.
Front Rear
3 - 56
CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM

EBS00106
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Check: steering assembly bushings Move the handlebar up and down, and/or back and forth. Excessive play Replace the steering stem bushings. 3. Check: tie-rod ends Turn the handlebar to the left and/or right until it stops completely, then move the handlebar from the left to the right slightly. Tie-rod end has any vertical play Replace the tie-rod end(s). 4. Raise the front end of the vehicle so that there is no weight on the front wheels. 5. Check: ball joints and/or wheel bearings Move the wheels laterally back and forth. Excessive free play Replace the front arms (upper and lower) and/or wheel bearings.
6. Measure: steering tension Above specification Adjust. Steering tension 50 N (5.0 kgf)
a. Turn the main switch to OFF. b. Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the front wheels are elevated. c. Point the front wheels straight ahead. d. Hold the belt tension gauge 1 at a 90 angle to the handlebar, push the gauge against the handlebar, and then record the measurement when the handlebar starts to turn.
3 - 57
CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM
CHK ADJ
Belt tension gauge 90890-03170 Rear drive belt tension gauge YM-03170
7. Adjust: steering tension

a. Remove the electrical components tray. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY. b. Loosen the steering stem bracket bolts 1, steering stem bearing bolts 2, and steering stem joint bolts 3 completely. NOTE: After loosening the bolts, be sure to check that the steering stem joint moves smoothly on the serrations of the steering stem and shaft of the EPS unit. c. Tighten the steering stem bearing bolts to specification. Steering stem bearing bolt 50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb) LOCTITE
2 3
d. Tighten the steering stem bracket bolts to specification. Steering stem bracket bolt 50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb) LOCTITE
e. Tighten the steering stem joint bolts to specification. Steering stem joint bolt 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) LOCTITE
f. Measure the steering tension again. g. Repeat the above procedure until the steering tension is below specification.
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 - 58
ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN

EBS00108
CHK ADJ
ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Measure: toe-in Out of specification Adjust. Toe-in 0 ~ 10 mm (0 ~ 0.39 in) (with tires touching the ground)
NOTE: Before measuring the toe-in, make sure that the tire pressure is correct.
_
a. b. c. d.
Mark both front tire tread centers. Face the handlebar straight ahead. Measure the width between the marks. Rotate the front tires 180 until the marks are exactly opposite one another. e. Measure the width between the marks. f. Calculate the toe-in using the formula given below. Toe-in = g. If the toe-in is incorrect, adjust it.
Forward
3. Adjust: toe-in WARNING

_
Be sure that both tie-rods are turned the same amount. If not, the vehicle will drift right or left even though the handlebar is positioned straight. This may lead to mishandling and an accident. After setting the toe-in to specification, run the vehicle slowly for some distance with both hands lightly holding the handlebar and check that the handlebar responds correctly. If not, turn either the right or left tie-rod within the toe-in specification.
a. Mark both tie-rods ends. This reference point will be needed during adjustment.
3 - 59
ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN/CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS
CHK ADJ
b. Loosen the locknuts (tie-rod end) 1 of both tie-rods. c. The same number of turns should be given to both the right and left tie-rods 2 until the specified toe-in is obtained. This is to keep the length of the rods the same. d. Tighten the rod end locknuts of both tie rods. Locknut (rod end) 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
NOTE: Adjust the rod ends so that A and B are equal.

_
EBS00109
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS 1. Place the vehicle on a level place. 2. Check: damper rod Bends/damage Replace the front/rear shock absorber assembly. Refer to FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES and REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8. oil leakage Excessive oil leakage Replace the front/ rear shock absorber assembly. Refer to FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES and REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8. spring Fatigue Replace the front/rear shock absorber assembly. Refer to FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES and REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8.
T.
R.
3 - 60
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS/ ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS
CHK ADJ
3. Check: operation Pump the shock absorbers up and down for several times. Unsmooth operation Replace front/rear shock absorber. Refer to FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES and REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8.
Front shock absorber Rear shock absorber
EBS00110
ADJUSTING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS WARNING

_
Always adjust the spring preload for both front shock absorber to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability. 1. Adjust: spring preload Turn the adjuster 1 in direction a or b. Direction a Spring preload is increased (suspension is harder). Spring preload is decreased (suspension is softer).
1 2
1 a b
Direction b
Standard position: 2 Minimum position: 1 Maximum position: 5
3 - 61
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS/ CHECKING THE TIRES

EBS00112
CHK ADJ
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS WARNING

_
Always adjust the spring load for both rear shock absorber spring preload to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability. 1. Adjust: spring preload Turn the adjuster 1 in direction a or b. Direction a Spring preload is increased (suspension is harder). Spring preload is decreased (suspension is softer).
1 2
1 b a
Direction b
Standard position: 2 Minimum position: 1 Maximum position: 5
EBS00115
CHECKING THE TIRES WARNING

_
This model is equipped with low pressure tires. It is important that they be inflated correctly and maintained at the proper pressures. TIRE CHARACTERISTICS 1) Tire characteristics influence the handling of ATVs. The tires listed below have been approved by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. for this model. If other tire combinations are used, they can adversely affect your vehicles handling characteristics and are therefore not recommended.
3 - 62
CHECKING THE TIRES

Manufacturer Front Rear DUNLOP DUNLOP
CHK ADJ
Size AT25 8-12 AT25 10-12 Type KT421 KT425
TIRE PRESSURE 1) Recommended tire pressure Front 35 kPa (0.35 kg/cm2, 5.0 psi) Rear 30 kPa (0.30 kg/cm2, 4.3 psi) 2) Tire pressure below the minimum specification could cause the tire to dislodge from the rim under severe riding conditions. The following are minimums: Front 32 kPa (0.32 kg/cm2, 4.6 psi) Rear 27 kPa (0.27 kg/cm2, 3.9 psi) 3) Use no more than Front 250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi) Rear 250 kPa (2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi) when seating the tire beads. Higher pressures may cause the tire to burst. Inflate the tires slowly and carefully. Fast inflation could cause the tire to burst. MAXIMUM LOADING LIMIT 1) Vehicle load limits: 220 kg (485 lb) *Total weight of the cargo, trailer hitch vertical load, rider, and accessories. 2) Front carrier: 45.0 kg (99 lb) 3) Rear carrier: 85.0 kg (187 lb) 4) Front storage box: 0.5 kg (1 lb) 5) Rear storage box: 2.0 kg (4 lb) 6) Trailer hitch: Pulling load (total weight of trailer and cargo): 5,390 N (550 kg, 1,212 lb) Tongue weight (vertical weight on trailer hitch point): 147 N (15 kg, 33 lb) Be extra careful of the vehicle balance and stability when towing a trailer.
3 - 63
CHECKING THE TIRES
CHK ADJ
1. Measure: tire pressure Out of specification Adjust. NOTE: The low-pressure tire gauge 1 is included as standard equipment. If dust or the like is stuck to this gauge, it will not provide the correct readings. Therefore, take two measurements of the tires pressure and use the second reading.
_
Cold tire pressure Standard
Front
Rear
35 kPa 30 kPa (0.35 kg/cm2, (0.30 kg/cm2, 5.0 psi) 4.3 psi) 27 kPa 32 kPa (0.32 kg/cm2, (0.27 kg/cm2, 4.6 psi) 3.9 psi) 33 kPa 38 kPa 2, (0.33 kg/cm2, (0.38 kg/cm 5.5 psi) 4.8 psi)
Minimum
Maximum
WARNING
_
Uneven or improper tire pressure may adversely affect the handling of this vehicle and may cause loss of control. Maintain proper tire pressures. Set tire pressures when the tires are cold. Tire pressures must be equal in both front tires and equal in both rear tires.
2. Check: tire surfaces Wear/damage Replace. Tire wear limit a Front and rear: 3 mm (0.12 in) WARNING
_
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire. When tire wear is out of specification, replace the tire immediately.
3 - 64
CHECKING THE WHEELS/ CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES

EBS00116
CHK ADJ
CHECKING THE WHEELS 1. Check: wheel 1 Damage/bends Replace. NOTE: Always balance the wheel when a tire or wheel has been changed or replaced.
_
WARNING
_
Never attempt even small repairs to the wheel. Ride conservatively after installing a tire to allow it to seat itself properly on the rim.
EBS00117
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES WARNING

_
A damaged cable sheath may cause corrosion and interfere with the cable movement. An unsafe condition may result, so replace a damaged cable as soon as possible. 1. Check: cable sheath Damage Replace. 2. Check: cable operation Unsmooth operation replace.
Lubricate
or
Recommended lubricant Yamaha chain and cable lube or engine oil NOTE: Hold the cable end up and apply several drops of lubricant to the cable.
_
3. Apply: lithium-soap-based grease (onto end of the cable)
3 - 65
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS

EBS00118
CHK ADJ
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal moving parts of the levers and pedals. Recommended lubricant Lithium-soap-based grease
3 - 66
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY

EBS00120
CHK ADJ
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY WARNING
_
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid. Therefore, always follow these preventive measures: Wear protective eye gear when handling or working near batteries. Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area. Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or open flames (e.g., welding equipment, lighted cigarettes). DO NOT SMOKE when charging or handling batteries. KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it can cause severe burns or permanent eye injury. FIRST AID IN CASE OF BODILY CONTACT: EXTERNAL Skin Wash with water. Eyes Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. INTERNAL Drink large quantities of water or milk followed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Get immediate medical attention. CAUTION:
_
This is a sealed battery. Never remove the sealing caps because the balance between cells will not be maintained and battery performance will deteriorate. Charging time, charging amperage and charging voltage for an MF battery are different from those of conventional batteries. The MF battery should be charged as explained in the charging method illustrations. If the battery is overcharged, the electrolyte level will drop considerably. Therefore, take special care when charging the battery.
3 - 67

_
CHK ADJ
NOTE: Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be checked by measuring the voltage at the battery terminals. 1. Remove: battery cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS. front carrier battery holding bracket Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD.
2. Disconnect: battery leads (from the battery terminals)
1 2
_
CAUTION: First, disconnect the negative battery lead 1, and then the positive battery lead 2. 3. 4. Remove: battery Check: battery charge
a. Connect a pocket tester to the battery terminals. Positive tester probe positive battery terminal Negative tester probe negative battery terminal NOTE: The charge state of an MF battery can be checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage (i.e., the voltage when the positive terminal is disconnected). No charging is necessary when the open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
_
3 - 68

Open-circuit voltage (V) Relationship between the open-circuit voltage and the charging time at 20 C (68 F)
CHK ADJ
b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in the charts and the following example. Example c. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V d. Charging time = 6.5 hours e. Charge of the battery = 20 ~ 30%
Charging time (hours) These values vary with the temperature and the condition of the battery plates.
Charging Open-circuit voltage (V)
Ambient temperature 20 C (68 F)
5. Charge: battery (refer to the appropriate charging method illustration) WARNING

_
Do not quick charge a battery.

Time (minutes) Check the open-circuit voltage.
_
CAUTION: Never remove the MF battery sealing caps. Do not use a high-rate battery charger since it forces a high-amperage current into the battery quickly and can cause battery overheating and battery plate damage. If it is impossible to regulate the charging current on the battery charger, be careful not to overcharge the battery. When charging a battery, be sure to remove it from the vehicle. (If charging has to be done with the battery mounted on the vehicle, disconnect the negative battery lead from the battery terminal.) To reduce the chance of sparks, do not plug in the battery charger until the battery charger leads are connected to the battery. Before removing the battery charger lead clips from the battery terminals, be sure to turn off the battery charger. Make sure the battery charger lead clips are in full contact with the battery terminal and that they are not shorted. A corroded battery charger lead clip may generate heat in the contact area and a weak clip spring may cause sparks.
Open-circuit voltage (V)
Ambient temperature 20 C (68 F)
Charging condition of the battery (%)
3 - 69
CHK ADJ
If the battery becomes hot to the touch at any time during the charging process, disconnect the battery charger and let the battery cool before reconnecting it. Hot batteries can explode! As shown in the following illustration, the open-circuit voltage of an MF battery stabilizes about 30 minutes after charging has been completed. Therefore, wait 30 minutes after charging is completed before measuring the open-circuit voltage.
3 - 70

Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) charger
CHK ADJ
Charger Ammeter
Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
NOTE: Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage. NOTE: Set the charging voltage to 16 ~ 17 V. (If the charging voltage is lower, charging will be insufficient, if it is higher, the battery will be over-charged.)
Connect a charger and ammeter to the battery and start charging.
YES
Is the amperage higher than the standard charging amperage written on the battery?
NO
Adjust the charging voltage to 20 ~ 25 V.
Adjust the voltage to obtain the standard charging amperage.
YES
Monitor the amperage for 3 ~ 5 minutes. Is the standard charging amperage exceeded? NO
Set the timer to the charging time determined by the opencircuit voltage. Refer to CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY.
If the amperage does not exceed the standard charging amperage after 5 minutes, replace the battery.
If the required charging time exceeds 5 hours, it is advisable to check the charging amperage after 5 hours. If there is any change in the amperage, readjust the voltage to obtain the standard charging amperage.
Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage. 12.8 V Charging is complete. 12.0 ~ 12.7 V Recharging is required. Under 12.0 V Replace the battery.
3 - 71

Charging method using a constant voltage charger
CHK ADJ
Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
NOTE: Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage.
Connect a charger and ammeter to the battery and start charging.
YES
Is the amperage higher than the standard charging amperage written on the battery?
NO
Charge the battery until the charging voltage reaches 15 V.

NOTE: Set the charging time to a maximum of 20 hours.
This type of battery charger cannot charge an MF battery. A variablevoltage charger is recommended.
Charger Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit voltage. 12.8 V Charging is complete. 12.0 ~ 12.7 V Recharging is required. Under 12.0 V Replace the battery. Ammeter Voltmeter
CAUTION: Constant amperage chargers are not suitable for charging MF batteries.
3 - 72
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY/ CHECKING THE FUSES

6. 7. Install: battery Connect: battery leads (to the battery terminals)
CHK ADJ
2 1
CAUTION:
_
First, connect the positive battery lead 1, and then the negative battery lead 2. 8. Check: battery terminals Dirt Clean with a wire brush. Loose connection Connect properly. 9. Lubricate: battery terminals Recommended lubricant Dielectric grease 10.Install: battery holding bracket front carrier Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD. battery cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
EBS00121
CHECKING THE FUSES The following procedure applies to all of the fuses. CAUTION:
_
To avoid a short circuit, always set the main switch to OFF when checking or replacing a fuse. 1. Remove: battery cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 73
CHECKING THE FUSES

2. Check: fuse
CHK ADJ
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and check the continuity. NOTE: Set the pocket tester selector to 1.
_
Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C b. If the pocket tester indicates , replace the fuse.
3. Replace: blown fuse

a. Set the main switch to OFF. b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage. c. Set on the switches to verify if the electrical circuit is operational.
3 - 74
CHECKING THE FUSES
CHK ADJ
d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check the electrical circuit. Items Main fuse EPS fuse Fuel injection system fuse Ignition fuse Headlight fuse Four-wheeldrive motor fuse Radiator fan motor fuse Signaling system fuse Auxiliary DC jack fuse Amperage rating 40 A 40 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 5A 15 A 40 A 15 A 10 A 5A Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Spare fuse
WARNING
_
Never use a fuse with an amperage rating other than that specified. Improvising or using a fuse with the wrong amperage rating may cause extensive damage to the electrical system, cause the lighting and ignition systems to malfunction and could possibly cause a fire.
4. Install: battery cover Refer to SEAT AND SIDE PANELS.
3 - 75
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS/ REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS

EBS00122
CHK ADJ
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS 1. Adjust: headlight beam (vertically) a. Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or b. Direction a Direction b Headlight beam is raised. Headlight beam is lowered.
a 1
EBS00124
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS 1. Remove: cover at the rear of the headlight 1
2. Remove: headlight bulb cover 1
3. Disconnect: headlight coupler 1
3 - 76
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS

4. Remove: headlight bulb holder 1 headlight bulb 2
CHK ADJ
NOTE: Unhook the headlight bulb holder, and then remove the defective bulb.
_
2
WARNING
_
Keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb while it is on, as it will be hot. Do not touch the bulb until it cools down. 5. Install: bulb New Secure the new bulb with the headlight unit. CAUTION:
_
Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. Keep it free from oil; otherwise, the transparency of the glass, life of the bulb, and luminous flux will be adversely affected. If oil gets on the bulb, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner. 6. 7. 8. Install: headlight bulb holder Connect: headlight coupler Install: headlight bulb cover cover at the rear of the headlight
3 - 77
ENGINE REMOVAL
EBS00200
ENG
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL
AIR DUCTS, MUFFLER AND EXHAUST PIPE
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 5 7
4 8
9
New 6 4 New
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1
Order Job/Part Removing the air ducts, muffler and exhaust pipe Front fender/rear fender Qty Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY in chapter 3. 1 1 1 2 1
Left footrest board Air filter case Meter assembly 1 2 3 4 5 V-belt cooling duct 2 V-belt cooling duct 1 Exhaust pipe protector Spring Muffler
4-1
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 5 7
4 8
9
New 6 4 New
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 6 7 8 9
Job/Part Gasket Muffler bracket Exhaust pipe Gasket
Qty 1 1 1 2
Remarks
4-2
ENGINE REMOVAL
EBS00202
ENG
SELECT LEVER UNIT
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib) 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft Ib)

T.
T.
T.
R.
R.
15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft Ib)
R.
T.
R.
LS
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 1 2 3
Job/Part Removing the select lever unit Select lever shift rod Select lever unit Shift arm
Qty 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to INSTALLING THE SELECT LEVER UNIT. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-3
ENGINE REMOVAL
EBS00204
ENG
LEADS, CABLES AND HOSES
5 2
8 7 1 10 4 3 6
Order
Job/Part Removing the leads, cables and hoses Footrest board Air filter case Throttle body assembly Fuel tank/fuel tank shield Coolant reservoir Thermostat Water pump assembly Oil delivery pipe Final gear case assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in chapter 6. Refer to FUEL TANK in chapter 6. Refer to RADIATOR in chapter 5. Refer to THERMOSTAT in chapter 5. Refer to WATER PUMP in chapter 5. Refer to CYLINDER HEAD. Refer to REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND FINAL DRIVE GEAR in chapter 7.
4-4
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
5 2
8 7 1 10 4 3 6
Order Starter motor Drive belt case 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job/Part
Qty
Remarks Refer to STARTER MOTOR in chapter 9. Refer to PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES.
Cylinder head breather hose Fast idle plunger inlet hose Coolant temperature sensor coupler Spark plug cap Shift control cable Reverse switch lead Speed sensor coupler Crankshaft position sensor coupler AC magneto coupler Gear position switch coupler
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-5
ENGINE REMOVAL
EBS00205
ENG
ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS
T.
R.
.
R.
3 8 5 1
LT
2 6
LT LT
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
7 9
LT
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
6 4 9
LT
42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft Ib)
.
R.
2 8 3
Order
T.
R.

T.
1 2 3 4
Job/Part Removing the engine mounting bolts Rubber damper nut (front side) Engine mounting bolt (rear upper side) Engine mounting bolt (rear lower side) Engine
T.
R.
R.
Qty
2 2 2 1
Refer to INSTALLING THE ENGINE. CAUTION: Make sure that the engine does not strike the brake pipe when removing it. NOTE: Remove the engine from the left side of the vehicle.
_
Rubber damper nut (rear side)
4-6
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
T.
R.
.
R.
3 8 5 1
LT
2 6
LT LT
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
7 9
LT
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
6 4 9
LT
42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft Ib)
.
R.
2 8 3
Order 6 7 8 9
T.
R.

T.
Job/Part Qty Rubber damper (rear side) 2 Engine mounting bolt (front upper side) 2 Engine mounting bolt (front lower side) 2 Rubber damper (front side) 2
T.
R.
Refer to INSTALLING THE ENGINE. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
R.
Remarks
4-7
ENGINE REMOVAL
EBS00207
ENG
7 8 4 9 5 3 2
INSTALLING THE ENGINE 1. Install: rubber dampers (front side) 1 engine mounting bolts (front lower side) 2 engine mounting bolts (front upper side) 3 rubber dampers (rear side) 4 rubber damper nuts (rear side) 5 engine 6 engine mounting bolts (rear lower side) 7 engine mounting bolts (rear upper side) 8 rubber damper nuts (front side) 9
CAUTION:
Make sure that the engine does not strike the brake pipe when installing it. NOTE: Do not fully tighten the bolts and nuts.
_
7 3 2
2. Tighten: engine mounting bolts (front lower side) 2

42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft lb) 42 Nm (4.2 m kg, 30 ft lb)
engine mounting bolts (front upper side) 3

LT
T.
engine mounting bolts (rear lower side) 7 engine mounting bolts (rear upper side) 8
LT
T. T.
rubber damper nuts (front side) 9 rubber damper nuts (rear side) 5
T. T.
T.
R. R. R. R. R. R.
4-8
ENGINE REMOVAL
N
ENG
2 a 3
N
INSTALLING THE SELECT LEVER UNIT 1. Install: 14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft lb) shift arm 1 select lever unit 2 select lever shift rod 3
15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
T. T.
NOTE: Make sure that the select lever and transmission are in NEUTRAL. The installed length a of the shift rod is 413 mm (16.3 in).
R. R. R.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
4-9
CYLINDER HEAD
EBS00218
ENG
CYLINDER HEAD

T. T.
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
Order
T.
T.
R.
T.
1 2 8
New
LS
13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft Ib)

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
New
T.
R. R.
R.
T.
R.
35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft Ib) M
New
T.
R.
9
New
(4)
16 10 11
New
LS LS
New
15 (4) 5 14 13 12
New
LS
New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
New
35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft Ib) 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)

T. T.
T.
R.
4
R.
LS

T.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
38 Nm (3.8 m kg, 27 ft Ib) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib) 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T. T.
R.
R.
R.
R.
R.
Job/Part Removing the cylinder head Throttle body assembly Thermostat/coolant temperature sensor Air ducts/exhaust pipe Spark plug cap Spark plug Cylinder head breather hose Camshaft sprocket cover Tappet cover Fast idle plunger inlet hose Oil delivery pipe Oil gallery bolt
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in chapter 6. Refer to THERMOSTAT in chapter 5. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL. Disconnect.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 - 10
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG

T. T.
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
Order 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
T.
T.
R.
T.
1 2 8
New
LS
13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft Ib)

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
New
T.
R. R.
R.
T.
R.
35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft Ib) M
New
T.
R.
9
New
(4)
16 10 11
New
LS LS
New
15 (4) 5 14 13 12
New
LS
New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
New

T. T.
T.
R.
4
R.
LS

T.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
38 Nm (3.8 m kg, 27 ft Ib) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib) 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T. T.
R.
R.
R.
R.
R.
Job/Part Timing chain tensioner cap bolt Timing chain tensioner Gasket Camshaft sprocket Decompressor assembly Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket Dowel pin
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Remarks
Refer to REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD and INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD.
4 - 11
CYLINDER HEAD
EBS00220
ENG
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD 1. Align: I mark on the AC magneto rotor (with the stationary pointer on the AC magneto cover)
d c
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. b. When the piston is at the top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke, align the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. NOTE: To position the piston at top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke, align the I mark c on the camshaft sprocket with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head, as shown in the illustration.
2. Loosen: camshaft sprocket bolts 1 decompressor assembly bolts 2 NOTE: While holding the AC magneto rotor nut with a wrench, loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts and decompressor assembly bolts.
3. 4.
Loosen: timing chain tensioner cap bolt Remove: timing chain tensioner (along with the gasket) camshaft sprocket timing chain
NOTE: To prevent the timing chain from falling into the crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
_
4 - 12
CYLINDER HEAD
5. Remove: cylinder head
6
ENG
4 2 7
5 3
NOTE: Loosen the bolts in the proper sequence as shown. Loosen each bolt 1/2 of a turn at a time. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
_
EBS00224
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET 1. Check: camshaft sprocket Wear/damage Replace the camshaft sprocket and timing chain as a set.
a 1/4 of a tooth b Correct 1 Roller 2 Sprocket
EBS00227
CHECKING THE TAPPET COVERS 1. Check: tappet covers camshaft sprocket cover Cracks/damage Replace.
EBS00229
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 1. Check: timing chain tensioner Cracks/damage Replace. 2. Check: one-way cam operation Rough movement Replace the timing chain tensioner. 3. Check: timing chain tensioner cap bolt spring one-way cam timing chain tensioner rod Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).
4 - 13
CYLINDER HEAD
EBS00230
ENG
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD 1. Eliminate: combustion chamber carbon deposits (with a rounded scraper) NOTE: Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching: spark plug bore threads valve seats
_
2. Check: cylinder head Damage/scratches Replace. cylinder head water jacket Mineral deposits/rust Eliminate.
3. Measure: cylinder head warpage Out of specification Resurface the cylinder head. Maximum cylinder head warpage 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) a. Place a straightedge 1 and a thickness gauge 2 across the cylinder head. b. Measure the warpage. c. If the limit is exceeded, resurface the cylinder head as follows. d. Place a 400 ~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on the surface plate and resurface the cylinder head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
_
1 2
NOTE: To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylinder head several times.
4 - 14
CYLINDER HEAD
EBS00232
ENG
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD 1. Install: dowel pins cylinder head gasket New 2. Install: cylinder head cylinder head bolts NOTE: Lubricate the cylinder head bolt 1 and 2 threads and mating surface with molybdenum disulfide grease. Lubricate the cylinder head bolts 3 threads and mating surface with engine oil.
_
4
7 2
3
5 3
2
8 4 6 1
1
3. Tighten: cylinder head bolts 1:
T.
= 135 mm (5.31 in) = 145 mm (5.71 in)
35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb) 35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb) 38 Nm (3.8 m kg, 27 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
R.
cylinder head bolts 2: cylinder head bolts 3 cylinder head bolts 4

T. T.
NOTE: Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the proper tightening sequence as shown and torque them in two stages.
_
4. Install: decompressor assembly camshaft sprocket (onto the camshaft)

R. R.
T.
R.
d c 2 4 1
a. Install the decompressor assembly onto the camshaft, and then finger tighten the decompressor assembly bolts 1. b. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise. c. Align the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. d. Install the timing chain 2 onto the camshaft sprocket 3, then the camshaft sprocket onto the camshaft, and then finger tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts 4. e. Make sure the I mark c on the camshaft sprocket with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head.
4 - 15
CYLINDER HEAD
_
ENG
NOTE: When installing the camshaft sprocket, keep the timing chain as tense as possible on the exhaust side. CAUTION:
_
Do not turn the crankshaft when installing the camshaft to avoid damage or improper valve timing. f. Remove the wire from the timing chain.
6 New 3 2 New
5. Install: timing chain tensioner

a. Remove the timing chain tensioner cap bolt 1, copper washer 2 and spring 3. b. Release the timing chain tensioner one-way cam 4 and push the timing chain tensioner rod 5 all the way into the timing chain tensioner housing. c. Install the timing chain tensioner and gasket 6 onto the cylinder. Timing chain tensioner bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
NOTE: Install the gasket with its beaded side facing the timing chain tensioner end.
T.
R.
5
d. Install the spring and timing chain tensioner cap bolt. Timing chain tensioner cap bolt 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
6. Turn: crankshaft (several turns counterclockwise)
T.
R.
4 - 16
CYLINDER HEAD
a
7. Check: I mark a
ENG
NOTE: Check that the I mark on the AC magneto rotor is aligned with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. I mark c NOTE: Check that the I mark on the camshaft sprocket is aligned with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head. Out of alignment Correct. Repeat steps (4) to (7), if necessary.
d c
8. Tighten: camshaft sprocket bolts 1

20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
decompressor assembly bolts 2 NOTE: While holding the AC magneto rotor nut with a wrench, tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts and decompressor assembly bolts. After tightening the decompressor assembly bolts, check that decompressor assembly moves smoothly. CAUTION:
_
T.
T.
R. R.
Be sure to tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts to the specified torque to avoid the possibility of the bolts coming loose and damaging the engine. 9. Measure: valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Refer to ADJUSTING THE CLEARANCE in chapter 3.
VALVE
4 - 17
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT

EBS00235
ENG
5 6
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
T.
R.
5 3 6
T.
R.
5 6
5 6 4
E E
10 9
T.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
7
E E
1 2
E E LT
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Job/Part Qty Remarks Removing the rocker arms and camRemove the parts in the order listed. shaft Cylinder head Refer to CYLINDER HEAD. Bearing retainer 1 Rocker arm shaft 2 Refer to REMOVING THE ROCKER Intake rocker arm 1 ARMS AND CAMSHAFT and INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND Exhaust rocker arm 1 ROCKER ARMS. Locknut 4 Valve adjusting screw 4 Camshaft 1 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the camshaft assembly.
Decompressor lever
4 - 18
ENG
5 6
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
T.
R.
5 3 6
T.
R.
5 6
5 6 4
E E
10 9
T.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
7
E E
1 2
E E LT
Order 9 10
Job/Part Decompressor lever pin Bearing
Qty 1 1
Remarks Refer to REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT and INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 19

EBS00237
ENG
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT 1. Loosen: locknuts valve adjusting screws 2. Remove: intake rocker arm shaft exhaust rocker arm shaft intake rocker arm exhaust rocker arm
2 1
NOTE: Remove the rocker arm shafts with the slide hammer bolt 1 and weight 2.
_
Slide hammer bolt 90890-01083 Slide hammer bolt 6 mm YU-01083-1 Weight 90890-01084, YU-01083-3
EBS00223
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT 1. Check: cam lobes Pitting/scratches/blue discoloration Replace. 2. Measure: cam lobe dimensions a and b Out of specification Replace. Camshaft lobe dimensions Intake a 43.488 ~ 43.588 mm (1.7121 ~ 1.7161 in) <Limit>: 43.388 mm (1.7082 in) b 36.959 ~ 37.059 mm (1.4551 ~ 1.4590 in) <Limit>: 36.859 mm (1.4511 in) Exhaust a 43.129 ~ 43.229 mm (1.6980 ~ 1.7019 in) <Limit>: 43.029 mm (1.6941 in) b 37.007 ~ 37.107 mm (1.4570 ~ 1.4609 in) <Limit>: 36.907 mm (1.4530 in)
4 - 20
ENG
3. Measure: camshaft runout Out of specification Replace. Camshaft runout limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
EBS00225
CHECKING THE DECOMPRESSION SYSTEM 1. Check: decompression system
1 2
a. Check the decompression system with the camshaft sprocket installed on the decompressor lever and pin installed in the camshaft. b. Check that the decompressor lever pin 1 projects from the camshaft. c. Check that the decompressor cam 2 moves smoothly.
EBS00239
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM SHAFTS The following procedure applies to both of the rocker arms and rocker arm shafts. 1. Check: rocker arm Damage/wear Replace. 2. Check: rocker arm shaft Blue discoloration/excessive wear/pitting/ scratches Replace or check the lubrication system. 3. Measure: rocker arm inside diameter Out of specification Replace. Rocker arm inside diameter 12.000 ~ 12.018 mm (0.4724 ~ 0.4731 in)
4 - 21
ENG
4. Measure: rocker arm shaft outside diameter Out of specification Replace. Rocker arm shaft outside diameter 11.981 ~ 11.991 mm (0.4717 ~ 0.4721 in) 5. Calculate: rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance NOTE: Calculate the clearance by subtracting the rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the rocker arm inside diameter.
_
Out of specification Replace the defective part(s). Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance 0.009 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)
EAS00243
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS 1. Install: bearing 1 (onto the cylinder head) NOTE: Apply engine oil to the bearing. Install the bearing so that the seal is facing a the camshaft. Installed depth b 0 mm (0 in)
4 - 22

2. Lubricate: camshaft decompressor lever pin decompressor lever
ENG
Recommended lubricant Engine oil
3. Install: decompressor lever pin 1 decompressor lever 2 NOTE: Install the decompressor lever pin 1 and decompressor lever 2 in the camshaft 3 as shown in the illustration.
_
2 1
4. Install: camshaft 1 NOTE: Install the camshaft so that its projection a becomes horizontal. 5. Lubricate: rocker arm shafts
a
Recommended lubricant Engine oil
4 - 23

1 2 3
6.
_
ENG
Install: exhaust rocker arm 1 exhaust rocker arm shaft 2 intake rocker arm intake rocker arm shaft
NOTE: Use a slide hammer bolt 3 to install the rocker arm shaft. Make sure the rocker arm shafts (intake and exhaust) are completely pushed into the cylinder head. Slide hammer bolt 90890-01083 Slide hammer bolt 6 mm YU-01083-1
4 - 24
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

EBS00234
ENG

1 2 2 3 6
M
2 3
M
1 2 3 6 New 7
3 6
New
New 7
New 7
7 8 8
5 4 5
M
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job/Part Removing the valves and valve springs Cylinder head Rocker arms/rocker arm shafts/camshaft Valve cotter Valve spring retainer Valve spring Exhaust valve Intake valve Valve stem seal Valve spring seat Valve guide
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to CYLINDER HEAD. Refer to ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT.
8 4 4 2 2 4 4 4
Refer to REMOVING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS and INSTALLING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS.
Refer to CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 25

EBS00238
ENG
REMOVING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components. NOTE: Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve seats), make sure the valves properly seal.
_
1. Check: valve sealing Leakage at the valve seat Check the valve face, valve seat, and valve seat width. Refer to CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS. a. Pour a clean solvent a into the intake and exhaust ports. b. Check that the valve seals properly. There should be no leakage at the valve seat 1.
2. Remove: valve cotters NOTE: Attach a valve spring compressor 1 and attachment 2 between the valve spring retainer and the cylinder head to remove the valve cotters.
_
Valve spring compressor 90890-04019, YM-04019 Valve spring compressor attachment 90890-01243 Valve spring compressor adapter (26 mm) YM-01253-1
4 - 26

3.
_
ENG
Remove: valve spring retainer 1 valve spring 2 valve 3 valve stem seal 4 valve spring seat 5
NOTE: Identify the position of each part very carefully so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
EBS00240
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS The following procedure applies to all of the valves and valve guides. 1. Measure: valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance Stem-to-guide clearance = valve guide inside diameter a valve stem diameter b Out of specification Replace the valve guide. Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) <Limit>: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) Exhaust 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) <Limit>: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
4 - 27

2. Replace: valve guide
ENG
NOTE: To ease valve guide removal and installation, and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder head to 100 C (212 F) in an oven.
_
a. Remove the valve guide using a valve guide remover 1. b. Install the new valve guide using a valve guide remover 1 and valve guide installer 2. Valve guide position a 12.7 ~ 13.1 mm (0.50 ~ 0.52 in) c. After installing the valve guide, bore the valve guide using a valve guide reamer 3 to obtain proper stem-to-guide clearance. Valve guide remover (6) 90890-04064 Valve guide remover (6.0 mm) YM-04064-A Valve guide installer (6) 90890-04065 Valve guide installer (6.0 mm) YM-04065-A Valve guide reamer (6) 90890-04066 Valve guide reamer (6.0 mm) YM-04066
NOTE: After replacing the valve guide, reface the valve seat.
_
3. Check: valve face Pitting/wear Grind the face. valve stem end Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the body of the valve stem Replace.
4 - 28
ENG
4. Measure: margin thickness a Out of specification Replace. Margin thickness 0.80 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0472 in)
5. Measure: valve stem runout Out of specification Replace. Runout limit 0.040 mm (0.0016 in) NOTE: When installing a new valve, always replace the valve guide. If the valve is removed or replaced, always replace the valve stem seal.
_
6. Eliminate: carbon deposits (from the valve face and valve seat) 7. Check: valve seats Pitting/wear Reface the valve seat. 8. Measure: valve seat width a Out of specification Reface the valve seat. Valve seat width 1.00 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0394 ~ 0.0472 in) <Limit>: 1.60 mm (0.0630 in) a. Apply Mechanics blueing dye (Dykem) b to the valve face. b. Install the valve into the cylinder head. c. Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern. d. Measure the valve seat width. Where the valve seat and valve face made contact, blueing will have been removed.
4 - 29
ENG
e. If the valve seat is too wide, too narrow, or the seat is not centered, the valve seat must be refaced.
9. Lap: valve face valve seat NOTE: After refacing the valve seat or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and valve face should be lapped.
_
a. Apply a coarse lapping compound to the valve face. CAUTION:

_
Do not let the compound enter the gap between the valve stem and the valve guide. b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil to the valve stem. c. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
d. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of the compound. NOTE: For best lapping results, lightly tap the valve seat while rotating the valve back and forth between your hands.
_
e. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve face and repeat the above steps. NOTE: After every lapping operation be sure to clean off all of the compound from the valve face and valve seat.
_
f. Apply Mechanics blueing dye (Dykem) to the valve face. g. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
4 - 30
ENG
h. Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern. i. Measure the valve seat width again. If the valve seat width is out of specification, reface and relap the valve seat.
10.Measure: valve spring free length a Out of specification Replace. Valve spring free length 38.79 mm (1.53 in) <Limit>: 36.85 mm (1.45 in)
11.Measure: compressed spring force a Out of specification Replace.

b Installed length
Compressed spring force 169.0 ~ 199.0 N at 35.00 mm (17.23 ~ 20.29 kg at 35.00 mm, 37.99 ~ 44.73 lb at 1.38 in)
12.Measure: spring tilt a Out of specification Replace. Spring tilt limit 2.5/1.70 mm (0.067 in)
EBS00241
INSTALLING THE VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components. 1. Deburr: valve stem end (with an oil stone)
4 - 31
ENG
2. Lubricate: valve stem 1 (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant Molybdenum disulfide oil
3.
_
Install: valve spring seats 1 valve stem seals 2 valves 3 valve springs 4 valve spring retainers 5
NOTE: Install the valve springs with the larger pitch a facing upwards.
b Smaller pitch
4. Install: valve cotters NOTE: Install the valve cotters while compressing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor 1 and attachment 2.
_
Valve spring compressor 90890-04019, YM-04019 Valve spring compressor attachment 90890-01243 Valve spring compressor adapter (26 mm) YM-01253-1
4 - 32
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
2. Measure: piston-to-cylinder clearance

a. Measure the cylinder bore C with a cylinder bore gauge. NOTE: Measure the cylinder bore C in parallel to and at right angles to the crankshaft. Then, find the average of the measurements.
_
Cylinder bore C Taper limit T Out of round R C = Maximum D
102.000 ~ 102.010 mm (4.0157 ~ 4.0161 in) 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
T = (Maximum D1 or D2) (Maximum D5 or D6) R = (Maximum D1, D3 or D5) (Minimum D2, D4 or D6) b. If out of specification, replace the cylinder, and the piston and piston rings as a set. c. Measure piston skirt diameter P with the micrometer.
a 10 mm (0.39 in) from the bottom edge of the piston
Piston size P Standard 101.955 ~ 101.970 mm (4.0140 ~ 4.0146 in)
d. If out of specification, replace the piston and piston rings as a set. e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance with the following formula. Piston-to-cylinder clearance = Cylinder bore C Piston skirt diameter P Piston-to-cylinder clearance 0.030 ~ 0.055 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0022 in) <Limit>: 0.13 mm (0.051 in)
4 - 36
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
f. If out of specification, replace the cylinder, and the piston and piston rings as a set.
EBS00250
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS 1. Measure: piston ring side clearance Out of specification Replace the piston and piston rings as a set. NOTE: Before measuring the piston ring side clearance, eliminate any carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves and piston rings.
_
Piston ring side clearance Top ring 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) <Limit>: 0.12 mm (0.0047 in) 2nd ring 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) <Limit>: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) 2. Install: piston ring (into the cylinder) NOTE: Level the piston ring into the cylinder with the piston crown.
_
a 50 mm (1.97 in)
3. Measure: piston ring end gap Out of specification Replace the piston ring. NOTE: The oil ring expander spacers end gap cannot be measured. If the oil ring rails gap is excessive, replace all three piston rings.
_
4 - 37
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
Piston ring end gap Top ring 0.20 ~ 0.35 mm (0.008 ~ 0.014 in) <Limit>: 0.60 mm (0.024 in) 2nd ring 0.75 ~ 0.90 mm (0.030 ~ 0.035 in) <Limit>: 1.25 mm (0.049 in) Oil ring 0.20 ~ 0.70 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in)
EBS00251
CHECKING THE PISTON PIN 1. Check: piston pin Blue discoloration/grooves Replace the piston pin and then check the lubrication system.
2. Measure: piston pin outside diameter a Out of specification Replace the piston pin. Piston pin outside diameter 22.991 ~ 23.000 mm (0.9052 ~ 0.9055 in) <Limit>: 22.971 mm (0.9044 in)
3. Measure: piston pin bore inside diameter b Out of specification Replace the piston. Piston pin bore inside diameter 23.004 ~ 23.015 mm (0.9057 ~ 0.9061 in) <Limit>: 23.045 mm (0.9073 in)
4 - 38
CYLINDER AND PISTON
ENG
4. Calculate: piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance Out of specification Replace the piston pin and piston as a set. Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance = Piston pin bore diameter b Piston pin outside diameter a Piston-pin-to-piston clearance 0.004 ~ 0.024 mm (0.0002 ~ 0.0009 in) <Limit>: 0.074 mm (0.0029 in)
EBS00252
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER 1. Install: top ring 1 2nd ring 2 oil ring expander 3 lower oil ring rail 4 upper oil ring rail 5 NOTE: Be sure to install the piston rings so that the manufacturers marks or numbers face up.
_
4 - 39
CYLINDER AND PISTON

1
2.
_
ENG
Install: piston 1 piston pin 2 piston pin clips 3 New
a 2 3 New
NOTE: Apply engine oil to the piston pin. Make sure the punch mark a on the piston points towards the exhaust side of the cylinder. Before installing the piston pin clips, cover the crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent the clips from falling into the crankcase. 3. 4. Install: cylinder gasket New dowel pins Lubricate: piston piston rings cylinder (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant Engine oil
120
a b
5. Offset: piston ring end gaps

a Top ring b Oil ring expander c Upper oil ring rail d Lower oil ring rail e 2nd ring Exhaust side
120
120 90
d
45
c
45
6. Install: cylinder 1 timing chain guide (exhaust side) NOTE: While compressing the piston rings with one hand, install the cylinder with the other hand. Pass the timing chain and timing chain guide (exhaust side) through the timing chain cavity.
_
4 - 40
CYLINDER AND PISTON

2
7. Install: cylinder bolts
ENG
NOTE: Lubricate the cylinder bolt 1 threads and mating surface with engine oil. 8. Tighten: cylinder bolts 1 (1st)
15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb) 50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
cylinder bolts 1 (2nd) cylinder bolts (timing chain side) 2

T. T.
T.
R. R. R.
4 - 41
AC MAGNETO
EBS00256
ENG
AC MAGNETO
E
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)

10

T.
T.
R.
15
6 12 11 17
E
14
LT
LT LT
1 2 9 8 7
E
16
LT LT
New
T.
13 3
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
LT LT LT
LS
LT
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib) 70 Nm (7.0 m kg, 50 ft lb) 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
T.
R.
Order
T.
R.
R.
R.
(10) 4
T.
T.
New 5
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
R.
Job/Part Removing the AC magneto Engine oil
Qty
Coolant
Left footrest board Select lever unit Water pump AC magneto coupler Crankshaft position sensor coupler Lead holder AC magneto cover
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL in chapter 3. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to SELECT LEVER UNIT. Refer to WATER PUMP in chapter 5. Disconnect. Disconnect. Refer to REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR and INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR.
4 - 42
AC MAGNETO
ENG
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)

10

T.
T.
R.
15
6 12 11 17
E
14
LT
LT LT
1 2 9 8 7
E
16
LT LT
New
T.
13 3
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
LT LT LT
LS
LT
T.
T.
R.
Order 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
T.
R.
R.
R.
(10) 4
T.
T.
New 5
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
R.
Job/Part AC magneto cover gasket Dowel pin Lead holder Crankshaft position sensor Stator coil Torque limiter Starter idle gear Starter idle gear shaft AC magneto rotor
14 15 16
Starter clutch Woodruff key Starter wheel gear
Qty Remarks 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Refer to REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR and INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR. 1 1 1
4 - 43
AC MAGNETO
ENG
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)

10

T.
T.
R.
15
6 12 11 17
E
14
LT
LT LT
1 2 9 8 7
E
16
LT LT
New
T.
13 3
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
LT LT LT
LS
LT
T.
T.
R.
Order 17
T.
R.
R.
R.
(10) 4
T.
T.
New 5
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
R.
Job/Part Washer
Qty 1
Remarks For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 44
AC MAGNETO
EBS00259
ENG
REMOVING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR 1. Remove: lead holder 1 AC magneto cover
NOTE: Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
_
3 2
2. Remove: AC magneto rotor nut 1 washer NOTE: While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with the sheave holder 3, loosen the AC magneto rotor nut. Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the projection on the rotor.
_
Sheave holder 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder YS-01880-A
1 2
3. Remove: AC magneto rotor 1 (with the starter clutch) woodruff key CAUTION: To protect the end of the crankshaft, place an appropriate sized socket between the flywheel puller set center bolt and the crankshaft. NOTE: Use the flywheel puller 2. Install the flywheel puller bolts to the threaded holes of the starter clutch. Make sure the flywheel puller is centered over the AC magneto rotor.
4 - 45
AC MAGNETO
ENG
Flywheel puller 90890-01362 Heavy duty puller YU-33270-B
EBS00262
CHECKING THE STATOR COIL AND CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 1. Check: stator coil 1 crankshaft position sensor 2 Damage Replace the crankshaft position sensor/stator assembly.
EBS00263
LT
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH 1. Check: starter one-way clutch 1 Cracks/damage Replace. bolts 2 Loose Replace with a new one, and clinch the end of the bolt. NOTE: The arrow mark on the starter clutch must face inward, away from the AC magneto rotor.
_
Starter clutch bolt 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) LOCTITE
T.
R.
a. Install the starter wheel gear to the starter clutch, and hold the starter clutch. b. When turning the starter wheel gear counter clockwise , the starter clutch and the wheel gear should be engaged. If not, the starter clutch is faulty. Replace it. c. When turning the starter wheel gear clockwise , the starter wheel gear should turn freely. If not, the starter clutch is faulty. Replace it.
4 - 46
AC MAGNETO
ENG
2. Check: starter idle gear teeth starter wheel gear teeth Burrs/clips/roughness/wear Replace. 3. Check: starter wheel gear (contacting surface) Damage/pitting/wear Replace.
CHECKING THE TORQUE LIMITER torque limiter Damage/wear Replace. NOTE: Do not disassemble the torque limiter.
EBS00268
INSTALLING THE AC MAGNETO ROTOR 1. Install: stator coil 1

LT
T.
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
R.
a
Stator coil bolt 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
R.
NOTE: Align the projection a on the stator coil with the slot b in the AC magneto cover.
2. Apply: Sealant 1 (into the slit)
Yamaha bond No. 1215 90890-85505 (Three bond No.1215)
4 - 47
AC MAGNETO
3. Install: woodruff key AC magneto rotor
ENG
NOTE: Before installing the rotor, clean the outside of the crankshaft and the inside of the rotor. After installing the rotor, check that the rotor rotates smoothly. If not, reinstall the key and rotor.
_
3 2
4. Tighten: AC magneto rotor nut 1

70 Nm (7.0 m kg, 50 ft lb)
NOTE: While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with the sheave holder 3, tighten the AC magneto rotor nut.
_
T.
R.
1
5.
Install: AC magneto cover lead holder 1 AC magneto cover bolts

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
NOTE: Tighten the AC magneto cover bolts in stages, using a crisscross pattern.
_
R.
4 - 48
BALANCER GEARS AND OIL PUMP GEARS BALANCER GEARS AND OIL PUMP GEARS
ENG
Order
1 2
Job/Part Removing the balancer gears and oil pump gears Starter wheel gear Lock washer Balancer driven gear
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to AC MAGNETO. Refer to REMOVING THE BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR and INSTALLING THE BALANCER DRIVE GEAR, BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR, AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR.
1 1
3 4 5
Oil pump drive gear Chain Straight key
1 1 1
4 - 49
BALANCER GEARS AND OIL PUMP GEARS
ENG
Order 6
Job/Part Lock washer
7 8 9 10 11
Oil pump driven gear Plate Spring Pin Balancer drive gear
Qty Remarks 1 Refer to REMOVING THE BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR and INSTALLING THE BALANCER DRIVE GEAR, BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR, AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR. 1 1 8 Refer to REMOVING THE BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR AND OIL PUMP 4 DRIVEN GEAR and INSTALLING THE 1 BALANCER DRIVE GEAR, BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR, AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 50

3 4 5 1
ENG
REMOVING THE BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR 1. Straighten the lock washer tabs. 2. Loosen: balancer driven gear nut 1 oil pump driven gear nut 2 NOTE: Place an aluminum plate 3 between the teeth of the balancer drive gear 4 and balancer driven gear 5, then loosen the nuts.
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP DRIVE 1. Check: oil pump drive gear oil pump driven gear Cracks/wear/damage Replace.
CHECKING THE BALANCER DRIVE 1. Check: balancer drive gear balancer driven gear Damage/wear Replace the balancer drive gear and balancer driven gear as a set. Excessive noise during operation Replace the balancer drive gear and balancer driven gear as a set.
4 - 51
ENG
INSTALLING THE BALANCER DRIVE GEAR, BALANCER DRIVEN GEAR, AND OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR 1. Install: pin spring balancer drive gear (onto the buffer boss) NOTE: Align the punch mark a on the balancer drive gear with the hole b to the buffer boss.
a 1
2.
Install: balancer drive gear 1 balancer driven gear 2 oil pump driven gear 3
c 3
NOTE: Align the punch mark a on the balancer drive gear with the punch mark b on the balancer driven gear. Install the oil pump driven gear with the 3B4 mark c facing out. 3. Install: lock washers New oil pump driven gear nut 1
5 4 2
balancer driven gear nut 2

T.
T.
R. R.
3 1
NOTE: Place an aluminum plate 3 between the teeth of the balancer drive gear 4 and balancer driven gear 5, then tighten the nuts. Apply the engine oil to the thread of axles and nuts. 4. Bend the lock washer tabs along the balancer driven gear nut and oil pump driven gear nut.
4 - 52
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES

EBS00269
ENG

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
11 New 2 New 1
(11)
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)

T.
10 New (8) 7 8 6 5
LS
Order
R.
4 4 New
140 Nm (14.0 m kg, 100 ft lb)
100 Nm (10.0 m kg, 72 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T. T.
T.
R.
3
T.
Job/Part Removing the primary and secondary sheaves Front fender/rear fender
Right footrest board Air ducts Drive belt cover Rubber gasket Bearing housing Dowel pin Primary sheave assembly V-belt Primary fixed sheave Secondary sheave assembly
R.
R.
R.
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
Refer to REMOVING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES and INSTALLING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES.
4 - 53
ENG
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
11 New 2 New 1
(11)
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)

T.
10 New (8) 7 8 6 5
LS
Order 9 10 11
R.
4 4 New
140 Nm (14.0 m kg, 100 ft lb)
100 Nm (10.0 m kg, 72 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T. T.
T.
R.
3
T.
Drive belt case Rubber gasket Rubber gasket
R.
Job/Part
R.
R.
Qty 1 1 1
Remarks
4 - 54

EBS00270
ENG
PRIMARY SHEAVE
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job/Part Disassembling the primary sheave Primary pulley sheave cap Primary pulley slider Primary pulley cam Primary pulley weight Collar Oil seal Primary sliding sheave O-ring
Qty 1 4 1 8 1 2 1 1
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE PRIMARY SHEAVE.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4 - 55

EBS00271
ENG
SECONDARY SHEAVE
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Job/Part Disassembling the secondary sheave Nut Spring seat Compression spring Spring seat Guide pin Secondary sliding sheave O-ring Secondary fixed sheave Oil seal
Qty
1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 2
Refer to DISASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE and ASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE.
4 - 56

EBS00272
ENG
REMOVING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES 1. Loosen: secondary sheave nut 1 primary sheave nut 2 NOTE: Use the sheave holder 3 to hold the primary sheave. First, loosen the secondary sheave nut 2, then loosen the primary sheave nut 1.
_
EBS00273
DISASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE 1. Remove: nut 1 a. Attach the sheave fixed block 2, locknut wrench 3 and sheave spring compressor 4 to the secondary sheave assembly. Sheave fixed block 90890-04135 Sheave fixed bracket YM-04135 Locknut wrench 90890-01348, YM-01348 Sheave spring compressor 90890-04134, YM-04134 b. Place the sheave fixed block in a vise and secure it. c. Tighten the sheave spring compressor nut 5 and compress the spring. d. Loosen the nut 1 with the locknut wrench 3. e. Remove the nut 1. f. Remove the sheave spring compressor and locknut wrench.
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
4 - 57

3.
ENG
Install: slider 1 cam 2 primary sliding sheave cap

3 Nm (0.3 m kg, 2.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
EBS00277
ASSEMBLING THE SECONDARY SHEAVE 1. Apply: BEL-RAY assembly lube (to the secondary sliding sheave 1 inner surface and oil seals) BEL-RAY assembly lube (to the bearings, oil seals and inner surface of the secondary fixed sheave 2) 2. Install: guide pins 1
3. Apply: BEL-RAY assembly lube (to the guide pin sliding grooves 1, and oil seals 2 New )
4 - 60

4. Install: spring seat compression spring spring seat nut
ENG
a. Attach the sheave fixed block, locknut wrench and sheave spring compressor to the secondary sheave. Sheave fixed block 90890-04135 Sheave fixed bracket YM-04135 Locknut wrench 90890-01348, YM-01348 Sheave spring compressor 90890-04134, YM-04134 b. Place the sheave fixed block in a vise and secure it. c. Tighten the sheave spring compressor nut 1 and compress the spring. d. Install the nut 2 and tighten it to the specified torque using the locknut wrench. Nut 90 Nm (9.0 m kg, 65 ft lb)
e. Remove the sheave spring compressor, locknut wrench, and sheave fixed block.
T.
R.
4 - 61

EBS00279
ENG
INSTALLING THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES 1. Install: secondary sheave V-belt primary sheave NOTE: Tightening the bolts 1 will push the secondary sliding sheave away, causing the gap between the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves to widen. Install the V-belt so that its arrow faces the direction shown in the illustration.
_
2. Tighten: primary sheave nut 1

secondary sheave nut 2 NOTE: Use the sheave holder 3 to hold the primary sheave. First, tighten the primary sheave nut 1, then tighten the secondary sheave nut 2.
_
T.
T.
R. R.
4 - 62
CLUTCH
EBS00291
ENG
CLUTCH
Order
Job/Part Removing the clutch Primary sheave/secondary sheave Clutch housing assembly Gasket Dowel pin One-way clutch bearing Nut Clutch carrier assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 2 1 1 1
Refer to REMOVING THE CLUTCH and INSTALLING THE CLUTCH.
4 - 63
CLUTCH
EBS00292
ENG
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job/Part Disassembling the clutch housing assembly Oil seal Circlip Bearing housing Circlip Bearing Circlip Bearing Clutch housing
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4 - 64
CLUTCH
EBS00296
ENG
REMOVING THE CLUTCH 1. Remove: clutch housing assembly gasket dowel pins NOTE: Working in crisscross pattern, loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn. Remove them after all of them are loosened.
_
2. 3.
Straighten: punched portion of the nut 1 Remove: nut 1
CAUTION: The clutch carrier assembly nut has lefthanded threads. To loosen the clutch carrier assembly nut turn it clockwise. NOTE: Use a clutch holding tool 2 to hold the clutch carrier assembly.
_
Universal clutch holder 90890-04086, YM-91042
4 - 65
CLUTCH
EBS00299
ENG
CHECKING THE CLUTCH 1. Check: clutch housing Heat damage/wear/damage Replace. one-way clutch bearing Chafing/wear/damage Replace. NOTE: Replace the one-way clutch assembly and clutch housing as a set. The one-way clutch bearing must be installed with the flange side facing in.
_
2. Check: one-way clutch operation

a. Install the one-way clutch bearing and clutch carrier assembly to the clutch housing and hold the clutch carrier assembly. b. When turning the clutch housing clockwise , the clutch housing should turn freely. If not, the one-way clutch assembly is faulty. Replace it. c. When turning the clutch housing counterclockwise , the clutch housing and crankshaft should be engaged. If not, the one-way clutch assembly is faulty. Replace it.
3. Check: clutch shoe Heat damage Replace.
4. Measure: clutch shoe thickness Out of specification Replace. Clutch shoe thickness 1.5 mm (0.06 in) Clutch shoe wear limit a 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
4 - 66
CLUTCH
EBS00309
ENG
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH 1. Install: clutch carrier assembly nut 1 New

190 Nm (19.0 m kg, 140 ft lb)
T.
R.
CAUTION: The clutch carrier assembly nut has lefthanded threads. To tighten the clutch carrier assembly nut turn it counterclockwise. NOTE: Use a clutch holding tool 2 to hold the clutch carrier assembly. Universal clutch holder 90890-04086, YM-91042 2. Lock the threads with a drift punch.
3. Install: one-way clutch bearing NOTE: The one-way clutch bearing should be installed in the clutch carrier assembly with the OUT SIDE mark a facing toward the clutch housing.
_
4.
Install: dowel pins gasket New clutch housing assembly

10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crisscross pattern. After tightening the bolts, check that the clutch housing assembly rotates smoothly.
_
R.
4 - 67
CRANKCASE
EBS00319
ENG
CRANKCASE
TIMING CHAIN AND OIL FILTER
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T. T.
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
68 Nm (6.8 m kg, 49 ft Ib)
R.
R.
6 9
LS E
8 New New
LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
New
LS
5
T.
New
E LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
1 New
LS
LT LT
4 New New 7
LT
LT LT
2 New
T.
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
LT
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)

R.
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
Order
1 2 3 4
T.
R.
Job/Part Removing the timing chain and oil filter Engine Cylinder head Cylinder/piston AC magneto rotor/starter wheel gear Balancer driven gear/oil pump driven gear Primary sheave assembly/secondary sheave assembly Clutch carrier assembly Timing chain guide (intake side) Timing chain guide Timing chain Oil filter cartridge
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL. Refer to CYLINDER HEAD. Refer to CYLINDER AND PISTON. Refer to AC MAGNETO. Refer to BALANCER GEARS AND OIL PUMP GEARS. Refer to PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES. Refer to CLUTCH.
1 1 1 1
4 - 68
CRANKCASE
ENG
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)

T.
68 Nm (6.8 m kg, 49 ft Ib)
T.
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
R.
R.
6 9
LS E
8 New New
LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
New
LS
5
T.
New
E LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
R.
1 New
LS
LT LT
4 New New 7
LT
LT LT
2 New
T.
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
LT
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)

R.
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
Order 5 6 7 8 9
T.
R.
Job/Part Speed sensor Dipstick Relief valve assembly Reverse switch Gear position switch
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
4 - 69
CRANKCASE
EBS00320
ENG
CRANKCASE
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
18 Nm (1.8 m kg, 13 ft Ib)
T.
T.
R.
18 Nm (1.8 m kg, 13 ft Ib)
R.
R.
New
E
9 6 New 8
E
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
New
T.
R.
2 (4)
9 3 10
1 4
E LS
New
LS

T.
T.
R.
14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft Ib)
T.
R.
R.
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job/Part Separating the crankcase Shift lever cover Gasket Dowel pin Shift lever 1 Shift lever 2 assembly Shift drum stopper Stopper lever stopper Right crankcase Dowel pin Left crankcase
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Refer to INSTALLING THE SHIFT LEVER.
Spring identification color: red Spring identification color: yellow Refer to SEPARATING THE CRANKCASE and ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 70
CRANKCASE
EBS00321
ENG
CRANKCASE BEARINGS
New
1
LS LS E
New 3
LT LT
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
LT
.
7
E
7 6 7 5
E E
7 7
E
Order
Job/Part Removing the crankcase bearings Crankshaft/oil pump Transmission Middle drive shaft/middle driven shaft Collar O-ring Oil seal Bearing retainer Spacer Crank seal Bearing
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to CRANKSHAFT AND OIL PUMP. Refer to TRANSMISSION. Refer to MIDDLE GEAR.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 2 9 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 71
CRANKCASE
EBS00332
ENG
SEPARATING THE CRANKCASE 1. Separate: right crankcase left crankcase

a. Remove the lead holders and crankcase bolts. NOTE: Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time and after all the bolts are loosened, remove them. Loosen the bolts in numerical order (see numbers on the illustration).
_
Left crankcase Right crankcase
b. Remove the right crankcase. CAUTION:

_
Use a soft hammer to tap on one side of the crankcase. Tap only on reinforced portions of the crankcase. Do not tap on the crankcase mating surfaces. Work slowly and carefully. Make sure that the crankcase halves separate evenly. c. Remove the dowel pins.
EBS00335
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN AND GUIDE 1. Check: timing chain Cracks/stiff Replace the timing chain and camshaft sprocket as a set. 2. Check: intake side timing chain guide Wear/damage Replace. CHECKING THE RELIEF VALVE 1. Check: spring seat 1 spring 2 relief valve body 3 relief valve 4 Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).
4 3 2 1
4 - 72
CRANKCASE
EBS00339
ENG
CHECKING THE BEARINGS 1. Check: bearings Clean and lubricate, then rotate the inner race with a finger. Roughness Replace.
EBS00338
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE 1. Thoroughly wash the case halves in a mild solvent. 2. Clean all the gasket mating surfaces and crankcase mating surfaces thoroughly. 3. Check: crankcase Cracks/damage Replace. oil delivery passages Clogged Blow out with compressed air.
EBS00342
1 2
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE 1. Apply: sealant 1 (to the mating surfaces of both case halves) Yamaha bond No. 1215 90890-85505 (Three bond No.1215) NOTE: Apply two coats of sealant to the area a shown in the illustration. 2. Install: dowel pins 2
4 - 73
CRANKCASE
ENG
3. Fit the right crankcase onto the left crankcase. Tap lightly on the case with a soft hammer. CAUTION:
_
Before installing and torquing the crankcase holding bolts, be sure to check whether the transmission is functioning properly by manually rotating the shift drum in both directions. 4. 5. Install: lead holder crankcase bolts Tighten: crankcase bolts (follow the proper tightening sequence)
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
Right crankcase Left crankcase
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crisscross pattern.

_
6. Apply: 4-stroke engine oil (to the crankshaft pin, bearing and oil delivery hole) 7. Check: crankshaft and transmission operation Unsmooth operation Repair.
INSTALLING THE SHIFT LEVER 1. Install: shift lever 2 assembly 1

14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft lb)
T.
R.
shift lever 1 2 NOTE: When installing the shift lever 1, align the punch mark a on the shift lever 1 with the punch marks b on the shift lever 2.
4 - 74
CRANKSHAFT AND OIL PUMP

EBS00326
ENG
4 2 New 1
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the crankshaft and oil pump Crankcase Oil pump Gasket Balancer Crankshaft
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Separate. Refer to CRANKCASE.
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1
Refer to REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT and INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 75

EBS00327
ENG
OIL PUMP
6 3 2 5 4
1
E
5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6
Job/Part Disassembling the oil pump Oil pump housing cover Pin Oil pump shaft Oil pump inner rotor Oil pump outer rotor Oil pump housing
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 - 76

EBS00336
ENG
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT 1. Remove: crankshaft 1 Use a crankcase separating tool 2.
2 1
Crankcase separating tool 90890-01135 Crankcase separator YU-01135-B

EBS00331
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP 1. Check: oil pump housing oil pump housing cover Cracks/wear/damage Replace. 2. Measure: inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance a outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance b oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotor-and-outerrotor clearance c Out of specification Replace the oil pump.
1 Inner rotor 2 Outer rotor 3 Oil pump housing
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance Less than 0.12 mm (0.0047 in) <Limit>: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance 0.090 ~ 0.170 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0067 in) <Limit>: 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotorand-outer-rotor clearance 0.030 ~ 0.100 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0039 in) <Limit>: 0.17 mm (0.0067 in) 3. Check: oil pump operation Rough movement Repeat steps (1) and (2) or replace the defective part(s).
4 - 77
ENG
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER 1. Check: oil strainer Damage Replace. Contaminants Clean with engine oil.
EBS00360
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT 1. Measure: crank width a Out of specification Replace the crankshaft.
d c c
Crank width 74.95 ~ 75.00 mm (2.951 ~ 2.953 in) 2. Measure: side clearance d Out of specification Replace the crankshaft. Big end side clearance 0.350 ~ 0.650 mm (0.0138 ~ 0.0256 in) <Limit>: 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 3. Measure: runout c Out of specification Replace the crankshaft. Runout limit 0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
4 - 78

EBS00318
ENG
1 a
2 3
a 4 5
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP 1. Install: oil pump housing 1 oil pump outer rotor 2 oil pump inner rotor 3 oil pump shaft 4 pin 5 NOTE: When installing the oil pump shaft 4 align the pin 5 with the groove a in the inner rotor 3.
_
EBS00362
5 1 6 4 2 3
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT 1. Install: crankshaft 1 Crankshaft installer pot 2 90890-01274 Installing pot YU-90058 Pot installer YU-90059 Crankshaft installer bolt 3 90890-01275 Bolt YU-90060 Adapter (M16) 4 90890-04130 Adapter #13 YM-04059 Spacer (crankshaft installer) 5 90890-04081 Pot spacer YM-91044 Spacer 6 90890-01309 Pot spacer YU-90059
4 - 79

_
ENG
NOTE: Hold the connecting rod at the Top Dead Center (TDC) with one hand while turning the nut of the installing tool with the other. Operate the installing tool until the crankshaft bottoms against the bearing. CAUTION:
_
Apply engine oil to each bearing to protect the crankshaft against scratches and to make installation easier.
4 - 80
TRANSMISSION
EBS00345
ENG
TRANSMISSION
1 11 12
E
New
7
New
M
10 9
New
E
New 6 5 4
8 New
Order
Job/Part Removing the transmission Crankcase Middle driven gear Shift drum Shift fork assembly Shift fork R Spring Shift fork L Shift fork guide bar Secondary shaft Drive axle assembly Reverse idle gear Reverse idle gear shaft
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Separate. Refer to CRANKCASE. Refer to MIDDLE GEAR.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY.
Refer to REMOVING THE TRANSMISSION and INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION.
4 - 81
TRANSMISSION
ENG
1 11 12
E
New
7
New
M
10 9
New
E
New 6 5 4
8 New
Order 11 12
Job/Part Stopper lever Stopper lever shaft
Qty 1 1
Remarks Refer to REMOVING THE TRANSMISSION and INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4 - 82
TRANSMISSION
EBS00348
ENG
DRIVE AXLE
9 8 7 New 6 5 4 3 2 1
M M M
G H
M M M
F E D B 0 A New C New
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C
Job/Part Disassembling the drive axle assembly Washer Collar High wheel gear Washer Clutch dog Circlip Washer Collar Low wheel gear Washer Circlip Middle drive gear Circlip
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 - 83
TRANSMISSION
ENG
9 8 7 New 6 5 4 3 2 1
M M M
G H
M M M
F E D B 0 A New C New
Order D E F G H
Job/Part Washer Bearing Reverse wheel gear Stopper wheel Drive axle
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
4 - 84
TRANSMISSION
ENG
REMOVING THE TRANSMISSION 1. Remove: shift drum 1 shift fork assembly 2

a. Pull out the guide bar from the left crankcase. b. Push down on the drive shaft, and then slide the shift fork assembly to remove the shift fork cam followers. c. Remove the shift drum. d. Remove the shift fork assembly.
EBS00349
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS 1. Check: shift fork cam follower 1 shift fork pawl 2 Scoring/bends/wear/damage Replace.
2. Check: guide bar Roll the guide bar on a flat surface. Bends Replace. WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent guide bar.
3. Check: shift fork movement (on the guide bar) Unsmooth operation Replace the shift fork and the guide bar. 4. Check: spring Cracks/damage Replace.
4 - 85
TRANSMISSION
EBS00351
ENG
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM 1. Check: shift drum grooves Scratches/wear/damage Replace.
EBS00354
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION 1. Measure: drive axle runout (with a centering device and dial gauge 1) Out of specification Replace the drive axle. Drive axle runout limit 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)
2. Check: transmission gears Blue discoloration/pitting/wear Replace the defective gear(s). transmission gear dogs Cracks/damage/rounded edges Replace the defective gear(s). 3. Check: transmission gear engagement (each pinion gear to its respective wheel gear) Incorrect Reassemble the transmission axle assemblies. 4. Check: transmission gear movement Rough movement Replace the defective part(s). 5. Check: circlips Bends/damage/looseness Replace.
4 - 86
TRANSMISSION
ENG
CHECKING THE SECONDARY SHAFT 1. Check: gear teeth Blue discoloration/pitting/wear Replace.
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER AND STOPPER WHEEL 1. Check: stopper lever pawl 1 Bends/damage/wear Replace the stopper lever and stopper wheel as a set. stopper wheel 2 Damage/wear Replace the stopper wheel and stopper lever as a set. stopper lever shaft 3 Bends/damage/wear Replace.
New 5 3
3B4
1 2
New 5 a 4
ASSEMBLING THE SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY 1. Install: shift fork guide bar 1 shift fork L 2 spring 3 shift fork R 4 circlips 5 New NOTE: Install the shift forks with their 3B4 marks a facing each other.
4 - 87
TRANSMISSION
EBS00356
ENG
3 2 1 4 5
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION 1. Install: stopper lever shaft stopper lever reverse idle gear 1 drive axle assembly 2 secondary shaft 3 shift fork assembly 4 shift drum 5 NOTE: Install the shift forks 6 with the L mark a and R mark b facing towards the left and right sides of the crankcase respectively.
_
6
2. Check: shift operation Unsmooth operation Repair. NOTE: Oil each gear and bearing thoroughly. Before assembling the crankcase, make sure that the transmission is in neutral and that the gears turn freely.
_
4 - 88
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS00363
ENG
MIDDLE GEAR
MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT
Order
Job/Part Removing the middle drive shaft Crankcase Bearing housing Middle drive pinion gear nut Middle drive pinion gear Middle drive gear shim Middle drive shaft Bearing retainer Bearing Circlip Middle driven gear
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1 1 * 1 2 1 1 1
Refer to REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT and INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT.
4 - 89
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS00364
ENG
MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT
Order
Job/Part Removing the middle driven shaft Crankcase Front drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) Front drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) Middle driven pinion gear assembly Rear drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) Rear drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) Bearing housing O-ring Middle driven gear shim Middle driven pinion gear
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * 1
Refer to REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT and INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT.
4 - 90
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
Order 10 11 12 13 14 15
Job/Part Bearing Middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer Bearing Middle driven shaft bearing retainer Bearing Middle driven shaft
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
Refer to REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT and INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT.
4 - 91
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS00365
ENG
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT 1. Straighten: punched portion of the middle drive pinion gear nut
2. Loosen: middle drive pinion gear nut 1 NOTE: Secure the middle drive shaft in the vise with a clean rag.
_
3.
Remove: middle drive pinion gear nut middle drive pinion gear shim(s)
4.
Remove: middle driven gear 1 circlip middle drive shaft 2
NOTE: Press the middle drive shaft end and remove the middle driven gear.
4 - 92
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS01020
ENG
1 3
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT 1. Remove: front drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) 1 washer front drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) 2 NOTE: Use the coupling gear/middle shaft tool 3 to hold the coupling gear.
_
Coupling gear/middle shaft tool 90890-01229 Gear holder YM-01229
2. Remove: rear drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) 1 washer rear drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) 2 NOTE: Use the coupling gear/middle shaft tool 3 to hold the coupling gear. Coupling gear/middle shaft tool 90890-01229 Gear holder YM-01229
1 3
3. Remove: bearing housing assembly 1

a. Clean the outside of the bearing housing assembly. b. Place the bearing housing assembly onto a hydraulic press.
4 - 93
MIDDLE GEAR
CAUTION:
_
ENG
Never directly press the middle driven pinion gear end with a hydraulic press, this will result in damage to the middle driven pinion gear thread. Install a suitable socket 2 on the middle driven pinion gear end to protect the thread from damage. c. Press the middle driven pinion gear end and remove the bearing housing.
1 2
4. Remove: middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer bearing a. Attach the folded rag 1. b. Secure the bearing housing edge in the vise. c. Attach the bearing retainer wrench 2. Bearing retainer wrench 90890-04128 Middle gear bearing retainer YM-04128 CAUTION:
_
The middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer has left-handed threads. To loosen the retainer, turn it clockwise. d. Remove the bearing retainer and bearing.
4 - 94
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
5. Remove: oil seal 1 middle driven shaft bearing retainer 2 NOTE: Attach the ring nut wrench 3.
_
Ring nut wrench 90890-01430, YM-38404 CAUTION:

_
The middle driven shaft bearing retainer has left-handed threads. To loosen the retainer turn it clockwise.
6. Remove: middle driven shaft 1 (with bearing)
1
EBS01021
CHECKING THE PINION GEARS 1. Check: drive pinion gear teeth driven pinion gear teeth Pitting/galling/wear Replace. 2. Check: O-ring Damage Replace. bearings Pitting/damage Replace.
4 - 95
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS00370
ENG
SELECTING MIDDLE DRIVE AND DRIVEN GEAR SHIMS When the drive and driven gear, bearing housing assembly and/or crankcase replaced, be sure to adjust the gear shim 1, 2. 1. Select: middle drive gear shim 1 middle driven gear shim 2
a. Position middle drive and driven gear by using shims 1 and 2 with their respective thickness calculated from information marked on crankcase, bearing housing and drive gear end.
1 Shim thickness A 2 Shim thickness B
b. To find shim thickness A use following formula: Middle drive pinion gear shim thickness A = e + d b c a
Where: a = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the bearing housing is either added to or subtracted from 0.6 b = 17.0 c = 55.0 d = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the right crankcase specifies a thickness of 65.0
4 - 96
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
e = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the left crankcase specifies a thickness of 9.0 Example: 1) If the bearing housing is marked 02, ..... a is 0.58 2) b is 17.0 3) c is 55.0 4) If the right crankcase is marked 64.97, ..... d is 64.97 5) If the left crankcase is marked 9.01, ..... e is 9.01 6) Therefore, the shim thickness is 1.40 mm. A = 9.01 + 64.97 17.0 55.0 0.58 = 1.40 7) Round off hundredths digit and select appropriate shim(s). In the example above, the calculated shim thickness is 1.40 mm. The chart instructs you, however, to round off 0 to 0. Hundredths 0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9 Round value 0 5 10
Shims are supplied in the following thickness. Middle drive pinion gear shim 0.50 0.70 1.00 0.55 0.80 0.60 0.90
Thickness (mm)
4 - 97
MIDDLE GEAR
f
ENG
c. To find shim thickness B use the following formula: Middle driven pinion gear shim thickness B = f g + h i j 0.05 Where: f = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the bearing housing is either added to or subtracted from 77.5 NOTE: After replacing any part in the middle driven pinion gear assembly, the overall length of the assembly will change. Therefore, be sure to measure distance f to select the correct middle driven pinion gear shim thickness.
f
g = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the middle driven pinion gear is either added to or subtracted from 49.0 h = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the middle driven pinion gear is either added to or subtracted from 80.5 i = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the left crankcase specifies a thickness of 99.98 j = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the right crankcase specifies a thickness of 8.12 Example: 1) If the bearing housing is marked +03, ..... f is 77.53 2) If the driven pinion gear is marked +0, ..... g is 49.0 3) If the driven pinion gear is marked 10, ..... h is 80.40 4) If the left crankcase is marked 99.99, ..... i is 99.99 5) If the right crankcase is marked 8.17, ..... j is 8.17 6) Therefore, the shim thickness is 0.72 mm. B = 77.53 49.0 + 80.40 99.99 8.17 0.05 = 0.72
4 - 98
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
7) Round off hundredth digit and select appropriate shim(s). In the example above, the calculated shim thickness is 0.72 mm. The chart instructs you, however, to round off 2 to 0. Hundredths 0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9 Round value 0 5 10
Shims are supplied in the following thickness. Middle drive pinion gear shim 0.10 0.40 0.15 0.50 0.20 0.60 0.30
Thickness (mm)
1 5 4 2
INSTALLING THE BEARING AND OIL SEALS 1. Install: bearing 1 oil seal 2 oil seal 3 Installed depth of bearing a 0.9 ~ 1.4 mm (0.035 ~ 0.055 in) Installed depth of oil seal b 1.0 ~ 1.5 mm (0.039 ~ 0.059 in) Installed depth of oil seal c 1.0 ~ 1.5 mm (0.039 ~ 0.059 in)
4 Middle drive pinion gear bearing retainer 5 Bearing housing 6 Middle driven shaft bearing retainer 7 Crankcase
c 6 7
4 - 99
MIDDLE GEAR
EBS00373
ENG
INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT 1. Install: middle driven shaft bearing retainer 1
LT
T.
80 Nm (8.0 m kg, 58 ft lb)
NOTE: Attach the ring nut wrench 2.

_
Ring nut wrench 90890-01430, YM-38404 CAUTION:

_
The middle driven shaft bearing retainer has left-handed threads. To tighten the retainer turn it counterclockwise.
R.
2
2. Install: middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer 1
a. Secure the bearing housing edge in the vise with a clean rag. b. Attach the bearing retainer wrench 2.
Bearing retainer wrench 90890-04128 Middle gear bearing retainer YM-04128 c. Tighten the bearing retainer. CAUTION:
_
The middle driven pinion gear bearing retainer has left-handed threads. To tighten the retainer turn it counterclockwise. Bearing retainer 130 Nm (13.0 m kg, 94 ft lb) LOCTITE
T.
R.
4 - 100
MIDDLE GEAR
1
ENG
3. Install: middle driven gear shim(s) 1 bearing housing NOTE: Install the shim(s) so that the tabs are positioned as shown in the illustration.
_
1
4. Install: rear drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) 1 washer rear drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) 2
LT
T.
2 3
150 Nm (15.0 m kg, 110 ft lb)
NOTE: Use the coupling gear/middle shaft tool 3 to hold the coupling gear. Coupling gear/middle shaft tool 90890-01229 Gear holder YM-01229
5. Install: front drive shaft coupling gear (middle gear side) 1 washer front drive shaft coupling gear nut (middle gear side) 2
115 Nm (11.5 m kg, 85 ft lb)
R.
2 3
NOTE: Use the coupling gear/middle shaft tool 3 to hold the coupling gear. Coupling gear/middle shaft tool 90890-01229 Gear holder YM-01229
T.
R.
4 - 101
MIDDLE GEAR
a
ENG
INSTALLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT 1. Install: circlip middle driven gear 1 (to the middle drive shaft 2)
Installed depth of middle driven gear a 24.7 ~ 24.9 mm (0.97 ~ 0.98 in) 2. Tighten: middle drive pinion gear nut 1 New
180 Nm (18.0 m kg, 130 ft lb)
NOTE: Secure the middle drive shaft in the vise with a clean rag. 3. Lock the threads with a drift punch.
T.
R.
EBS01022
MEASURING THE MIDDLE GEAR BACKLASH 1. Measure: gear lash Middle gear lash 0.10 ~ 0.30 mm (0.004 ~ 0.012 in)
4 3
a. Temporarily install the left crankcase. b. Wrap a rag 1 around a screwdriver 2, and then insert it into the installation hole a of the left crankcase speed sensor to hold the middle driven gear. c. Attach the final gear backlash band 3 and dial gauge 4. Final gear backlash band 90890-01511
b 45 mm (1.8 in)
d. Measure the gear lash while rotating the middle driven shaft back and forth. NOTE: Measure the gear lash at 4 positions. Rotate the middle driven gear 90 each time.
_
4 - 102
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
e. If the gear lash is incorrect, adjust the gear lash by middle driven pinion gear shims and/or middle drive pinion gear shim(s).
4 - 103
RADIATOR
EBS00125
COOL
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR
1 (4) 9 12
11
5
10
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
8 7
Qty
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
Order
1 2 3 4
T.
R.
R.
Job/Part Removing the radiator Front fenders Front guard Left footrest board Air filter case Coolant
Radiator fan motor coupler Radiator fan breather hose Coolant reservoir hose Coolant reservoir breather hose
1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL in chapter 3. Refer to FRONT CARRIER AND FRONT GUARD in chapter 3. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. Disconnect.
5-1
RADIATOR
COOL
1 (4) 9 12
11
10
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
8 7
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
Order 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
T.
R.
R.
Job/Part Coolant reservoir cap Coolant reservoir Fast idle plunger outlet hose Radiator outlet hose Radiator inlet hose Radiator bracket Radiator Radiator fan
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
5-2
RADIATOR
EBS00127
COOL
CHECKING THE RADIATOR 1. Check: radiator fins Obstruction Clean. Apply compressed air to the rear of the radiator. Damage Repair or replace. NOTE: Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flathead screwdriver.
_
2. Check: radiator hoses Cracks/damage Replace. 3. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure Below the specified pressure Replace the radiator cap. Radiator cap opening pressure 93.3 ~ 122.7 kPa (0.933 ~ 1.227 kg/cm2, 13.27 ~ 17.45 psi) a. Install the radiator cap tester 1 and radiator cap tester adapter 2 to the radiator cap 3. Radiator cap tester 90890-01325 Radiator pressure tester YU-24460-01 Radiator cap tester adapter 90890-01352 Radiator pressure tester adapter YU-33984 b. Apply the specified pressure for ten seconds and make sure there is no drop in pressure.
4. Check: radiator fan Damage Replace. Malfunction Check and repair. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in chapter 9.
5-3
RADIATOR
EBS00128
COOL
INSTALLING THE RADIATOR 1. Fill: cooling system (with the specified amount of the recommended coolant) Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. 2. Check: cooling system Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part. 3. Measure: radiator cap opening pressure Below the specified pressure Replace the radiator cap. Refer to CHECKING THE RADIATOR.
5-4
THERMOSTAT
EBS00129
COOL
THERMOSTAT
1 5 New
18 Nm (1.8 m kg, 13 ft Ib)
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New
T.
R.
LS
New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
Order
1 2 3 4 5
T.
R.
Job/Part Removing the thermostat Air filter case Coolant
Qty
Radiator inlet hose Thermostat cover Thermostat Coolant temperature sensor Copper washer
1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. Disconnect.
5-5
THERMOSTAT
EBS00132
COOL
CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT 1. Check: thermostat 1 Does not open at 50 ~ 54 C (122 ~ 129.2 F) Replace.
a. Suspend the thermostat in a container filled with water. b. Slowly heat the water. c. Place a thermometer in the water. d. While stirring the water, observe the thermostat and thermometers indicated temperature.
1 Thermometer 2 Water 3 Thermostat 4 Container Fully closed Fully open
NOTE: If the accuracy of the thermostat is in doubt, replace it. A faulty thermostat could cause serious overheating or overcooling.
_
2. Check: thermostat housing cover thermostat housing (cylinder head) Cracks/damage Replace.
EBS00133
3 2 New a 1
INSTALLING THE THERMOSTAT 1. Install: thermostat 1 O-ring 2 New thermostat cover 3 NOTE: Install the thermostat with its breather hole a facing up.
_
LS
2. Fill: cooling system (with the specified amount of the recommended coolant) Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. 3. Check: cooling system Leak Repair or replace any faulty part.
5-6
WATER PUMP
EBS00134
COOL
WATER PUMP
LS
12 New
11 5 8 New New 1
LS
10 New 9
7 New New
3 2
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6
T.
R.
4 New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
Job/Part Removing the water pump Left footrest board Left front fender AC magneto cover Coolant
Radiator outlet hose Water jacket joint Water pump outlet hose Water pump outlet pipe Water pump breather hose Water pump housing
R.
R.
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to FOOTREST BOARDS in chapter 3. Refer to FRONT FENDERS AND FRONT GRILL in chapter 3. Refer to AC MAGNETO in chapter 4. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. Disconnect.
5-7
WATER PUMP
COOL
LS
12 New
11 5 8 New New 1
LS
10 New 9
7 New New
3 2
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
Order 7 8 9 10 11 12
T.
R.
4 New
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
LS
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
Job/Part Gasket Circlip Impeller shaft Water pump seal Bearing Oil seal
R.
R.
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
5-8
WATER PUMP
EBS00138
COOL
DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP 1. Remove: water pump seal 1 NOTE: Tap out the water pump seal from the inside of the AC magneto cover 2.
_
1 2 3
2. Remove: bearing 1 oil seal 2 NOTE: Tap out the bearing and oil seal from the outside of the AC magneto cover 3.
_
EBS00139
CHECKING THE WATER PUMP 1. Check: water pump housing impeller shaft Cracks/damage/wear Replace. 2. Check: water jacket water jacket outlet hose water jacket outlet pipe Cracks/damage/wear Replace. bearing Rough movement Replace.
5-9
WATER PUMP
EBS00140
COOL
ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP 1. Install: oil seal 1 New (into the AC magneto cover 2) NOTE: Before installing the oil seal, apply tap water or coolant onto its out surface. Install the oil seal with a socket 3 that matches its outside diameter.
_
a 1 New
Installed depth of oil seal a 8.1 ~ 8.7 mm (0.32 ~ 0.34 in)
4 3 1 New
2. Install: water pump seal 1 New (into the AC magneto cover 2) CAUTION:
_
Never lubricate the water pump seal surface with oil or grease. NOTE: Install the water pump seal with the special tools.
_
Mechanical seal installer 3 90890-04132 Water pump seal installer YM-33221-A Middle driven shaft bearing driver 4 90890-04058 Bearing driver 40 mm YM-04058
Push down.
5 - 10
WATER PUMP
COOL
3. Measure: impeller shaft tilt Out of specification Replace. CAUTION:

_
Make sure the rubber damper and rubber damper holder are flush with the impeller. Impeller shaft tilt limit 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
1 Straightedge 2 Impeller shaft
5 - 11
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

EAS00894
FI

1 ECU (engine control unit) 2 Lean angle sensor 3 Fuel injection system relay 4 Engine trouble warning light 5 Intake air pressure sensor 6 TPS (throttle position sensor) 7 Intake air temperature sensor 8 Fuel injector 9 Fuel pump 0 Speed sensor A Crankshaft position sensor B Coolant temperature sensor C Spark plug D Ignition coil
1 2 3 4
56 7
6-1
FI
6-2
EAS27340
B
G B W R G B R W R G B R R W O O B R B G R/B B B L/W W/B B/R Gy/G W/R G/W Lg G/R R/L L/R Y/R O/W Y/W B/W L/B B R B B W R Y P Y/G G/Y Br/W L W Sb Gy Br Y/B Y/L Y/W B/L R/B O
C L M
B/L Gy R/B B (BLACK) R/B B Br B G
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
L/B L R/L R/B G/W R/B (GRAY) R/B R/L W G/R O/W L/B L
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
R R/B L/B Br O R G W G/R (BLACK) (BLACK) G/R W L R R (BLACK) R Br/B Br/B L/W L/B Sb L/B L/R B/Y Y/W Y/W G/Y B/L (GREEN) G/Y G/Y B/Y L/W Br L/W L/W R/B R/B L/W R/B R/B Br/B R/L Br/B R Br L/W Br/W Br/W R R R/B O/W Br L/B
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
B B Br L/B R/L B/Y L/R Sb B/Y L/B B
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
R/B B B B B Sb L/R R/L
L W B/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
R/L B B/W G/Y (GRAY) B B/W
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
Lg Y/R Y/B G/R W/B B/R Gy/G W/R Y/L
j
P P Br/R Br/R B L/R Br/B Br/R G W/B Br B P Br/R Y/B B Gy (BLACK) Br/B B/Y Br/R B L/G Br/R Br/R Br/R Br/R (BLACK) B/Y Br/R
6-3
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
R/Y Br/R Y/B Gy Br R/B L/B Lg
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
(BLACK) R/Y Y L/B Lg B (GRAY) Br R/B L/G L/R L/Y Sb (BLACK) Y L Y Y G B (BLACK) B G L Y L/R G/R Gy B (GRAY) G/R Gy B Br (LIGHT GRAY) (GRAY) L/R L/G Sb L/B (BLACK) L Y L Y R/Y B Lg L/B B L R/B R/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
Y L
Y/WB/Y
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
x r
Y G B G Y B B B B B Y G Y G B
FI
z r
]
Sb B/Y W/B L/Y Br Br/B B/R Br L/Y W/B B/R B Sb Br/B B/Y (GRAY)
B B
_ h a
G/R

1 Crankshaft position sensor 4 Main switch 6 Main fuse 8 Battery 9 Fuel injection system fuse H Fuel injection system relay K ECU (engine control unit) L Ignition coil M Spark plug N Fuel injector O Intake air temperature sensor P Coolant temperature sensor Q Speed sensor R TPS (throttle position sensor) S Intake air pressure sensor T Lean angle sensor W Multifunction meter X Engine trouble warning light c Fuel pump n Engine stop switch s Ignition fuse
FI
6-4
FI
ECU SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION The ECU is equipped with a self-diagnostic function in order to ensure that the fuel injection system is operating normally. If this function detects a malfunction in the system, it immediately operates the engine under substitute characteristics and illuminates the engine trouble warning light to alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred in the system. Once a malfunction has been detected, a fault code is stored in the memory of the ECU. To inform the rider that the fuel injection system is not functioning, the engine trouble 1 warning light flashes when the start switch is being pushed to start the engine. If a malfunction is detected in the system by the self-diagnostic function, the ECU provides an appropriate substitute characteristic operation, and alerts the rider of the detected malfunction by illuminating the engine trouble warning light. 1 Engine trouble warning light After the engine has been stopped, the lowest fault code number appears on the odometer/tripmeter LCD. Once a fault code has been displayed, it remains stored in the memory of the ECU until it is deleted. Engine trouble warning light indication and fuel injection system operation Warning light indication Flashing* ECU operation Warning provided when unable to start engine Fuel injection operation Operation stopped Operated with substitute characteristics in accordance with the description of the malfunction Vehicle operation
Cannot be operated
Remains on
Malfunction detected
Can or cannot be operated depending on the fault code
*The warning light flashes when any one of the conditions listed below is present and the start switch is pushed: 12: 30: Crankshaft position sensor Lean angle sensor (latch up detected) 41: 50: Lean angle sensor (open or short-circuit) ECU internal malfunction (memory check error)
6-5

EAS27380
FI
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE If the ECU detects an abnormal signal from a sensor while the vehicle is being driven, the ECU illuminates the engine trouble warning light and provides the engine with alternate operating instructions that are appropriate for the type of malfunction. When an abnormal signal is received from a sensor, the ECU processes the specified values that are programmed for each sensor in order to provide the engine with alternate operating instructions that enable the engine to continue to operate or stop operating, depending on the conditions. Self-diagnostic function table
Fault code No. 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 30 33 39 41 42 43 44 46 50 Item Crankshaft position sensor Intake air pressure sensor (open or short circuit) Intake air pressure sensor (hose line) Throttle position sensor (open or short circuit) Throttle position sensor Coolant temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor (open or short circuit) Lean angle sensor (latch up detected) Ignition coil (faulty ignition) Injector (open circuit) Lean angle sensor (open or short circuit) Speed sensor Fuel system voltage (monitoring voltage) Error in writing the amount of CO adjustment on EEPROM Vehicle system power supply (Monitoring voltage) ECU internal malfunction (memory check error) Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor. Intake air pressure sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor: hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected. Stuck throttle position sensor detected. Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. The vehicle has overturned. Malfunction detected in the primary wire of ignition coil. Injector: open circuit detected. Lean angle sensor: open or short circuit detected. No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. The ECU is unable to monitor the battery voltage (an open or short circuit in the line to the ECU). Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value). Power supply is not normal. Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter). Able / unable to start Unable Able Able Able Able Able Able Unable Unable Unable Unable Able Able Able Able Unable Able / unable to drive Unable Able Able Able Able Able Able Unable Unable Unable Unable Able Able Able Able Unable
Communication error with the meter

Fault code No. Er-1 Er-2 Er-3 Er-4 Item ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (input signal error) Symptom No signals are received from the ECU. No signals are received from the ECU within the specified duration. Data from the ECU cannot be received correctly. Non-registered data has been received from the meter. Able / unable to start Unable Unable Unable Unable Able / unable to drive Unable Unable Unable Unable
6-6

EAS00904
FI
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Engine operation is not normal or the engine trouble warning light is on. * Engine trouble warning light may not come on even if the engine operation is not normal.
The engine trouble warning light comes on.
The engine trouble warning light does not come on.
Check the fault code number displayed on the meter.
Identify the system with the malfunction. Refer to Self-diagnostic function table.
Check the operation of following sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. Refer to Sensor operation table and Actuator operation table. D01: Throttle position sensor (throttle angle) D30: Ignition coil D36: Fuel injector
Identify the probable cause of the malfunction. Refer to Diagnostic code table. OK Check and repair the probable cause of malfunction. Engine malfunction Fault code No. YES Check and repair. Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS. Monitor the operation of the sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. Refer to Sensor operation table and Actuator operation table. Fault code No. NO Check and repair. Refer to Self-diagnostic function table. NG
Defective sensor or actuator
Check and repair the inner parts of engine. Refer to Chapter 4.
Check and repair the corresponding sensor or actuator.
OK Check the engine condition.
NG
OK
Perform ECU reinstatement action. Refer to Reinstatement method in TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS. Fault code number displayed
Turn the main switch to OFF, turn the main switch back to ON, and then check if the fault code number is still displayed.
OK
No fault code number displayed Repairs completed
Erasing the malfunction history:* The malfunction history is stored even if the main switch is turned OFF. The malfunction history must be erased in the diagnostic mode. Refer to Sensor operation table and Actuator operation table (Diagnostic code No.D62). * Operated when the engine trouble warning light is on.
6-7

EAS00905
FI
DIAGNOSTIC MODE It is possible to monitor the sensor output data or check the activation of actuators without connecting the measurement equipment by simply switching the meter indication from the normal mode to the diagnostic monitoring mode.
SELECT
RESET
Setting the diagnostic mode 1. Turn the main switch to OFF and set the engine stop switch to OFF. 2. Disconnect the wire harness coupler from the fuel pump. 3. Simultaneously press and hold the SELECT and RESET buttons, turn the main switch to ON, and continue to press the buttons for 8 seconds or more. NOTE: All displays on the meter disappear. dIAG appears on the LCD meter. 4. Simultaneously press the SELECT and RESET buttons for 2 seconds or more to execute the selection. 5. Select the diagnostic code number that applies to the item that was verified with the fault code number by pressing the SELECT and RESET buttons. NOTE: The diagnostic code number appears on the LCD meter (01-70). To decrease the selected diagnostic code number, press the RESET button. Press the RESET button for 1 second or longer to automatically decrease the diagnostic code numbers. To increase the selected diagnostic code number, press the SELECT button. Press the SELECT button for 1 second or longer to automatically increase the diagnostic code numbers.
d01 d70
d70 d01
6-8
FI
6. Verify the operation of the sensor or actuator. Sensor operation The data representing the operating conditions of the sensor appears on the LCD meter. Actuator operation Set the engine stop switch to ON to operate the actuator. * If the engine stop switch is set to ON, set it to OFF, and then set it to ON again. 7. Turn the main switch to OFF to cancel the diagnostic mode. NOTE: To perform a reliable diagnosis, make sure to turn off the power supply before every check and then start right from the beginning.
6-9

Diagnostic code table
Fault code No. Symptom Probable cause of malfunction Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective crankshaft position sensor. Malfunction in pickup rotor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed sensor.
FI
Diagnostic code No.
12
No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
13
Intake air pressure sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor: hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected. Stuck throttle position sensor detected. Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective intake air pressure sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Intake air pressure sensor hose is detached, clogged, kinked, or pinched. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire sub lead. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective throttle position sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed throttle position sensor.
D03
14
D03
15
D01
16
Stuck throttle position sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective coolant temperature sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed coolant temperature sensor. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective intake air temperature sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed intake air temperature sensor.
D01
21
D06
22
Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. The vehicle has overturned.
D05
30
Overturned. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in ignition coil. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in a component of ignition cut-off circuit system.
D08
33
Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the ignition coil.
D30 D32
39
Open circuit detected in a injector. Lean angle sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Open or short circuit in wire harness. Improperly installed injector. Defective injector. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective lean angle sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open circuit in wire harness. Defective speed sensor. Malfunction in vehicle speed sensor detected. Malfunction in the engine side of the neutral switch. Malfunction in ECU.
D36
41
D08
42
No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. Power supply to the injector and fuel pump is not normal. Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value). Power supply to the fuel injection system is not normal. Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the LCD of the meter.)
D07
43 44 46
Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in ECU. (The CO adjustment value is not properly written on or read from the internal memory). Malfunction in the charging system. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM in chapter 9. Malfunction in ECU. (The program and data are not properly written on or read from the internal memory.)
D09 D60
50
6 - 10

Sensor operation table
Diagnostic code No. D01 Item Throttle angle Fully closed position Fully opened position Pressure difference (atmospheric pressure and intake air pressure) 15 ~ 20 95 ~ 100 Displays the intake air pressure. Meter display
FI
Checking method
Check with throttle fully closed. Check with throttle fully open. Set the engine stop switch to RUN, then operate the throttle while pushing the start switch. (If the display value changes, the performance is OK.) Compare the actually measured intake air temperature with the meter. Compare the actually measured coolant temperature with the meter. Check that the number increases when the rear wheel is rotated. The number is cumulative and does not reset each time the wheel is stopped. Remove the lean angle sensor and incline it more than 65 degrees. Set the engine stop switch to RUN, and then compare with the actually measured battery voltage. (If the battery voltage is lower, perform recharging.) Shift the transmission.
D03
D05 D06
Intake air temperature Coolant temperature Vehicle speed pulse
Displays the intake air temperature. Displays the coolant temperature. 0 ~ 999
D07 Lean angle sensor D08 Upright Overturned Fuel system voltage (battery voltage) D09 0.4 ~ 1.4 3.7 ~ 4.4 Approximately 12.0
Neutral switch D21 Neutral In gear EEPROM fault code display No history History exists Malfunction history code display No history History exists D61 00 Fault codes 12-50 (If more than one code number is detected, the display alternates every two seconds to show all the detected code numbers. When all code numbers are shown, the display repeats the same process.) 00 01 ON OFF
D60
Malfunction history code erasure D62 No history History exists 0 Up to 16 fault codes To erase the history, set the engine stop switch to OFF and then to RUN.
D70
Control number
00 ~ 255
6 - 11

Actuator operation table Actuator operation Set the engine stop switch to OFF and then to RUN.
Diagnostic code No. D30 Item Actuation Actuates the ignition coil five times in one-second intervals. The engine trouble warning light also flashes five times. Actuates the injector five times in one-second intervals. Actuates the fuel pump relay five times in one-second intervals. The engine trouble warning light also flashes five times. (The engine trouble warning light is OFF when the relay is ON, and the engine trouble warning light is ON when the relay is OFF). Actuates the radiator fan motor relay and illuminates the engine trouble warning light five cycles (5 seconds per cycle2 seconds ON, 3 seconds OFF). (ON 2 seconds, OFF 3 seconds)
FI
Checking method
Ignition coil
Check the spark five times. Connect an ignition checker. Check the operating sound of the injector five times.
D36
Injector
D50
Fuel pump relay
Check the operating sound of the fuel pump relay five times.
D51
Radiator fan motor relay
Check the operating sound of the radiator fan motor relay five times.
EAS00908
TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS This section describes the countermeasures per fault code number displayed on the meter. Check and service the items or components that are the probable cause of the malfunction following the order given. After the check and service of the malfunctioning part has been completed, reset the meter display according to the Reinstatement method. Fault code No.: Fault code number displayed on the meter when the engine failed to work normally. Refer to Diagnostic code table. Diagnostic code No.: Diagnostic code number to be used when the diagnostic mode is operated. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
6 - 12

Fault code No. 12
FI
Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor. Check or maintenance job Check for looseness or pinching. Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the crankshaft position sensor coupler and ECU coupler. (graygray) (black/blueblack/blue) Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in chapter 9. Reinstatement method Cranking the engine.
Diagnostic code No.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 2 Installed condition of crankshaft position sensor. Connections Crankshaft position sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in wire harness.
Defective crankshaft position sensor.
6 - 13

Fault code No. 13
FI
Symptom Intake air pressure sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between intake air pressure sensor coupler and ECU coupler (black/blueblack/blue) (pinkpink) (blueblue) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D03) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR PRESSURE SENSOR. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to ON.
Diagnostic code No. D03
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Intake air pressure sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Defective intake air pressure sensor.
6 - 14

Fault code No. 14
FI
Symptom Intake air pressure sensor: hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Intake air pressure sensor Check or maintenance job Check the intake air pressure sensor hose condition. Repair or replace the sensor hose. Check and repair the connection. Replace it if there is a malfunction. Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D03) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR PRESSURE SENSOR. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Intake air pressure sensor hose
Intake air pressure sensor malfunction at intermediate electrical potential. Connections Intake air pressure sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Defective intake air pressure sensor.
6 - 15

Fault code No. 15
FI
Symptom Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected. Throttle position sensor Check or maintenance job Reinstatement method
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Installed condition of throttle position sensor. Connections Throttle position sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Check for looseness or pinching. Turning the Check that the sensor is installed main switch to in the specified position. ON. Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between throttle position sensor coupler and ECU coupler (blueblue) (yellowyellow) (black/blueblack/blue) Check for open circuit and replace the throttle position sensor. (yellowblack/blue) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D01) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.
Throttle position sensor lead wire open circuit output voltage check.
Defective throttle position sensor.
6 - 16

Fault code No. 16 Symptom Stuck throttle position sensor detected. Throttle position sensor Check or maintenance job Check the installed area for looseness or pinching. Check that the throttle position sensor is installed in the specified position. Refer to CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR. Execute the diagnostic monitoring mode. (Code No.D01) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.
FI
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Installed condition of throttle position sensor.
Reinstatement method Reinstated by starting the engine, operating it at idle, and then racing it.
Defective throttle position sensor.
Fault code No.
21
Symptom Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Coolant temperature sensor Check or maintenance job Reinstatement method
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 2 Installed condition of coolant temperature sensor.
Connections Coolant temperature sensor couthat may have pulled out. pler Check the locking condition of Main wire harness-ECU coupler the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between coolant temperature sensor coupler and ECU coupler. (black/blueblack/blue) (green/yellowgreen/yellow)
Check the installed area for loose- Turning the ness or pinching. main switch to ON. Check the coupler for any pins
Defective coolant temperature sensor.
Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D06) Replace if defective. Refer to SIGNALING SYSTEM in chapter 9.
6 - 17

Fault code No. 22
FI
Symptom Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air temperature sensor Check or maintenance job Check for looseness or pinching. Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between intake air temperature sensor coupler and ECU coupler (brown/whitebrown/white) (black/blueblack/blue) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D05) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to ON.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 2 Installed condition of air temperature sensor. Connections Intake air temperature sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Defective air temperature sensor.
6 - 18

Fault code No. 30 Symptom The vehicle has overturned. Lean angle sensor Check or maintenance job Raise the vehicle upright. Check for looseness or pinching. Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D08) Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in chapter 9.
FI
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 2 3 The vehicle has overturned. Installed condition of the lean angle sensor. Connections Lean angle sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to ON (however, the engine cannot be restarted unless the main switch is first turned OFF).
Defective lean angle sensor.
6 - 19

Fault code No. 33
FI
Symptom Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the ignition coil. Ignition coil Check or maintenance job Check the connector and coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the connector and coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler or connector securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between ignition coil connector and ECU coupler. (orangeorange) Between ignition coil connector and left handlebar switch coupler. (red/blackred/black) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D30) Test the primary and secondary coils for continuity. Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in chapter 9. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Ignition coil connector (primary coil side) Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Defective ignition coil.
6 - 20

Fault code No. 39 Symptom Open circuit detected in a injector. Injector Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between injector coupler and ECU coupler. (red/bluered/blue) (red/blackred/black) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D36) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE FUEL INJECTOR.
FI
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Injector coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler Main wire harness fuel pump coupler
Reinstatement method Cranking the engine. (Connect the fuel injector coupler.)
Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or sub-wire harness 2.
Defective injector.
6 - 21

Fault code No. 41
FI
Symptom Lean angle sensor: open or short circuit detected. Lean angle sensor Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between lean angle sensor coupler and ECU coupler. (blueblue) (yellow/greenyellow/green) (black/blueblack/blue) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D08) Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in chapter 9. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to ON.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Lean angle sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in lead wire.
Defective lean angle switch.
6 - 22

Fault code No. 42
FI
Symptom No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. Speed sensor Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Reinstatement method Starting the engine, and activating the vehicle speed sensor by operating the vehicle at 20 to 30 km/h.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Speed sensor coupler Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in speed sen- Repair or replace if there is an sor lead. open or short circuit. Between speed sensor coupler and ECU coupler. (blueblue) (whitewhite) (black/blueblack/blue) Gear for detecting vehicle speed has broken. Defective speed sensor. Replace if defective. Refer to TRANSMISSION in chapter 4. Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D07) Replace if defective. Refer to SIGNALING SYSTEM in chapter 9.
6 - 23

Fault code No. 43
FI
Symptom Power supply to the injector and fuel pump is not normal. Fuel system voltage Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between fuel injection system relay coupler and ECU coupler. (blue/redblue/red) (red/bluered/blue) Between fuel injection system relay coupler and starter relay coupler. (brown/blackbrown/black) Between fuel injection system relay coupler and left handlebar switch coupler. (red/blackred/black) Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D09) Replace if defective. If there is no malfunction with the relay unit, replace the ECU. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Fuel injection system relay Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Open or short circuit in the wire harness.
Malfunction or open circuit in fuel pump relay.
Fault code No.
44
Symptom Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value). EEPROM improper cylinder indication Check or maintenance job Execute the diagnostic mode. (Code No.D60) 1. Check the faulty cylinder. Replace ECU if defective. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to ON.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Malfunction in ECU.
6 - 24

Fault code No. 46 Symptom Power supply is not normal. Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may be pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Replace or charge the battery. Refer to CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY in chapter 3. Replace if defective. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM in chapter 9. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between battery lead and main switch coupler (redred) Between main switch coupler and ignition fuse (brown/bluebrown/blue) Between ignition fuse and ECU coupler (brownbrown)
FI
Diagnostic code No.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Main wire harness-ECU coupler
Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Faulty battery.
Malfunction in rectifier/regulator
Fault code No.
50
Symptom Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter.) Check or maintenance job Replace the ECU. Reinstatement method
Diagnostic code No.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Malfunction in ECU.
Turning the main switch to NOTE: Do not perform this procedure with ON. the main switch turned to ON.
6 - 25

EAS28410
FI
CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Check: intake air pressure sensor output voltage Out of specification Replace. Intake air pressure sensor output voltage 3.00 ~ 4.00 V
a. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the intake air pressure sensor coupler as shown. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C Positive tester probe pink terminal 1 Negative tester probe black/blue terminal 2 b. Turn the main switch to ON. c. Measure the intake air pressure sensor output voltage.
CHECKING THE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove: intake air temperature sensor WARNING
_
Handle the intake air temperature sensor with special care. Never subject the intake air temperature sensor to strong shocks. If the intake air temperature sensor is dropped, replace it. 2. Check: intake air temperature sensor resistance Out of specification Replace. Intake air temperature sensor resistance 290 ~ 390 at 80 C (176 F)
6 - 26
FI
a. Connect the pocket tester ( 100) to the intake air temperature sensor terminal as shown.
Br/W B/L
Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C Positive tester probe brown/white 1 Negative tester probe black/blue 2
3 1
b. Immerse the air temperature sensor 1 in a container filled with water 2. NOTE: Make sure that the air temperature sensor terminals do not get wet.
c. Place a thermometer 3 in the water. d. Slowly heat the water, then let it cool down to the specified temperature. e. Measure the air temperature sensor resistance.
6 - 27
FUEL TANK FUEL TANK

3 4 5 9 6 5 New (4) 8 (6) 2
FI
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
11 7
12 1
10
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the fuel tank Rear fender
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Disconnect. Refer to REMOVING THE FUEL TANK and INSTALLING THE FUEL HOSE.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fuel tank side cover Fuel pump coupler Fuel hose connector holder Fuel hose Fuel tank breather hose Rollover valve Fuel tank overflow hose Fuel tank Fuel pump assembly Final drive case breather hose
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP and INSTALLING THE FUEL PUMP. Disconnect.
6 - 28
FUEL TANK
FI
3 4 5
(6) 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
9 6 5 New
(4) 8 11
12 1
10
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 11 12
Job/Part Fuel tank shield Damper
Qty 1 2
Remarks
6 - 29
FUEL TANK
FI
REMOVING THE FUEL TANK 1. Extract the fuel in the fuel tank through the fuel tank cap with a pump. 2. Remove: fuel hose connector holder fuel hose CAUTION: Be sure to disconnect the fuel hose by hand. Do not forcefully disconnect the hose with tools. Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank be careful when removing the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it. NOTE: When removing the fuel hose from the fuel pump, remove the fuel hose connector holder first, and next, insert a slotted head screwdriver etc. in the slot part a of the fuel hose connector cover 1, then slide it in the direction of the arrow, and remove the fuel hose. To remove the fuel hose from the throttle body, slide the fuel hose connector cover 2 on the end of the hose in direction of the arrow shown, press the two buttons 3 on the sides of the connector, and then remove the hose. Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed. 3. Remove: fuel tank NOTE: Do not set the fuel tank down on the installation surface of the fuel pump. Be sure to lean the fuel tank against a wall or like. REMOVING THE FUEL PUMP 1. Remove: fuel pump bracket fuel pump fuel pump gasket
6 - 30
FUEL TANK
CAUTION:
FI
Do not drop the fuel pump or give it a strong shock. Do not touch the base section of the fuel sender.
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP BODY 1. Check: fuel pump body Obstruction Clean. Cracks/damage Replace the fuel pump assembly.
CHECKING THE ROLLOVER VALVE 1. Check: rollover valve Damage/faulty Replace.
INSTALLING THE FUEL PUMP 1. Install: fuel pump gasket New fuel pump fuel pump bracket
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
NOTE: Do not damage the installation surface of the fuel tank when installing the fuel pump. Always use a new fuel pump gasket. Install the fuel pump in the direction shown in the illustration. Install the fuel pump bracket by aligning the projection a on the fuel pump with the projection on the fuel tank. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the proper tightening sequence as shown.
T.
R.
6 - 31
FUEL TANK
FI
INSTALLING THE FUEL HOSE 1. Install: fuel hose fuel hose connector holder 1 fuel pump coupler CAUTION: When installing the fuel hose, make sure that it is securely connected, and that the fuel hose holder is in the correct position, otherwise the fuel hose will not be properly installed. NOTE: Install the fuel hose connector holder 1 securely onto the fuel pump until a distinct click is heard, and then make sure that it does not come loose. To install the fuel hose onto the throttle body, slide the fuel hose connector cover 2 on the end of the hose in direction of the arrow shown.
6 - 32
THROTTLE BODY
EAS00909
FI
THROTTLE BODY
LS
New
10 1 2
12
11 13 3 9 9 6 5
3 Nm (0.3 m kg, 2.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the throttle body Air filter case Coolant
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Intake air pressure sensor coupler Throttle position sensor coupler Breather hose (air filter case to throttle body) Breather hose (air filter case to fast idle plunger unit) Fast idle plunger outlet hose Fast idle plunger inlet hose Throttle cable housing cover Throttle cable
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE COOLANT in chapter 3. Disconnect. Disconnect.
Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
6 - 33
THROTTLE BODY
FI
LS
New
10 1 2
12
11 13 3 9 9 6 5
3 Nm (0.3 m kg, 2.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 9 10 11
Job/Part Throttle body joint clamp screw Throttle body assembly Fuel hose
Qty 2 Loosen. 1 1
12 13
Fuel injector coupler Throttle body joint
1 1
Remarks Refer to INSTALLING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY. Disconnect. Refer to REMOVING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY and INSTALLING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY. Disconnect. Refer to INSTALLING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6 - 34
THROTTLE BODY
FI
6 4 New 3 5
New
1 2
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Job/Part Disassembling the throttle body assembly Intake air pressure sensor Intake air pressure sensor hose Throttle position sensor Injector fuel rail Fuel injector Fast idle plunger unit Throttle body
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CAUTION: The throttle body should not be disassembled. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
6 - 35
THROTTLE BODY
FI
REMOVING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY 1. Disconnect: fuel hose CAUTION: Be sure to disconnect the fuel hose by hand. Do not forcefully disconnect the hose with tools. Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank be careful when disconnecting the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it. NOTE: To disconnect the fuel hose from the throttle body, slide the fuel hose connector cover 1 on the end of the hose in direction of the arrow shown, press the two buttons 2 on the sides of the connector, and then disconnect the hose. Before disconnecting the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be disconnected.
EAS00912
CHECKING THE FUEL INJECTOR 1. Check: fuel injector Damage Replace.
EAS00913
CHECKING THE THROTTLE BODY 1. Check: throttle body Cracks/damage Replace the throttle body. 2. Check: fuel passages Obstructions Clean.
6 - 36
THROTTLE BODY
FI
a. Wash the throttle body in a petroleumbased solvent. Do not use any caustic carburetor cleaning solution. b. Blow out all of the passages with compressed air.
INSTALLING THE THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY 1. Install: throttle body joint 1 NOTE: Align the projection a on the cylinder head with the slot b in the throttle body joint.
2. Install: throttle body assembly 1
1 a b
NOTE: Align the projection a on the throttle body assembly with the slot b in the throttle body joint.
3. Connect: fuel hose CAUTION: When connecting the fuel hose, make sure that it is securely connected, and that the fuel hose connector cover is in the correct position, otherwise the fuel hose will not be properly connected. NOTE: To connect the fuel hose onto the throttle body, slide the fuel hose connector cover 1 on the end of the hose in direction of the arrow shown.
6 - 37
THROTTLE BODY
4. 5.
FI
6.
7.
Install: throttle cable Check: throttle position sensor Refer to CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR. Adjust: throttle lever free play Refer to ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE LEVER FREE PLAY in chapter 3. Adjust: engine idling speed Refer to ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED in chapter 3.
EAS00915
CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP AND PRESSURE REGULATOR OPERATION 1. Check: pressure regulator operation
a. Remove the rear fender. Refer to REAR CARRIER AND REAR FENDER in chapter 3. b. Remove the fuel hose connector holder. c. Disconnect the fuel hose 1 from the fuel pump. NOTE: When removing the fuel hose from the fuel pump, remove the fuel hose connector holder first, and next, insert a slotted head screw driver etc. in the slot part a of the fuel hose connector cover 2, then slide it in the direction of the arrow, and remove the fuel hose. Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed. d. Connect the pressure gauge 3 and adapter 4 to the fuel pump and fuel hose. Pressure gauge 90890-03153, YU-03153 Fuel pressure adapter 90890-03176, YM-03176
a 1
6 - 38
THROTTLE BODY
FI
e. Start the engine. f. Measure the fuel pressure. Fuel pressure 324 kPa (3.24 kg/cm2, 46.1 psi) Out of specification Replace the fuel pump.
EAS00916
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Check: throttle position sensor
a. Disconnect the throttle position sensor coupler from the throttle position sensor. b. Remove the throttle position sensor from the throttle body. c. Connect the pocket tester ( 1k) to the terminals of the throttle position sensor. Positive tester probe blue 1 Negative tester probe black/blue 2 d. Measure the maximum throttle position sensor resistance. Out of specification Replace the throttle position sensor. Maximum throttle position sensor resistance 4.0 ~ 6.0 k at 20 C (68 F) (blue-black/blue)
2. Adjust: throttle position sensor angle NOTE: Before adjusting the throttle position sensor, the engine idling speed should be properly adjusted.
_
a. Connect the throttle position sensor coupler to the throttle position sensor.
6 - 39
THROTTLE BODY
FI
b. Connect the digital circuit tester to the throttle position sensor coupler. Positive digital circuit tester probe yellow 1 Negative digital circuit tester probe black/blue 2 Digital circuit tester 90890-03174 Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer YU-A1927 c. Measure the throttle position sensor voltage. d. Adjust the throttle position sensor angle so that the voltage is within the specified range. Throttle position sensor voltage 0.63 ~ 0.73 V (yellow-black/blue) e. After adjusting the throttle position sensor angle, tighten the throttle position sensor screws 3.
L Y B/L
1 2
6 - 40
TROUBLESHOOTING
EBS00155
DRIV
DRIVE TRAIN
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following conditions may indicate damaged shaft drive components: Symptoms 1. A pronounced hesitation or jerky movement during acceleration, deceleration or sustained speed. (This must not be confused with engine surging or transmission characteristics.) 2. A rolling rumble noticeable at low speed; a high-pitched whine; a clunk from a shaft drive component or area. 3. A locked-up condition of the shaft drive train mechanism, no power transmitted from the engine to the front and/or rear wheel.
_
Possible Causes A. Bearing damage. B. Improper gear lash. C. Gear tooth damage. D. Broken drive shaft. E. Broken gear teeth. F. Seizure due to lack of lubrication. G. Small foreign objects lodged between the moving parts.
NOTE: Areas A, B, and C above may be extremely difficult to diagnose. The symptoms are quite subtle and difficult to distinguish from normal vehicle operating noise. If there is reason to believe these components are damaged, remove the components and check them.
EBS00156
CHECKING NOISES 1. Investigate any unusual noises.

a. A rolling rumble noise during coasting, acceleration, or deceleration. The noise increases with front and/or rear wheel speed, but it does not increase with higher engine or transmission speeds. Diagnosis: Possible wheel bearing damage. b. A whining noise that varies with acceleration and deceleration. Diagnosis: Possible incorrect reassembly, too-little gear lash. CAUTION:
_
Too little gear lash is extremely destructive to the gear teeth. If a test ride following reassembly indicates this condition, stop riding immediately to minimize gear damage.
7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
DRIV
c. A slight thunk evident at low speed operation. This noise must be distinguished from normal vehicle operation. Diagnosis: Possible broken gear teeth. WARNING
_
Stop riding immediately if broken gear teeth are suspected. This condition could result in the shaft drive assembly locking up, causing loss of control of the vehicle and possible injury to the rider.
2. Check: drained oil Drained oil shows large amounts of metal particles Check the bearing for seizure. NOTE: A small amount of metal particles in the oil is normal.
_
3. Check: oil leakage

a. Clean the entire vehicle thoroughly, then dry it. b. Apply a leak-localizing compound or dry powder spray to the shaft drive. c. Road test the vehicle for the distance necessary to locate the leak. Leakage Check the component housing, gasket, and/or seal for damage. Damage Replace the component. NOTE: An apparent oil leak on a new or nearly new vehicle may be the result of a rust preventative coating or excessive seal lubrication. Always clean the vehicle and recheck the suspected location of an apparent leakage.
_
7-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
EBS00157
DRIV
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART When basic condition a and b exist, check the following points: Elevate and spin both wheels. Feel for YES Replace the wheel bearing. (Refer to STEERING SYSTEM and REAR wheel bearing damage. KNUCKLES AND STABILIZER in chapter 8.) NO
Check the wheel nuts and hub nuts for tightness.
NO
Torque to specification. (Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS in chapter 8.)
YES
Check the front constant velocity joints. Feel for bearing damage.
NO
Constant velocity joint bearings and differential gear bearings are probably not damaged. Repeat the test or remove the individual components.
YES
Check the rear brake adjustment.
NO
Adjust per instructions. (Refer to ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE in chapter 3.)
YES
Check the rear constant velocity joints. Feel for bearing damage.
NO
Constant velocity joint bearings and final drive gear bearings are probably not damaged. Repeat the test or remove the individual components.
YES
Remove the drive shaft components.
7-3
FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND DIFFERENTIAL GEAR

EBS00158
DRIV
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
Order
T.
1
LS
R.
LT
New New 8 7 9 10
6 2
LT LT
LS LS LS
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
LS
Job/Part Removing the front constant velocity joints and differential gear Front engine skid plate/front fender
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Refer to STEERING SYSTEM in chapter 8. Refer to FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL in chapter 3.
Steering knuckles Front arms
Differential gear oil
1 2 3
Front constant velocity joint Differential gear motor coupler Differential gear case breather hose
2 1 1
7-4
DRIV
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
Order 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T.
1
LS
R.
LT
New New 8 7 9 10
6 2
LT LT
LS LS LS
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
LS
Job/Part Differential gear case assembly Front drive shaft Spring Damper Coupling gear Dust seal Dust seal
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
7-5

EBS00159
DRIV
Order
Job/Part Disassembling the front constant velocity joints Clip Boot band Boot band Dust boot Clip Double off-set joint Circlip Boot band Dust boot Off-set joint
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front constant velocity joints.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS.
7-6
DRIV
Order A B
Job/Part Clip Joint shaft
Qty 1 1
Remarks Refer to ASSEMBLING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
7-7

EBS00160
DRIV
3
24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
A B D C
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New (5) F
E
T.
LS
LT
62 Nm (6.2 m kg, 45 ft Ib)
R.
G
LS
New 0 7
11 Nm (1.1 m kg, 8.0 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New 1 5 2
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A
T.
R.
9 8
LS
New 6 New F New

LS
Job/Part Disassembling the differential gear case assembly Differential gear motor O-ring Front drive shaft coupling gear nut Front drive shaft coupling gear (differential gear case side) Differential gear case cover O-ring Differential gear assembly Differential drive pinion gear shim Bearing Bearing Oil seal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ASSEMBLING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEARS.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * 1 1 1
7-8
DRIV
3
24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
A B D C
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New (5) F
E
T.
LS
LT
62 Nm (6.2 m kg, 45 ft Ib)
R.
G
LS
New 0 7
11 Nm (1.1 m kg, 8.0 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New 1 5 2
Order B C D E F G
T.
R.
9 8
LS
New 6 New F New

LS
Job/Part Clip Differential drive pinion gear Bearing Bearing Oil seal Differential gear case
Qty 1 1 1 1 2 1
Remarks
7-9

EBS00163
DRIV
REMOVING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR ASSEMBLY 1. Remove: differential gear assembly 1 NOTE: The ring gear and the differential gear should be fastened together. Do not disassemble the differential gear.
_
CAUTION:
_
The differential gear are assembled into a proper unit at the factory by means of specialized equipment. Do not attempt to disassemble this unit. Disassembly will result in the malfunction of the unit.
EBS00165
CHECKING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS 1. Check: double off-set joint spline ball joint spline shaft spline Wear/damage Replace. 2. Check: dust boots Cracks/damage Replace. CAUTION:
_
Always use a new boot band. 3. Check: balls and ball races inner surface of double off-set joint Pitting/wear/damage Replace.
7 - 10

EBS00166
DRIV
CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEARS 1. Check: gear teeth Pitting/galling/wear Replace. bearing Pitting/damage Replace. oil seal O-ring Damage Replace. 2. Check: front drive shaft splines differential drive pinion gear splines Wear/damage Replace. spring Fatigue Replace. Move the spring up and down. 3. Check: front drive shaft Bends Replace. WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent shaft; this may dangerously weaken the shaft.
3V
CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR MOTOR 1. Check: differential gear motor

a. Connect two C size batteries to the gear motor terminals 1 (as shown in illustration). CAUTION: Be sure to check the motor operation after removing it from the differential gear case assembly. Do not use a 12 V battery to operate the pinion gear.
Check that the pinion gear 2 turns counterclockwise.
7 - 11
DRIV
Check that the pinion gear 2 turns clockwise.
3V
NOTE: Be sure not to disassemble the gear motor and remove the pinion gear.
2 1
EBS00167
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS 1. Apply: molybdenum disulfide grease (into the ball joint assembly) NOTE: Molybdenum disulfide grease is included in the repair kit.
_
2. Install: dust boots 1 boot bands 2, 3 New

a. Apply molybdenum disulfide grease into the dust boots. Molybdenum disulfide grease 40 g (1.4 oz) per dust boot (front wheel side) 55 g (1.9 oz) per dust boot (differential gear case side) b. Install the dust boots 1. c. Install the dust boot bands. NOTE: The new boot bands may differ from the original ones. The dust boots should be fastened with the boot bands 3 at the grooves in the joint shaft.
_
3. Check: thrust movement free play Excessive play Replace the joint assembly.
7 - 12

EBS01009
DRIV
ASSEMBLING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEARS 1. Measure: gear lash Refer to MEASURING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR LASH.
2. Install: differential gear motor a. Slide the shift fork sliding gear 1, which is installed to the differential gear, to the left to put it into the 2WD mode.
3V 3 4 5
b. Connect two C size batteries to the gear motor terminal 2 to operate the pinion gear 3, and operate it until the mark 4 on the gear is aligned with the mark 5 on the gear motor case. CAUTION:
_
Do not use a 12 V battery to operate the pinion gear. c. Insert 6 mm bolts 6 into the gear motor 7 and use them as a guide to set the motor on the differential gear assembly 8 so that the shift fork sliding gear 9 does not move. CAUTION:
_
6 7 9 8
6 6
If the position of the shift fork sliding gear is moved, the position of the differential gear and the indicator light display may differ, and the 2WD or differential lock mode may not be activated. d. Remove the 6 mm bolts, and then install the motor with the gear motor bolts. Differential gear motor bolt 11 Nm (1.1 m kg, 8.0 ft lb)
T.
R.
7 - 13
DRIV
3. Check: differential gear operation Unsmooth operation Replace the differential gear assembly. Insert the double off-set joint into the differential gear, and turn the gear back and forth.
EBS00174
MEASURING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR LASH 1. Secure the gear case in a vise or another supporting device. 2. Remove: drain plug gasket
3. Install: a bolt of the specified size 1 (into the drain plug hole) CAUTION:
_
Finger tighten the bolt until it holds the ring gear. Otherwise, the ring gear will be damaged. 4. Attach: gear lash measurement tool 2 dial gauge 3 Gear lash measurement tool 90890-01475 Middle drive gear lash tool YM-01475
a Measuring point is 22.5 mm (0.86 in)
7 - 14
DRIV
5. Measure: gear lash Gently rotate the coupling gear from engagement to engagement. Differential gear lash 0.05 ~ 0.25 mm (0.0020 ~ 0.0098 in) NOTE: Measure the gear lash at four positions. Rotate the shaft 90 each time.
_
EBS00176
ADJUSTING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR LASH 1. Remove: differential drive pinion gear shim(s) 1 differential gear assembly 2 2. Adjust: gear lash
a. Select the suitable shims using the following chart. Too little gear lash Too large gear lash Reduce shim thickness. Increase shim thickness.
Ring gear shim 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Thickness (mm)
7 - 15

EBS00177
DRIV
CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OPERATION 1. Block the rear wheels, and elevate the front wheels by placing a suitable stand under the frame. 2. Remove the wheel cap from the axle nut (right or left). 3. Measure the starting torque of the front wheel (i.e., differential gear preload) with the torque wrench. NOTE: Repeat this step several times to obtain an average figure. During this test, the other front wheel will turn in the opposite direction.
_
Front wheel starting torque (differential gear preload) New unit 17 ~ 25 Nm (1.7 ~ 2.5 m kg, 12 ~ 18 ft lb) Minimum 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
4. Out of specification Replace the differential gear assembly. 5. Within specification Install the new cotter pin and wheel cap.
T.
R.
7 - 16
REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND FINAL DRIVE GEAR

EBS00178
DRIV
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
LS LS
6 5
10 9 New
8 New
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)

LS LS
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the rear constant velocity joints and final drive gear Rear engine skid plate/rear fender
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Refer to REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES in chapter 8. Drain. Refer to CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL in chapter 3.
Rear arms
Final gear oil
1 2 3 4 5
Rear constant velocity joint Final gear case breather hose Trailer hitch Final gear case assembly Rear drive shaft
2 1 1 1 1
Disconnect.
7 - 17
DRIV
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
LS LS
6 5
10 9 New
8 New
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)

LS LS
T.
R.
Order 6 7 8 9 10
Job/Part Spring Damper Coupling gear Dust seal Dust seal
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
7 - 18

EBS01011
DRIV
Order
Job/Part Disassembling the rear constant velocity joints Clip Boot band Boot band Dust boot Clip Double off-set joint Circlip Boot band Dust boot Off-set joint
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear constant velocity joints.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS.
7 - 19
DRIV
Order A B
Job/Part Clip Joint shaft
Qty 1 1
Remarks Refer to ASSEMBLING THE REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
7 - 20

EBS00179
DRIV
L Q R
1 New
G
New M K I J
P
LS
T.
T.
R.
T.
R.
(4)
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
R.
E New New 4 F
LT LS
LS
New H
0
LS
2 4 G New
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
9 7 3
D C B A
G
6 New
T.
R.
8 New 5
(11)
LS
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
1 2 3
Job/Part Disassembling the final gear case assembly Final drive pinion gear assembly Final drive pinion gear shim Final gear case cover
Qty
1 * 1
NOTE: Working in a crisscross pattern, loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn. After all the bolts are loosened, remove them.
_
4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Dowel pin Gasket Oil seal Bearing Bearing Wheel gear shim Wheel gear
2 1 1 1 1 * 1
7 - 21
DRIV
L Q R
1 New
G
New M K I J
P
LS
T.
T.
R.
T.
R.
(4)
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
R.
E New New 4 F
LT LS
LS
New H
0
LS
2 4 G New
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
9 7 3
D C B A
G
6 New
T.
R.
8 New 5
(11)
LS
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
Job/Part Thrust washer Pinion gear Final driven pinion gear Final driven pinion gear shim Oil seal Bearing Bearing Final gear case Rear drive shaft coupling gear nut Washer Rear drive shaft coupling gear (final gear case side) Final drive pinion gear Oil seal Bearing
Qty * 1 1 * 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
Refer to DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY and ASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY.
7 - 22
DRIV
L Q R
1 New
G
New M K I J
P
LS
T.
T.
R.
T.
R.
(4)
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
R.
E New New 4 F
LT LS
LS
New H
0
LS
2 4 G New
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
9 7 3
D C B A
G
6 New
T.
R.
8 New 5
(11)
LS
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order O P Q R
Qty Expander 1 Washer 1 Bearing 1 Final drive pinion gear bearing housing 1
Job/Part
Remarks Refer to DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY and ASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
7 - 23

EBS00167
DRIV
ASSEMBLING THE REAR CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS 1. Apply: molybdenum disulfide grease (into the ball joint assembly) NOTE: Molybdenum disulfide grease is included in the repair kit.
_
2. Install: dust boots 1 boot bands 2, 3 New

a. Apply molybdenum disulfide grease into the dust boots. Molybdenum disulfide grease 40 g (1.4 oz) per dust boot (rear wheel side) 60 g (2.1 oz) per dust boot (final gear case side) b. Install the dust boots 1. c. Install the dust boot bands. NOTE: The new boot bands may differ from the original ones. The dust boots should be fastened with the boot bands 3 at the grooves in the joint shaft.
_
3. Check: thrust movement free play Excessive play Replace the joint assembly.
7 - 24
DRIV
DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY 1. Loosen: rear drive shaft coupling gear (final gear side) nut 1 NOTE: Secure the final drive pinion gear teeth in the vise with a clean rag.
EBS00184
POSITIONING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR AND RING GEAR When the final drive pinion gear, wheel gear, final gear case and/or final driven pinion gear are replaced, be sure to adjust the positions of the final drive pinion gear, wheel gear and final driven pinion gear using the shim(s).
EBS00185
1 A
ADJUSTING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR BACKLASH 1. Select: final drive pinion gear shim(s) 1
a. To find the final drive pinion gear shim thickness A, use the following formula.
c b a d
Final drive pinion gear shim thickness A = a + (c b) d a = 55 mm (2.2 in). b = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the final drive pinion gear either added to or subtracted from 22.2. c = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the final drive pinion gear bearing housing either added to or subtracted from 67.8. d = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the final gear case either added to or subtracted from 100. Example: 1) a = 55 2) If 02 is stamped on the final drive pinion gear, b = 22.2 0.02 = 22.18
7 - 25
DRIV
3) If 05 is stamped on the final drive pinion gear bearing housing, c = 67.8 0.05 = 67.75 NOTE: After replacing any part in the final drive pinion gear assembly, the overall length of the assembly will change. Therefore, be sure to measure distance c to select the correct final drive pinion gear shim thickness. 4) If 01 is stamped on the final gear case, d = 100 0.01 = 99.99 5) Therefore, A is 0.58 A = 55 + (67.75 22.18) 99.99 = 0.58 6) Round off the hundredth digit and select the appropriate shim(s). In the example above, the calculated number is 0.58. The chart instructs you to round off 8 to 10 at the hundredth place. Thus, the shim thickness is 0.60 mm (0.024 in). Hundredths Rounded value 0 5 10
0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9
Shims are supplied in the following thicknesses. Final drive pinion gear shim Thickness (mm) 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
7 - 26

EBS00186
DRIV
e f g
ADJUSTING THE FINAL DRIVEN PINION GEAR BACKLASH 1. Select: final driven pinion gear shim(s) 1, 2
a. To find the final driven pinion gear shim thickness B, use the following formula. Final driven pinion gear shim thickness B = h (e f + g) e = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the final gear case either added to or subtracted from 71.6. f = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the outside of the final driven pinion gear either added to or subtracted from 51.0. g = a numeral (usually a decimal number) on the outside of the final driven pinion gear either added to or subtracted from 24.0. h = 49.8 Example: 1) If 03 is stamped on the final gear case, e = 71.6 0.03 = 71.57 2) If 12 is stamped on the outside of the final driven pinion gear, f = 51.0 0.12 = 50.88 3) If 05 is stamped on the outside of the final driven pinion gear, g = 24.0 0.05 = 23.95 4) h = 49.8 5) Therefore, shim thickness B is 5.16 B = 49.8 (71.57 50.88 + 23.95) = 5.16
1 2
7 - 27
DRIV
6) Round off the hundredth digit and select the appropriate shim(s). In the example above, the calculated number is 5.16. The chart instructs you to round off 6 to 5 at the hundredth place. Thus, the shim thickness is 5.15 mm. Hundredths 0, 1, 2 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9 Rounded value 0 5 10
Shims are supplied in the following thicknesses. Final driven pinion gear shim 1 Thickness (mm) 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
Final driven pinion gear shim 2 Thickness (mm) 4.5 4.8 5.1 5.4
NOTE: Be sure to use one of each of the final driven pinion gear shims 1 and 2 to obtain the shim thickness.
7 - 28

EBS00187
DRIV
MEASURING THE FINAL DRIVEN PINION GEAR THRUST WASHER CLEARANCE 1. Measure: final driven pinion gear thrust washer clearance C a. Place four pieces of Plastigauge between the originally fitted thrust washer and the final driven pinion gear assembly. b. Install the final driven pinion gear assembly and final driven pinion gear shim(s), and then tighten the bolts to specification. Final gear case cover bolt 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
NOTE: Do not turn the drive pinion gear, wheel gear, and driven pinion gear when measuring the clearance with Plastigauge.
_
c. Remove the final driven pinion gear assembly. d. Measure the thrust clearance. Calculate the width of the flattened Plastigauge 1. Final driven pinion gear thrust clearance 0.08 ~ 0.12 mm (0.0031 ~ 0.0047 in) e. If out of specification, select the correct washer.
T.
R.
2. Select: final driven pinion gear thrust washer

a. Select a suitable thrust washer using the following chart. Thrust washer Thickness (mm) 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
b. Repeat the measurement steps until the final driven pinion gear thrust clearance is within the specified limits.
7 - 29

EBS00187
DRIV
MEASURING THE WHEEL GEAR THRUST CLEARANCE 1. Measure: wheel gear thrust clearance D a. Place four pieces of Plastigauge between the originally fitted wheel gear shim(s) and the wheel gear. b. Install the wheel gear and tighten the bolts to specification. Final gear case cover bolt 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
NOTE: Do not turn the drive pinion gear, wheel gear, and driven pinion gear when measuring the clearance with Plastigauge.
_
c. Remove the wheel gear. d. Measure the thrust clearance. Calculate the width of the flattened Plastigauge 1. Wheel gear thrust clearance 0.03 ~ 0.07 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) e. If out of specification, select the correct shim(s).
2. Select: wheel gear thrust clearance D

a. Select a suitable wheel gear shim(s) using the following chart. Wheel gear shim Thickness (mm) 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
b. Repeat the measurement steps until the wheel gear thrust clearance is within the specified limits.
T.
R.
7 - 30

EBS00191
DRIV
CHECKING THE REAR DRIVE SHAFT 1. Check: rear drive shaft splines coupling gear splines Wear/damage Replace.
EBS00192
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 1. Check: final gear case final gear case cover Cracks/damage Replace. NOTE: When the final gear case and/or the final gear case cover are replaced, be sure to adjust the shim thickness of the final drive pinion gear, final driven pinion gear and/or wheel gear.
_
2. Check: gear teeth Pitting/galling/wear Replace the drive pinion gear and ring gear as a set. oil seals O-rings Damage Replace. 3. Check: bearings Damage Replace. NOTE: Reusing roller bearings is acceptable, but Yamaha recommends installing new ones. Do not reuse the oil seal. When the final drive pinion gear, final driven pinion gear and/or wheel gear are replaced, be sure to adjust the shim thickness of the final drive pinion gear, final driven pinion gear and/or wheel gear.
_
7 - 31

EBS00193
DRIV
MEASUREMENT THE FINAL GEAR LASH 1. Secure the gear case in a vise or another supporting device. 2. Remove: drain plug gasket
3. Install: a bolt of the specified size 1 (into the drain plug hole) CAUTION:
_
Finger tighten the bolt until it holds the ring gear. Otherwise, the ring gear will be damaged.
1 3
4. Attach: final gear backlash band 2 dial gauge 3 Final gear backlash band 90890-01511
a Measuring point is 31.5 mm (1.24 in)
5. Measure: gear lash Gently rotate the coupling gear from engagement to engagement. Final gear lash 0.10 ~ 0.20 mm (0.0039 ~ 0.0079 in) NOTE: When measuring the gear lash, be sure the right side (gear oil level check bolt side) of the final gear case assembly is facing downward. Measure the gear lash at four positions. Rotate the shaft 90 each time.
_
7 - 32

EBS00194
DRIV
1 2 3 4
ADJUSTING THE FINAL GEAR LASH 1. Remove: final driven pinion gear assembly 1 final driven pinion gear shim 2 final driven pinion gear shim 3 thrust washer 4 2. Adjust: gear lash
a. Select a suitable shim(s) and thrust washer using the following chart. Too little gear lash Too large gear lash Increase shim thickness. Reduce shim thickness.
b. If increased by more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in): Reduce the thrust washer thickness by 0.2 mm (0.008 in) for every 0.2 mm (0.008 in) of final driven pinion gear shim increase. c. If reduced by more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in): Increase the thrust washer thickness by 0.2 mm (0.008 in) for every 0.2 mm (0.008 in) that the final driven pinion gear shim is decreased. Final driven pinion gear shim 2 Thickness (mm) 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
Final driven pinion gear shim 3 Thickness (mm) 4.5 4.8 5.1 5.4
NOTE: Be sure to use one of each of the final driven pinion gear shims 2 and 3 to obtain the shim thickness.
7 - 33

Thrust washer Thickness (mm)
DRIV
0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
ASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR ASSEMBLY 1. Tighten: rear drive shaft coupling gear nut (final gear side) 1
LT
NOTE: Secure the final drive pinion gear teeth in the vise with a clean rag.
a. Tighten the nut to 80 Nm (8.0 m kg, 58 ft lb). b. Secure the final drive pinion gear bearing housing in a vice, and then turn the nut with a torque wrench to check the starting torque. Final drive pinion gear starting torque (final drive pinion gear preload) 0.8 ~ 1.3 Nm (0.08 ~ 0.13 m kg)
c. Out of specification Tighten the nut further. d. Repeat step (b). e. Repeat steps (c) and (d) until the starting torque is within specification. NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the specified starting torque. If the specified starting torque is exceeded, replace the expander with a new one and reassemble the final drive pinion gear assembly. Make sure that the distance a is 67.5 ~ 68.1 mm (2.66 ~ 2.68 in) as shown.
T.
R.
7 - 34
DRIV
ASSEMBLING THE FINAL GEAR CASE 1. Install: oil seals 1
Installed depth of oil seal a 5.5 mm (0.22 in)
7 - 35
FRONT AND REAR WHEELS

EBS00378
CHAS
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEELS
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib) 260 Nm (26.0 m kg, 190 ft lb)
T.
R.
LT LT
T.
R.
1 2
6 4
3 New
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
Order
T.
R.
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Job/Part Removing the front wheels
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front wheels. Place the vehicle on a level surface. WARNING
_
Securely support the vehicle so there is no danger of it falling over. 1 2 3 Front wheel Wheel cap Front wheel axle nut 1 1 1 Refer to INSTALLING THE WHEELS. Refer to INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUBS.
8-1
CHAS
T.
R.
LT LT
T.
R.
1 2
6 4
3 New
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
Order 4
T.
R.
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Job/Part Front brake caliper assembly
Qty Remarks 1 NOTE: Do not squeeze the front brake lever when the brake caliper is off of the brake disc as the brake pads will be forced shut.
_
5 6
Front wheel hub Front brake disc
1 1
Refer to INSTALLING THE BRAKE DISCS. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8-2

EBS00379
CHAS
REAR WHEELS
T.
R.
T.
LT LT
R.
1 2
6 4
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
3 New
R.
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the rear wheels
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear wheels. Place the vehicle on a level surface. WARNING
_
Securely support the vehicle so there is no danger of it falling over. 1 2 3 Rear wheel Wheel cap Rear wheel axle nut 1 1 1 Refer to INSTALLING THE WHEELS. Refer to INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUBS.
8-3
CHAS
T.
R.
T.
LT LT
R.
1 2
6 4
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
3 New
R.
55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 4
Job/Part Rear brake caliper assembly
Qty Remarks 1 NOTE: Do not squeeze the rear brake lever and brake pedal when the brake caliper is off of the brake disc as the brake pads will be forced shut. 1 1 Refer to INSTALLING THE BRAKE DISCS. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5 6
Rear wheel hub Rear brake disc
8-4

EBS00383
CHAS
CHECKING THE WHEELS 1. Check: wheels 2. Measure: wheel runout Over the specified limit Replace the wheel or check the wheel bearing play 1. Wheel runout limit Front Radial 2: 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Lateral 3: 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Rear Radial 2: 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Lateral 3: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
3. Check: wheel balance Out of balance Adjust. WARNING

_
After replacing the tire, ride conservatively to allow the tire to be properly seated in the rim. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in vehicle damage and possible operator injury.
EBS00385
2 1
CHECKING THE WHEEL HUBS 1. Check: wheel hubs 1 Cracks/damage Replace. splines (wheel hub) 2 Wear/damage Replace the wheel hub.
8-5

EBS00389
CHAS
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS 1. Check: brake discs Galling/damage Replace. 2. Measure: brake disc deflection Out of specification Check the wheel runout. Brake disc maximum deflection Front: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Rear: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) brake disc thickness a Out of specification Replace. Brake disc minimum thickness Front: 3.0 mm (0.12 in) Rear: 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
INSTALLING THE BRAKE DISCS 1. Install: brake discs Brake disc bolt 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) LOCTITE
NOTE: Install the brake discs with their spot-faced side facing the bolt heads.
INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUBS 1. Install: wheel axle nut New

260 Nm (26.0 m kg, 190 ft lb)
NOTE: Do not apply oil to the seat of the nut. After tightening the nut, stake the collar of the nut into the notch of the shaft.
T.
R.
T.
R.
8-6

EBS00392
CHAS
INSTALLING THE WHEELS 1. Install: wheels NOTE: The arrow mark 1 on the tire must point in the direction of rotation of the wheel.
_
2. Tighten: wheel nuts 1

55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft lb)
T.
R.
WARNING Tapered wheel nuts 1 are used for both the front and rear wheels. Install each nut with its tapered side towards the wheel.
8-7
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES

EBS00400
CHAS

FRONT BRAKE PADS
5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft Ib)
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
3 2
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the front brake pads
Qty
1 2 3 4 5
Front wheel Front brake caliper bolt Brake pad holding bolt plug Brake pad holding bolt Front brake pad Brake pad spring
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front brake calipers. Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS.
2 1 1 2 1
Refer to REPLACING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE PADS.
8-8

EBS00401
CHAS
REAR BRAKE PADS

5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft Ib)
T.
R.
2
T.
R.
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the rear brake pads
Qty
1 2 3 4 5
Rear wheel Rear brake caliper bolt Brake pad holding bolt plug Brake pad holding bolt Rear brake pad Brake pad spring
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear brake calipers. Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS.
2 1 1 2 1
Refer to REPLACING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE PADS.
8-9

EBS00402
CHAS
CAUTION:
_
Disc brake components rarely require disassembly. DO NOT: disassemble components unless absolutely necessary; use solvents on internal brake components; use spent brake fluid for cleaning; (use only clean brake fluid) allow brake fluid to come in contact with the eyes, as this may cause eye injury; splash brake fluid onto painted surfaces or plastic parts, as this may cause damage; disconnect any hydraulic connection, as this would require the entire brake system to be disassembled, drained, cleaned, properly filled and bled after reassembly.
EBS00404
REPLACING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE PADS NOTE: It is not necessary to disassemble the brake calipers and brake hoses to replace the brake pads.
_
1. Remove: brake pads Brake pad wear limit a Front: 1.0 mm (0.04 in) Rear: 1.0 mm (0.04 in) NOTE: Replace the brake pads as a set if either is found to be worn to the wear limit.
_
8 - 10

2. Install: brake pad spring brake pads
CHAS
1 2
NOTE: Always install new brake pads and brake pad spring as a set.
_
a. Connect a suitable hose 1 tightly to the brake caliper bleed screw 2. Put the other end of this hose into an open container. b. Loosen the brake caliper bleed screw and, using a finger, push the caliper piston into the brake caliper. c. Tighten the brake caliper bleed screw. Brake caliper bleed screw 5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft lb)
d. Install new brake pads and a new brake pad spring. e. Install the holding bolt, holding bolt plug and brake caliper. Brake pad holding bolt 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb) Brake caliper bolt 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
3. Check: brake fluid level Refer to CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL in chapter 3. 4. Check: brake lever operation Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake system. Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM in chapter 3.
T.
R.
T.
R.
8 - 11

EBS00407
CHAS
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1 11 2 3 12 7 New
T.
* Apply silicone grease.
R.
6 9
5 4
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
10
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
T.
R.
R.
Order
1 2 3 4 5
Job/Part Removing the front brake master cylinder Brake fluid On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch Brake fluid reservoir cap Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm holder Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm Front brake lever cover Brake lever
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Drain. Refer to HANDLEBAR.
1 1 1 1 1
8 - 12
CHAS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1 11 2 3 12 7 New
T.
R.
6 9
5 4
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
10
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
T.
R.
R.
Order 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Job/Part Union bolt Copper washer Front brake hose Front brake light switch connector Front brake light switch Front brake master cylinder holder Front brake master cylinder
Qty Remarks 1 2 1 Disconnect. Refer to INSTALLING 2 Disconnect. THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8 - 13

EBS00409
CHAS
3 New 2 New 1
Order
1 2 3
Job/Part Disassembling the front brake master cylinder Dust boot Circlip Brake master cylinder kit
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1 1 1
8 - 14

EBS00410
CHAS
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1 14 2 3 15 New 10
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
R.
9 12

11
T
7
LS
13
6 5
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
8 New
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
.
R.
LS

T.
Order
R.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job/Part Qty Remarks Removing the rear brake master cylRemove the parts in the order listed. inder Brake fluid Drain. Brake fluid reservoir cap 1 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm holder 1 Brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 1 Rear brake lever cover 1 Shift control cable 1 Disconnect. Rear brake cable 1 Disconnect. Brake lever 1 Brake lever bracket 1
8 - 15
CHAS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1 14 2 3 15 New 10
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
T.
R.
9 12

11
T
7
LS
13
6 5
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft Ib)
8 New
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
.
R.
LS

T.
Order 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
R.
Job/Part Union bolt Copper washer Rear brake hose Rear brake light switch connector Rear brake light switch Rear brake master cylinder holder Rear brake master cylinder
Qty Remarks 1 2 1 Disconnect. Refer to INSTALLING 2 Disconnect. THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8 - 16

EBS00411
CHAS
3 New 2 New 1
Order
1 2 3
Job/Part Disassembling the rear brake master cylinder Dust boot Circlip Brake master cylinder kit
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1 1 1
8 - 17

EBS00413
CHAS
CHECKING THE MASTER CYLINDERS 1. Check: brake master cylinder Wear/scratches Replace the brake master cylinder assembly. brake master cylinder body Cracks/damage Replace. brake fluid delivery passage (brake master cylinder body) Blockage Blow out with compressed air. 2. Check: brake master cylinder kit Scratches/wear/damage Replace as a set. 3. Check: brake master cylinder reservoir brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm Cracks/damage Replace.
EBS00415
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS WARNING

_
All internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with new brake fluid only before installation. Recommended brake fluid DOT 4 Whenever a master cylinder is disassembled, replace the piston seals and dust seals.
8 - 18

EBS00418
CHAS
2 1
Low er
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 1. Install: brake master cylinder 1 brake master cylinder holder 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
UP
R.
NOTE: Align the end of the brake master cylinder holder with the punch mark a on the handlebar. The UP mark b on the brake master cylinder holder should face up.
_
2.
_
Install: brake hose copper washers New 27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft lb) union bolt
T.
60
NOTE: Tighten the union bolt while holding the brake hose as shown. Turn the handlebar to the left and to the right to check that the brake hose does not touch other parts (throttle cable, wire harness, leads, etc.). Correct if necessary. WARNING
_
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe vehicle operation. Refer to CABLE ROUTING in chapter 2.
R.
8 - 19

3. Fill: brake fluid reservoir
CHAS
Recommended brake fluid DOT 4 CAUTION:

_
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled brake fluid immediately. WARNING
_
Use only the designated quality brake fluid: other brake fluids may deteriorate the rubber seals, causing leakage and poor brake performance. Refill with the same type of brake fluid: mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful reaction and lead to poor brake performance. Be careful that water does not enter the brake master cylinder when refilling. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake fluid and may result in vapor lock. 4. Air bleed: brake system Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM in chapter 3. 5. Check: brake fluid level Brake fluid level is under the LOWER level line Fill up. Refer to CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL in chapter 3.
8 - 20

EBS00418
CHAS
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 1. Install: brake master cylinder 1 brake master cylinder holder 2
UP
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
_
T.
R.
2.
_
Install: brake hose copper washers New 27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft lb) union bolt
T.
60
NOTE: Tighten the union bolt while holding the brake hose as shown. Turn the handlebar to the left and to the right to check that the brake hose does not touch other parts (throttle cable, wire harness, leads, etc.). Correct if necessary. WARNING
_
R.
8 - 21

3. Fill: brake fluid reservoir
CHAS
Recommended brake fluid DOT 4 CAUTION:

_
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled brake fluid immediately. WARNING
_
Use only the designated quality brake fluid: other brake fluids may deteriorate the rubber seals, causing leakage and poor brake performance. Refill with the same type of brake fluid: mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction and lead to poor brake performance. Be careful that water does not enter the brake master cylinder when refilling. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake fluid and may result in vapor lock. 4. Air bleed: brake system Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM in chapter 3. 5. Check: brake fluid level Brake fluid level is under the LOWER level line Fill up. Refer to CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL in chapter 3. 6. Check: brake pedal free play Refer to ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE in chapter 3. 7. Check: select lever movement Refer to ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER CONTROL CABLE AND SHIFT ROD in chapter 3.
8 - 22

EBS00421
CHAS
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
T.
R.
3 6
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
T.
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
R.
2 New
T.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the front brake calipers
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Brake fluid Front wheel Union bolt Copper washer Front brake hose Brake pad holding bolt plug Brake pad holding bolt Front brake caliper bolt Front brake caliper assembly
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front brake calipers. Drain. Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS.
1 2 1 1 1 2 1
Disconnect. Loosen.
Refer to INSTALLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS.
8 - 23

EBS00423
CHAS
5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft Ib)
T.
R.
8 3
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
Order
T.
5 6 New 7 New
R.
Job/Part Disassembling the front brake calipers Brake pad holding bolt Front brake pad Brake pad spring Front brake caliper bracket Caliper piston Dust seal Caliper piston seal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front brake calipers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS and ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Bleed screw
8 - 24

EBS00424
CHAS
REAR BRAKE CALIPERS
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
4 3
27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft Ib)
T.
R.
1 2 New
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
T.
R.
Job/Part Removing the rear brake calipers
Qty
Brake fluid Rear wheel Union bolt Copper washer Rear brake hose Brake pad holding bolt plug Brake pad holding bolt Rear brake caliper bolt Rear brake caliper assembly
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear brake calipers. Drain. Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS.
1 2 1 1 1 2 1
Disconnect. Loosen.
8 - 25

EBS00425
CHAS
5 Nm (0.5 m kg, 3.6 ft Ib)
T.
R.
8 1 3
17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New 7 New 6 5 4
Order
Job/Part Disassembling the rear brake calipers Brake pad holding bolt Rear brake pad Brake pad spring Rear brake caliper bracket Caliper piston Dust seal Caliper piston seal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear brake calipers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS and ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Bleed screw
8 - 26
EBS00427
CHAS
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS 1. Remove: brake caliper piston 1 dust seal 2 caliper piston seal 3
3 1
Front Rear
a. Blow compressed air into the hose joint opening a to force out the caliper piston from the brake caliper body. WARNING
_
3 1 2
Never try to pry out the caliper piston. Cover the caliper piston with a rag. Be careful not to get injured when the piston is expelled from the caliper cylinder. b. Remove the dust seal and the caliper piston seal.
EBS00429
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS Recommended brake component replacement schedule: Brake pads Piston seals, dust seals Brake hoses Brake fluid As required Every two years Every four years Replace when brakes are disassembled.
8 - 27

WARNING
_
CHAS
All internal brake components should be cleaned in new brake fluid only. Do not use solvents as they will cause seals to swell and distort.
2 1
1. Check: brake caliper piston 1 Scratches/rust/wear Replace the brake caliper assembly. brake caliper cylinder 2 Wear/scratches Replace the brake caliper assembly. brake caliper body 3 Cracks/damage Replace. brake fluid delivery passage (brake caliper body) Blockage Blow out with compressed air. WARNING
_
2 1
Replace the caliper piston seal and dust seal whenever the brake caliper is disassembled.
Front Rear
EBS00431
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS WARNING

_
All internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with new brake fluid only before installation. Recommended brake fluid DOT 4 Replace the caliper piston seal whenever a brake caliper is disassembled. 1. Install: caliper piston seal 1 New dust seal 2 New
1 New 2 New
8 - 28

2. Install: brake caliper piston 1
CHAS
1 2 a
EBS00434
INSTALLING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS 1. Install: brake caliper assembly brake caliper bolts 1
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 New 4
brake hose 2 copper washers 3 New 27 Nm (2.7 m kg, 19 ft lb) union bolt 4
T.
R.
CAUTION:
_
2 4 New 3 1 1
When installing the brake hose on the brake caliper, make sure that the brake pipe touches the projection a on the brake caliper. WARNING
_
Front Rear
2. Fill: brake master cylinder reservoir Recommended brake fluid DOT 4 CAUTION:
_
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled brake fluid immediately.
8 - 29

WARNING
_
CHAS
Use only the designated quality brake fluid: other brake fluids may deteriorate the rubber seals, causing leakage and poor brake performance. Refill with the same type of brake fluid: mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction and lead to poor brake performance. Be careful that water does not enter the master cylinder when refilling. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake fluid and may result in vapor lock. 3. Air bleed: brake system Refer to BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM in chapter 3. 4. Check: brake fluid level Brake fluid level is below the LOWER level line Add the recommended brake fluid to the proper level. Refer to CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL in chapter 3.
8 - 30
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00444
CHAS
STEERING SYSTEM
HANDLEBAR
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
15 15 8 9
T.
R.
6 14 7
11
12
16
13 14
10 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Job/Part Removing the handlebar Handlebar cover Plastic band On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch Throttle lever assembly holder Throttle lever assembly Front brake light switch connector Front brake master cylinder holder Front brake master cylinder Rear brake light switch connector
Qty 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Refer to INSTALLING THE THROTTLE LEVER ASSEMBLY. Disconnect. Refer to INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. Disconnect.
8 - 31
STEERING SYSTEM
CHAS
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft Ib)
15 15 8 9
T.
R.
6 14 7
11
12
16
13 14
10 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Order 10 11 12 13 14
Job/Part Rear brake master cylinder holder Rear brake master cylinder Spacer Left handlebar switch Handlebar grip
15 16
Handlebar holder Handlebar
Qty Remarks 1 1 Refer to INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. 1 1 2 Refer to REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS and INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS. 2 Refer to INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR. 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8 - 32
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00447
CHAS
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS 1. Remove: handlebar grips 1 NOTE: Blow compressed air between the handlebar and handlebar grip, and gradually push the grip off the handlebar.
_
EBS00448
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR 1. Check: handlebar Bends/cracks/damage Replace. WARNING

_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent handlebar as this may dangerously weaken the handlebar.
EBS00449
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR 1. Install: handlebar handlebar holders

20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
NOTE: Install the handlebar within 15 from the horizontal line shown in the illustration. The upper handlebar holders should be installed with the punched mark 1 forward 2.
_
T.
R.
CAUTION:
_
First tighten the bolts 3 on the front side of the handlebar holders, and then tighten the bolts 4 on the rear side.
8 - 33
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00450
CHAS
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR GRIPS 1. Install: handlebar grip 1 NOTE: Before applying adhesive, wipe off grease or oil on the handlebar surface a with a lacquer thinner. Install the handlebar grips to the handlebar so that arrow mark L faces up on the left handlebar grip and the arrow mark R faces up on the right handlebar.
_
EBS00453
UP
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 1. Install: left handlebar switch spacer rear brake master cylinder 1 rear brake master cylinder holder 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
b
_
T.
R.
8 - 34
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00453
CHAS
2 1
Low er
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 1. Install: front brake master cylinder 1 front brake master cylinder holder 2
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
UP
R.
_
INSTALLING THE THROTTLE LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Install: throttle lever assembly 1 throttle lever assembly holder NOTE: Align the projection a on the throttle lever assembly with the end of the brake master cylinder holder b.
8 - 35
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00454
CHAS
STEERING STEM
10
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
LS
T.
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)

LS
5 New 3 20
T.
R.
R.
New 1
LT LT LS
5 New
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
LT LT
T.
13
R.
125 Nm (12.5 m kg, 90 ft lb)
Order
T.
R.
T.
12 11 17 18 16
14 15
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
R.
15 (4)
New 6
LT
6 9
T.
7
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
R.
19
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
210 Nm (21.0 m kg, 150 ft lb)
T.
R.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R.
Job/Part Removing the steering stem Front fender
Qty
Air filter case Handlebar Electrical components tray Lock washer Cable guide Steering stem bushing Collar Oil seal Tie rod end nut Tie rod 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE SKID PLATES, SEAT, CARRIERS AND FENDERS in chapter 3. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in chapter 3. Refer to HANDLEBAR. Refer to ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS TRAY in chapter 3.
Refer to INSTALLING THE STEERING STEM.
Disconnect.
8 - 36
STEERING SYSTEM
CHAS
10
23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft Ib)
LS
T.
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)

LS
5 New 3 20
T.
R.
R.
New 1
LT LT LS
5 New
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
LT LT
T.
13
R.
125 Nm (12.5 m kg, 90 ft lb)
Order 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
T.
R.
T.
12 11 17 18 16
14 15
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
R.
15 (4)
New 6
LT
6 9
T.
7
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
R.
19
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
210 Nm (21.0 m kg, 150 ft lb)
T.
R.
R.
Job/Part Pitman arm nut Pitman arm Steering stem Collar Bearing nut Collar Steering stem bearing Steering stem joint bolt Steering stem joint EPS breather hose EPS motor cover EPS unit Steering stem bracket
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Refer to INSTALLING THE PITMAN ARM.
Refer to INSTALLING THE STEERING STEM.
Refer to INSTALLING THE STEERING STEM. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8 - 37
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00456
CHAS
CHECKING THE STEERING STEM 1. Check: steering stem Bends Replace. WARNING
_
Do not attempt to straighten a bent stem; this may dangerously weaken the stem. 2. Check: oil seals steering stem bushings Wear/damage Replace. 3. Check: steering stem joint Cracks/damage Replace.
3 0 9 8 9 7 B G
INSTALLING THE STEERING STEM 1. Install: EPS unit 1 washers EPS unit bolts 2 EPS unit bolt 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) LOCTITE
H 5 6 D E 2 (4) 1
7
T.
H 4
2. 3.
Install: steering stem 3 steering stem bearing 4 collar 5 bearing nut 6

125 Nm (12.5 m kg, 90 ft lb)
Install: oil seals 7 New collars 8 steering stem bushings 9 cable guide 0 lock washer A New steering stem bracket B steering stem bolts C (temporarily tighten)
NOTE: Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the oil seals and steering stem bushings.
R.
T.
R.
8 - 38
STEERING SYSTEM
b a d c
4.
CHAS
Install: collar D steering stem joint E steering stem joint bolts F (temporarily tighten)
NOTE: Apply LOCTITE to the steering stem joint bolts. Align the spline a on the steering stem with the groove b in the steering stem joint. Align the punch mark c on the EPS unit with the groove d in the steering stem joint. 5. Tighten: steering stem bracket bolts G
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb)
NOTE: Apply LOCTITE to the steering stem bracket bolts. steering stem bearing bolts H
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft lb)
NOTE: Apply LOCTITE to the steering stem bearing bolts. steering stem joint bolts F
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
T.
6. Tighten: steering stem bolts C

23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
NOTE: Bend the lock washer tab e along a flat side of the bolt. Pass the cable and hoses through the cable guide. Refer to CABLE ROUTING in chapter 2.
T.
R.
T.
R. R.
T.
R.
8 - 39
STEERING SYSTEM
1
CHAS
INSTALLING THE PITMAN ARM 1. Install: pitman arm 1 washer pitman arm nut
210 Nm (21.0 m kg, 150 ft lb)
T.
R.
clip NOTE: Align the punch mark b on the EPS unit with the groove a in the pitman arm.
8 - 40
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00460
CHAS
TIE-RODS AND STEERING KNUCKLES

25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New
LS
6
T.
New
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
R.
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
T.
11 New 10 New 5 9 New 7 1
R.
Job/Part Removing the tie-rods and steering knuckles Front wheel/brake disc Brake disc guard Front arm protector Tie-rod Nut Nut Steering knuckle Circlip Rubber boot Ball joint
T.
R.
New
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New
8
LS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the tie-rods and steering knuckles. Refer to FRONT WHEELS.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Refer to INSTALLING THE TIE-RODS.
Refer to REMOVING THE STEERING KNUCKLES.
8 - 41
STEERING SYSTEM
CHAS
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New
LS
6
T.
New
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
R.
Order 10 11
T.
11 New 10 New 5 9 New 7 1
R.
Circlip Bearing
T.
R.
New
25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft Ib)
T.
R.
New
8
LS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Job/Part
Qty 1 1
Remarks
8 - 42
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00461
CHAS
REMOVING THE STEERING KNUCKLES 1. Remove: steering knuckle 1 NOTE: Use a general puller to separate the ball joint 2 from the steering knuckle 1 or the front lower arm 3.
_
EBS00462
CHECKING THE TIE-RODS 1. Check: tie-rod free play and movement Free play Replace the tie-rod end. Turns roughly Replace the tie-rod end. 2. Check: tie-rod Bends/damage Replace.
EBS00463
CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLES 1. Check: steering knuckle Damage/pitting Replace.
2. Check: ball joints Damage/pitting Replace the ball joint. Free play Replace the ball joint. Turns roughly Replace the ball joint.
a. Clean the outside of the steering knuckle. b. Remove the clip 1, circlip 2 and rubber boot 3.
8 - 43
STEERING SYSTEM
c. Remove the ball joint.
CHAS
NOTE: Use a remover attachment 3 to separate the ball joint 1 from the steering knuckle 2.
d. Measure the ball joint bore inside diameter a. Out of specification Replace the steering knuckle. Ball joint bore inside diameter 32.00 ~ 32.05 mm (1.260 ~ 1.280 in) e. Install the new ball joint. Use the ball joint remover/installer set. Ball joint remover 90890-01474, YM-01474 Ball joint remover attachment set 90890-01480 Ball joint adapter set YM-01480 Ball joint remover short shaft set 90890-01514 3 4 5 6 7 8 Remover attachment Installer spacer Installer washer Base Body Ball joint remover short shaft set 90890-01474 YM-01474 90890-01480 YM-01480 90890-01474 YM-01474 90890-01480 YM-01480 90890-01480 YM-01480 90890-01514
8 - 44
STEERING SYSTEM
213 4 5
CHAS
f. Attach the ball joint remover/installer, new ball joint (with rubber boot and retaining ring) 1, installer spacer 6 and installer washer 2 to the steering knuckle 3. NOTE: Do not tap or damage the top of the ball joint.
g. Hold the body 4 in place while turning in the bolt 5 to install the new ball joint 1 into the steering knuckle 3. h. Remove the ball joint remover/installer. i. Install a new ball joint. NOTE: Always use a new ball joint set.
3. Check: front wheel bearing 1 Bearings allow play in the wheel hubs or the wheel turns roughly Replace.
a. Clean the outside of the steering knuckle. b. Remove the circlip 2. c. Drive out the bearing. WARNING
_
Eye protection is recommended when using striking tools. d. Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the outer side of the bearing. e. Install the new bearing. CAUTION:
_
Do not strike the center race or balls of the bearing. Should be made only with the outer race. f. Install the new circlip.
8 - 45
STEERING SYSTEM
EBS00465
CHAS
INSTALLING THE TIE-RODS 1. Install: tie-rods (left and right)

25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
NOTE: The tie-rod side which must be installed on the out side has grooves 1.
_
2. Adjust: toe-in Refer to ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN in chapter 3.
T.
R.
8 - 46
FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES

EBS00468
CHAS

45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
6
T.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
13 9 13
T.
R.
R.
3 8
LS
8 8
3 14
16 New 10 New 15
10 10
LS
10
12 5 12 6 17 New 1
6 2
17
T.
R.
.R .
11
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
4 New

T.
T.
R.
R.
R.
Order
Job/Part Removing the front arms and front shock absorber assemblies
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Front wheel/brake disc Front brake caliper assembly Brake disc guard Front arm protector Front brake hose holder Nut Nut Nut/bolt Front shock absorber assembly Nut/bolt Front upper arm
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the front arms and front shock absorber assemblies. Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS. Refer to FRONT AND REAR BRAKES.
1 1 2 1 1 2/2 1 2/2 1
Refer to REMOVING THE FRONT ARMS and INSTALLING THE FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS.
8 - 47
CHAS
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
6
T.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
13 9 13
T.
R.
R.
3 8
LS
8 8
3 14
16 New 10 New 15
10 10
LS
10
12 5 12 6 17 New 1
6 2
17
T.
R.
.R .
11
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
4 New

T.
T.
R.
R.
R.
Order 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Job/Part Nut/bolt Front lower arm Dust cover Bushing Circlip Rubber boot Ball joint Bushing
Qty 2/2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2
Remarks
Refer to REMOVING THE FRONT ARMS and INSTALLING THE FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS.
8 - 48

EBS00469
CHAS
REMOVING THE FRONT ARMS 1. Check: front arm free play
a. Check the front arm side play by moving it from side to side. If side play is noticeable, check the bushings. b. Check the front arm vertical movement by moving it up and down. If the vertical movement is tight or rough, or if there is binding, check the bushings.
2. Remove: front arms
EBS00470
CHECKING THE FRONT ARMS 1. Check: front arms Bends/damage Replace. 2. Check: bushings Wear/damage Replace.
3. Check: ball joint Damage/pitting Replace the ball joint. Free play Replace the ball joint. Turns roughly Replace the ball joint.
a. Clean the outside of the front upper arm. b. Remove the circlip 1, boot retaining ring 2 and rubber boot 3. Use the ball joint remover and installer set.
8 - 49
CHAS
Ball joint remover 90890-01474, YM-01474 Ball joint remover attachment set 90890-01480 Ball joint adapter set YM-01480 4 5 6 Body Long bolt Base Remover attachment Installer spacer Installer washer 90890-01474 YM-01474 90890-01480 YM-01480 90890-01474 YM-01474 90890-01480 YM-01480 90890-01474 YM-01474
5 4 7 0 A 6
7 8 9
c. Install the body 4, long bolt 5, base 6 and attachment 7 onto ball joint. d. Hold the body 4 in place while turning in the long bolt 5 to remove the ball joint 0 from the front upper arm A. e. Remove the ball joint remover. f. Attach the assembled ball joint remover/ installer, new ball joint (with rubber boot and retaining ring) B, installer spacer 8 and installer washer 9 to the front upper arm A. NOTE: Do not tap or damage the top of the ball joint. Installer washer 9 must be aligned with the projection on the head of the ball joint B.
_
g. Remove the ball joint remover. h. Install a new circlip. NOTE: Always use a new ball joint set.
_
8 - 50

EBS00471
CHAS
CHECKING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS 1. Check: shock absorber assembly Oil leaks Replace the shock absorber assembly. spring Fatigue Replace the shock absorber assembly. Move the spring up and down.
EBS00475
INSTALLING THE FRONT ARMS AND FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS 1. Install: front arms front shock absorber
67 5
a. Install the front upper arm 1 and front lower arm 2. NOTE: Lubricate the bolts 3 with lithium-soapbased grease. Be sure to position the bolts 3 so that the bolt head faces forward. Temporarily tighten the nuts 4.
_
1 34 8
b. Install the front shock absorber 5 and bolts 6. Nut 7 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb)
67 2 9
c. Install the steering knuckle. Nut 8 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) Nut 9 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
d. Install the new cotter pins. e. Tighten the nuts 4. Nut 4 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
8 - 51
REAR KNUCKLES AND STABILIZER

EBS01023
CHAS

50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
12
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
R.
T.
13
12
11 13
4 5 11
LS
14
LS
.
7
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
3 7 8 10
LS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
Order
R.
T.
7 New 9 1 2 6
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
T.
R.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Job/Part Qty Remarks Removing the rear knuckles and staRemove the parts in the order listed. bilizer The following procedure applies to both of the rear knuckles. Rear wheel hubs Refer to FRONT AND REAR WHEELS. Brake disc guard 1 Plate 1 Rear arm protector 1 Rear brake hose protector 1 Rear brake hose holder 1 Rear knuckle 1 Spacer cover 4 Spacer 2 Circlip 1 Bearing 1 Stabilizer joint 2
T.
R.
8 - 52
CHAS
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
12
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
R.
T.
13
12
11 13
4 5 11
LS
14
LS
.
7
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
3 7 8 10
LS
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
Order 12 13 14
R.
T.
7 New 9 1 2 6
50 Nm (5.0 m kg, 36 ft Ib)
T.
R.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
T.
R.
Job/Part Stabilizer holder Bushing Stabilizer
Qty 2 2 1
Remarks
8 - 53

EBS01024
CHAS
CHECKING THE REAR KNUCKLES 1. Check: rear knuckle Damage/pitting Replace. 2. Check: rear wheel bearing 1 Bearing allow play in the wheel hub or the wheel turns roughly Replace.
a. Clean the outside of the rear knuckle. b. Remove the circlip 2. c. Drive out the bearing.
2
_
WARNING Eye protection is recommended when using striking tools. d. Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the outer side of the bearing. e. Install the new bearing. CAUTION:
_
Do not strike the center race or balls of the bearing. Should be made only with the outer race. f. Install the new circlip.
EBS01025
CHECKING THE STABILIZER 1. Check: stabilizer Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
8 - 54
REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES

EBS00476
CHAS
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
2 4
LS
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
7 4 7 6 4 10 1 10 7 7
LS
5
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
T.
R.
10
9 10
Order
T.
R.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
Job/Part Removing the rear arms and rear shock absorber assemblies
Rear knuckle/stabilizer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Rear brake hose guide Nut/washer/bolt Rear shock absorber assembly Nut/bolt Rear upper arm Dust cover Nut/bolt Rear lower arm Dust cover 2 2/1/2 1 2/2 1 1 2/2 1 2
T.
R.
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. The following procedure applies to both of the rear arms and rear shock absorber assemblies. Refer to REAR KNUCKLES AND STABILIZER.
Refer to INSTALLING THE REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES.
8 - 55
CHAS
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
2 4
LS
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
7 4 7 6 4 10 1 10 7 7
LS
5
7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft Ib)
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
T.
R.
10
9 10
Order 10
T.
R.
45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft Ib)
Job/Part Bushing
T.
R.
Qty 4
Remarks Refer to INSTALLING THE REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
8 - 56
CHAS
CHECKING THE REAR ARMS 1. Check: rear arms Bends/damage Replace. 2. Check: bushings Wear/damage Replace.
EBS00478
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES 1. Check: shock absorber assemblies Oil leaks Replace the shock absorber assembly. spring Fatigue Replace the shock absorber assemblies. Move the spring up and down.
8 - 57

EBS01027
CHAS
67
INSTALLING THE REAR ARMS AND REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLIES 1. Install: rear arms rear shock absorber assemblies a. Install the rear upper arm 1 and rear lower arm 2.
1 8
34
NOTE: Lubricate the bolts 3 with lithium-soapbased grease. Be sure to position the bolts 3 so that the bolt head faces outward. Temporarily tighten the nuts 4.
_
67 8 2
b. Install the rear shock absorber assembly 5 and bolts 6. Nut 7 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb)
c. Install the rear knuckle. Nut 8 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb)
d. Tighten the nuts 4. Nut 4 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
8 - 58
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EBS00500
ELEC
ELECTRICAL
1 Four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 2 Rear brake relay 3 Four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 4 Four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 5 Headlight relay 6 Fuel injection system fuse 7 Starter relay 8 EPS fuse 9 Main fuse 0 Fuse box (ignition, headlights, four-wheel-drive motor, radiator fan motor, signaling system, auxiliary DC jack) A Radiator fan motor circuit breaker B Rectifier/regulator
5 6
7 0 8 9
C F
9-1
C Reverse switch D Gear position switch E Auxiliary DC jack F Main switch G Differential gear motor H EPS motor I EPS torque sensor J Radiator fan motor
ELEC
5 6
7 0 8 9
C F
9-2
1 Lean angle sensor 2 Radiator fan motor relay 3 Fuel injection system relay 4 Starting circuit cut-off relay 5 Front brake light switch 6 Rear brake light switch 7 Intake air temperature sensor 8 Intake air pressure sensor 9 TPS (throttle position sensor) 0 Fuel pump A Speed sensor
ELEC
B Crankshaft position sensor C Coolant temperature sensor D Ignition coil E Battery F ECU (engine control unit) G EPS (electric power steering) control unit
8 G
9 F
E 0
D A
9-3
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY

EBS01028
ELEC
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY

Check each switch for continuity with the pocket tester. If the continuity reading is incorrect, check the wiring connections and if necessary, replace the switch. CAUTION:
_
Never insert the tester probes into the coupler terminal slots 1. Always insert the probes from the opposite end of the coupler, taking care not to loosen or damage the leads. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C NOTE: Before checking for continuity, set the pocket tester to 0 and to the 1 range. When checking for continuity, switch back and forth between the switch positions a few times.
_
The terminal connections for switches (e.g., main switch, engine stop switch) are shown in an illustration similar to the one on the left. The switch positions a are shown in the far left column and the switch lead colors b are shown in the top row in the switch illustration. NOTE: indicates a continuity of electricity between switch terminals (i.e., a closed circuit at the respective switch position).
_
The example illustration on the left shows that: There is continuity between red and brown/ blue when the switch is set to ON.
9-4
CHECKING THE SWITCHES

EBS01029
ELEC

Check each switch for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals. Refer to CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY. Damage/wear Repair or replace. Improperly connected Properly connect. Incorrect continuity reading Replace the switch.
A
Br/Y
0
Br/Y
1
R Br/L ON OFF R Br/L (GRAY)
2
R/Y L OFF Y
Y/W
3
R/W R/B R/Y Y L L/B Lg B
4
L/B B R/B R/W (GRAY)
5
Lg OFF PUSH B
6
L/B L/G L/R Sb Br Gy G/R B 2WD 4WD LOCK
9 7 8
G/W
L G/R Gy B Br L/R L/G Sb L/B (BLACK)
Gy W
(LIGHT GRAY)
9-5

1 Main switch 2 Light switch 3 Engine stop switch 4 Start switch 5 Override switch 6 On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch 7 Four-wheel-drive motor switch 8 Gear position switch 9 Reverse switch 0 Rear brake light switch A Front brake light switch
ELEC
9-6
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS

EBS01030
ELEC

Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals. Damage/wear Repair or replace the bulb, bulb socket or both. Improperly connected Properly connect. No continuity Repair or replace the bulb, bulb socket or both.
TYPES OF BULBS The bulbs used on this vehicle are shown in the illustration on the left. Bulbs a and b are used for the headlights and usually use a bulb holder that must be detached before removing the bulb. The majority of these types of bulbs can be removed from their respective socket by turning them counterclockwise. Bulbs c is used for turn signal and tail/ brake lights and can be removed from the socket by pushing and turning the bulb counterclockwise. Bulbs d and e are used for meter and indicator lights and can be removed from their respective socket by carefully pulling them out.
9-7
ELEC
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULBS The following procedure applies to all of the bulbs. 1. Remove: bulb WARNING
_
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot, keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb until it has cooled down. CAUTION:
_
Be sure to hold the socket firmly when removing the bulb. Never pull the lead, otherwise it may be pulled out of the terminal in the coupler. Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise the transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb, and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
2. Check: bulb (for continuity) (with the pocket tester) No continuity Replace. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C NOTE: Before checking for continuity, set the pocket tester to 0 and to the 1 range.
_
9-8
ELEC
a. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal 1 and the negative tester probe to terminal 2, and check the continuity. b. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal 1 and the negative tester probe to terminal 3, and check the continuity. c. If either of the readings indicate no continuity, replace the bulb.
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB SOCKETS The following procedure applies to all of the bulb sockets. 1. Check: bulb socket (for continuity) (with the pocket tester) No continuity Replace. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C NOTE: Check each bulb socket for continuity in the same manner as described in the bulb section; however, note the following.
_
a. Install a good bulb into the bulb socket. b. Connect the pocket tester probes to the respective leads of the bulb socket. c. Check the bulb socket for continuity. If any of the readings indicate no continuity, replace the bulb socket.
9-9
EBS00503
B
C L M
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
IGNITION SYSTEM
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
9 - 10
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
IGNITION SYSTEM
Y L
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
B B Y G B G Y B B B B Y G Y G B
r
Br L/Y W/B B/R B Sb Br/B B/Y (GRAY)
Sb B/Y W/B L/Y Br Br/B B/R
_ h
B
ELEC
a
G/R
1 Crankshaft position sensor y 4 Main switch 6 Main fuse 8 Battery K ECU (engine control unit) x z L Ignition coil M Spark plug T Lean angle sensor n Engine stop switch s Ignition fuse
IGNITION SYSTEM
EBS01045 EBS01043
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING The ignition system fails to operate (no spark or intermittent spark). Check: 1. main and ignition fuses 2. battery 3. spark plug 4. ignition spark gap 5. spark plug cap resistance 6. ignition coil resistance 7. main switch 8. engine stop switch 9. crankshaft position sensor resistance 10.lean angle sensor 11.wiring connections (of the entire ignition system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. right side panel 4. V-belt cooling duct 2 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
1. Main and ignition fuses Check the main and ignition fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main and ignition fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s).
EBS01044
2. Battery Check the condition of the battery. Refer to CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY in chapter 3. Minimum open-circuit voltage 12.8 V or more at 20 C (68 F) Is the battery OK? YES NO Clean the battery terminals. Recharge or replace the battery.
Ignition checker 90890-06754 Opama pet-4000 spark checker YM-34487 Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C
9 - 11
IGNITION SYSTEM
EBS01032 EBS01034
ELEC
3. Spark plug Check the condition of the spark plug. Check the spark plug type. Measure the spark plug gap. Refer to CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG in chapter 3. Standard spark plug CR8E (NGK) Spark plug gap 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in) Is the spark plug in good condition, is it of the correct type, and is its gap within specification? YES NO Re-gap or replace the spark plug.
4. Ignition spark gap Disconnect the spark plug cap from the spark plug. Connect the ignition checker 1 as shown.
2 Spark plug cap
Set the main switch to ON. Measure the ignition spark gap a. Crank the engine by pushing the start switch and gradually increase the spark gap until a misfire occurs.
Minimum ignition spark gap 6.0 mm (0.24 in) Is there a spark and is the spark gap within specification? NO YES The ignition system is OK.
9 - 12
IGNITION SYSTEM
EBS01036 EBS01038
ELEC
5. Spark plug cap resistance Remove the spark plug cap from the spark plug lead. Connect the pocket tester ( 1k) to the spark plug cap as shown. Measure the spark plug cap resistance.
6. Ignition coil resistance Disconnect the ignition coil connectors from the ignition coil terminals. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the ignition coil as shown. Positive tester probe red/black lead terminal 1 Negative tester probe orange lead terminal 2
Spark plug cap resistance 10.0 k at 20 C (68 F) Is the spark plug cap OK? Measure the primary coil resistance. YES Replace the plug cap. NO spark Primary coil resistance 3.4 ~ 4.6 at 20 C (68 F) Connect the pocket tester ( 1k) to the ignition coil as shown. Positive tester probe red/black lead terminal 1 Negative tester probe spark plug lead 2
Measure the secondary coil resistance. Secondary coil resistance 10.4 ~ 15.6 k at 20 C (68 F) Is the ignition coil OK? YES NO Replace the ignition coil.
9 - 13
IGNITION SYSTEM
EBS01041 EBS01040
ELEC
7. Main switch Check the main switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the main switch OK? YES Replace switch.
EBS01042
9. Crankshaft position sensor resistance Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor coupler from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 100) to the crankshaft position sensor coupler as shown. Positive tester probe green/yellow 1 Negative tester probe black 2
NO the main
8. Engine stop switch Check the engine stop switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the engine stop switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch.
G/ Y B
Measure the crankshaft position sensor resistance. Crankshaft position sensor resistance 459 ~ 561 at 20 C (68 F) Is the crankshaft position sensor OK? YES NO Replace the crankshaft position sensor/ stator assembly.
9 - 14
IGNITION SYSTEM
10.Lean angle sensor Remove the lean angle sensor. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the lean angle sensor coupler as shown. Positive tester probe yellow/green 1 Negative tester probe black/blue 2
EBS01047
ELEC
11.Wiring Check the entire ignition systems wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the ignition systems wiring properly connected and without defects? YES NO Properly connect or repair the ignition systems wiring.
65
65
Replace the ECU.
UP
L Y/G B/L
Set the main switch to ON. Turn the lean angle sensor to 65. Measure the lean angle sensor output voltage. Lean angle sensor voltage Less than 65 5 3.55 ~ 4.45 V More than 65 5 0.65 ~ 1.35 V Is the lean angle sensor OK? YES NO Replace the angle sensor. lean
9 - 15
EBS00506
B
C L M
B/L Gy R/B R B (BLACK) R/B B Br B G
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
9 - 16
k e
L/G B L/R B
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
Y L
Y/WB/Y
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
x r
z r
B B
ELEC
G/R
[ 4 Main switch \ 6 Main fuse ] 8 Battery _ 0 Starter relay a A Starter motor F Diode 1 G Starting circuit cut-off relay
I Diode 2 U Gear position switch n Engine stop switch o Start switch s Ignition fuse t Signaling system fuse v Rear brake light switch z Rear brake relay

EBS00507
ELEC
D 1 2 C 3
STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION The starting circuit on this model consists of the starter motor, starter relay, starting circuit cut-off relay, rear brake light switch, rear brake relay and gear position switch. If the main switch is on and the engine stop switch is in the RUN position, the starter motor can be operated only if: The transmission is in neutral (the neutral switch circuit of the gear position switch is closed). or The transmission is in park (the park switch circuit of the gear position switch is closed). or You pull in the rear brake lever or push down on the brake pedal (the rear brake light switch circuit is closed). The starting circuit cut-off relay prevents the starter from operating when the select lever is in gear or in reverse and the rear brake lever and brake pedal is free. In this instance, the starting circuit cut-off relay is off so that current cannot reach the starter motor.
1 Battery 2 Main fuse 3 Main switch 4 Ignition fuse 5 Engine stop switch 6 Signaling system fuse 7 Rear brake light switch 8 Rear brake relay 9 Diode 2 0 Gear position switch A Starting circuit cut-off relay B Start switch C Diode 1 D Starter relay E Starter motor
6 7
4 5 A B
8 9 0
9 - 17

EBS01048 EBS01044
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING The starter motor fails to turn. Check: 1. main, ignition and signaling system fuses 2. battery 3. starter motor 4. starting circuit cut-off relay 5. starter relay 6. Rear brake relay 7. Diode 2 8. main switch 9. engine stop switch 10.start switch 11.rear brake light switch 12.gear position switch 13.wiring connections (of the entire starting system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. side covers Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
EBS01051
3. Starter motor Connect the positive battery terminal 1 and starter motor lead 2 with a jumper lead 3.
Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C

EBS01043
_
WARNING A wire that is used as a jumper lead must have at least the same capacity or more as that of the battery lead, otherwise the jumper lead may burn. This check is likely to produce sparks, therefore make sure nothing flammable is in the vicinity. Does the starter motor turn? YES Replace the fuse(s). Repair or replace the starter motor. NO
1. Main, ignition and signaling system fuses Check the main, ignition and signaling system fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main, ignition and signaling system fuses OK? YES NO
9 - 18

EBS01052 EBS01054
ELEC
4. Starting circuit cut-off relay Remove the starting circuit cut-off relay from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the starting circuit cut-off relay as shown. Positive battery terminal red/black 1 Negative battery terminal black/yellow 2 Positive tester probe blue/white 3 Negative tester probe blue/black 4
5. Starter relay Remove the starter relay from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the starter relay as shown. Positive battery terminal brown 1 Negative battery terminal blue/white 2 Positive tester probe red 3 Negative tester probe black 4
3
R
3 4 2
B/Y L /B L/W
+
1
R/B
Br/B L/W Br
B
1 2 4
Does the starter relay have continuity between red and black? YES NO Replace the starter relay.
Does the starting circuit cut-off relay have continuity between blue/white and blue/ black? YES NO Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay.
9 - 19

EBS01054 EBS01053
ELEC
6. Rear brake relay Remove the rear brake relay from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the rear brake relay as shown. Positive battery terminal yellow/white 1 Negative battery terminal black 2 Positive tester probe black/yellow 3 Negative tester probe black 4
7. Diode 2 Remove the diode 2 from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the diode 2 as shown. Measure the diode 2 for continuity as follows. NOTE: The pocket tester 90890-03112 and the analog pocket tester YU-03112-C readings are shown in the following table.
_
2 1
Y/W B/Y B B
4 3
Positive tester probe black/yellow 1 Continuity Negative tester probe sky blue 2 Positive tester probe black/yellow 1 Continuity Negative tester probe blue/black 3 Positive tester probe sky blue 2 No Negative tester probe continuity black/yellow 1 Positive tester probe blue/black 3 No Negative tester probe continuity black/yellow 1
Does the rear brake relay have continuity between black/yellow and black? YES NO Replace the brake relay. rear
1 2
Sb L/B B/Y
Are the testing readings correct? YES NO Replace the diode 2.
9 - 20

EBS01041
ELEC
11.Rear brake light switch Check the rear brake light switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the rear brake light switch OK? YES NO Replace the rear brake light switch.
EBS01058
EBS01042
NO the main
9. Engine stop switch Check the engine stop switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the engine stop switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch.
EBS01057
12.Gear position switch Check the gear position switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the gear position switch OK? YES NO Replace the gear position switch.
EBS01059
10.Start switch Check the start switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the start switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch.
13.Wiring Check the entire starting systems wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the starting systems wiring properly connected and without defects? YES The starting system circuit is OK. NO Properly connect or repair the starting systems wiring.
9 - 21
STARTER MOTOR
EBS01061
ELEC
STARTER MOTOR
Order
Job/Part Removing the starter motor Muffler Starter motor lead Ground lead Starter motor
Qty
1 2 3
1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed. Refer to ENGINE REMOVAL in chapter 4. Disconnect. Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure. Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Disassembling the starter motor Starter motor front cover Lock washer Oil seal Bearing Shim Starter motor rear cover
1 1 1 1 * 1
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR.
9 - 22
STARTER MOTOR
ELEC
Order 7 8 9 0 A
Job/Part Bushing Shim Brush holder set Armature assembly Starter motor yoke
Qty 1 * 1 1 1
Remarks
Refer to ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR.
9 - 23
STARTER MOTOR
EBS01064
ELEC
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR 1. Check: commutator Dirt Clean with 600-grit sandpaper. 2. Measure: commutator diameter a Out of specification Replace the starter motor. Commutator wear limit 27 mm (1.06 in)
3. Measure: mica undercut a Out of specification Scrape the mica to the proper measurement with a hacksaw blade that has been grounded to fit the commutator. Mica undercut 0.70 mm (0.03 in) NOTE: The mica of the commutator must be undercut to ensure proper operation of the commutator.
_
4. Measure: armature assembly resistances (commutator and insulation) Out of specification Replace the starter motor.
9 - 24
STARTER MOTOR
ELEC
a. Measure the armature assembly resistances with the pocket tester. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C Armature coil Commutator resistance 1 0.0250 ~ 0.0350 at 20 C (68 F) Insulation resistance 2 Above 1 M at 20 C (68 F) b. If any resistance is out of specification, replace the starter motor.
5. Measure: brush length a Out of specification Replace the brushes as a set. Brush length wear limit 5.00 mm (0.20 in)
6. Measure: brush spring force Out of specification Replace the brush springs as a set. Brush spring force 7.65 ~ 10.01 N (780 ~ 1021 gf, 27.54 ~ 36.03 oz) 7. Check: gear teeth Damage/wear Replace the gear. 8. Check: bearing oil seal Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).
9 - 25
STARTER MOTOR
EBS00515
ELEC
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR 1. Install: brush holder set 1 NOTE: Align the projection a on the brush holder set with the slot b in the starter motor yoke.
_
2.
_
Install: starter motor yoke 1 starter motor front cover 2 starter motor rear cover 3
3 2 1
NOTE: Align the match marks a on the starter motor yoke with the match marks b on the starter motor front and rear covers.
9 - 26
CHARGING SYSTEM
EBS00516
ELEC
CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
B/L Gy
Gy
B/L B R
5
(BLACK) W W W W W W
G/Y B
1 2
W W W
R R (GRAY) B R R
R/B R R/B R
~
R/W R R R/W R R Br/B Br/B
4
ON OFF R Br/L (GRAY) Br/L Br/L R B (BLACK)
8
B B B
9 0
B Br
L/W Br (BLACK)
}
R/B
L/W
B B B B B
R/B Br R/B L Br Y/R L Y/R
L Br/L
s
Br
{
B
t
Br/L Br/Y
u
Br/L R/Y
2 AC magneto 3 Rectifier/regulator 6 Main fuse 8 Battery
9 - 27
CHARGING SYSTEM
EBS01065 EBS01044
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING The battery is not being charged. Check: 1. main fuse 2. battery 3. charging voltage 4. stator coil resistance 5. wiring connections (of the entire charging system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. right side cover 4. V-belt cooling duct 2 Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_

EBS01043
1. Main fuse Check the main fuse for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Is the main fuse OK? YES Replace fuse. NO the main
9 - 28
CHARGING SYSTEM
EBS01066 EBS01100
ELEC
3. Charging voltage Connect the engine tachometer to the spark plug lead. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the battery as shown. Positive tester probe positive battery terminal 1 Negative tester probe negative battery terminal 2
4. Stator coil resistance Disconnect the AC magneto coupler from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the stator coils. Positive tester probe white terminal 1 Negative tester probe white terminal 2 Positive tester probe white terminal 1 Negative tester probe white terminal 3 Positive tester probe white terminal 2 Negative tester probe white terminal 3
W W W
Start the engine and let it run at approximately 1,000 r/min. Measure the charging voltage. Charging voltage 14 V at 5,000 r/min NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged.
_
1 23
Measure the stator coil resistance. Stator coil resistance 0.108 ~ 0.132 at 20 C (68 F) YES NO Replace the crankshaft position sensor/ stator assembly. 5. Wiring Check the entire charging systems wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the charging systems wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Replace the rectifier/ regulator. NO Properly connect or repair the charging systems wiring.
Is the charging voltage within specification? NO YES The charging circuit is OK.
9 - 29
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EBS00518
ELEC
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4 Main switch 6 Main fuse 8 Battery m Light switch q Headlight relay r Headlight u Headlight fuse x Tail/brake light
G B R W R G B W R/B B G B (BLACK) R/B B Br
B
W R G B W R G B
B/L Gy
Gy
B/L B R
5
(BLACK) W W W W W W
G/Y B
1 2
W W W
R R (GRAY) B R R
R/B R R/B R
~
R/W R R R/W R R Br/B Br/B L/W L/B L/W Br L/W L/W R/B R/B L/W
4
8
B B B
9 0
B Br
L/W Br (BLACK)
}
R/B
F
Br
G
B/Y L/B
B B B B B
R/B Br R/B L Br Y/R L Y/R
|
Br/L Br/L
L Br/L
s
Br
j
P P Br/Y
i
Br/R
{
B
t
Br/L
u
Br/L R/Y
k
G W/B B P B
Br/Y
Br/Y
l w
Y Y/W (BLACK) Y/W Y Y Y/W
R/Y
Br
R/B
L/B
Lg Br/R
m
OFF
p
OFF PUSH
Br
R/Y Y
R/B R/W (GRAY) Br R/B (GRAY)
y
L Y B
L/B Lg B
L Y R/Y B Lg L/B Y L Y Y Y L (BLACK) Y/WB/Y Y/W B/Y B B B G G B Y
q
L
z
B B
x
Y G Y G
r
B Y G B G B B B Y G
r
Y B Y G B
9 - 30
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EBS01067 EBS01044
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING Any of the following fail to light: headlight, tail/brake light. Check: 1. main and headlight fuses 2. battery 3. main switch 4. light switch 5. wiring connections (of the entire lighting system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. tail/brake light cover Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
EBS01041
EBS01068

EBS01043
NO the main
1. Main and headlight fuses Check the main and headlight fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main and headlight fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s).
4. Light switch Check the light switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the light switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch.
9 - 31
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EBS01069
ELEC
2. Headlight relay Remove the headlight relay. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the headlight relay as shown.
high beam low beam
5. Wiring Check the entire lighting systems wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the lighting system wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Check the condition of each of the lighting system circuits. Refer to CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM.
EBS01070
NO Properly connect or repair the lighting systems wiring.
Positive battery terminal yellow 1 Negative battery terminal black 2 Positive tester probe blue 3 Negative tester probe yellow 4 or green 5 3
4 2
B G Y
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM 1. The headlights fail to come on. 1. Headlight bulb and socket Check the headlight bulb and socket for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS. Are the headlight bulb and socket OK? YES NO Replace the headlight bulb, socket or both.
1
Y
3 5
G Y L
Does the headlight relay have continuity between blue and yellow? Does the headlight relay have continuity between blue and green? YES NO Replace the headlight relay.
9 - 32
LIGHTING SYSTEM
3. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the headlight couplers as shown.
When the light switch is set to LO When the light switch is set to HI
ELEC
2. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the tail/brake light connectors as shown. Tail/brake light connectors (wire harness side) Positive tester probe blue 1 Negative tester probe black 2
Headlight coupler (wire harness side) Headlight Positive tester probe yellow 1 or green 2 Negative tester probe black 3
1
DC20V
2
Y G B G B Y
Set the main switch to ON. Set the light switch to LO or HI. Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of yellow 1 or green 2 on the headlight coupler (wire harness side). Is the voltage within specification? YES This circuit is OK. NO The wiring circuit from the main switch to the headlight coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
Set the main switch to ON. Set the light switch to LO or HI. Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of blue 1 on the tail/brake light connectors (wire harness side). Is the voltage within specification? YES This circuit is OK. NO The wiring circuit from the main switch to the tail/brake light connectors are faulty and must be repaired.
2. The taillight fails to come on. 1. Taillight bulb and socket Check the taillight bulb and socket for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS. Are the taillight bulb and socket OK? YES NO Replace the taillight bulb, socket or both.
9 - 33
EBS00521
B
C L M
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
SIGNALING SYSTEM
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
9 - 34
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
SIGNALING SYSTEM
Y L
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
x r
z r
B B
_ h a
G/R
ELEC
SIGNALING SYSTEM
4 Main switch 6 Main fuse 8 Battery J Reverse switch K ECU (engine control unit) P Coolant temperature sensor Q Speed sensor U Gear position switch W Multifunction meter Y Coolant temperature warning light Z Park indicator light [ Reverse indicator light \ Neutral indicator light ] High-range indicator light _ Low-range indicator light b Fuel sender h Differential gear motor p Override switch s Ignition fuse t Signaling system fuse v Rear brake light switch w Front brake light switch x Tail/brake light y Diode 3
ELEC
9 - 35
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EBS01073 EBS01044
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING Any of the following fail to light: warning light, brake light or an indicator light. Check: 1. main, signaling system and ignition fuses 2. battery 3. main switch 4. wiring connections (of the entire signaling system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. side panels 4. V-belt cooling duct 2 5. rear fender Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
EBS01041
EBS01074

EBS01043
NO the main
1. Main, signaling system and ignition fuses Check the main, signaling system and ignition fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main, signaling system and ignition fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s). 4. Wiring Check the entire signal system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the signaling system wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Check the condition of each of the signaling system circuits. Refer to CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM. NO Properly connect or repair the signaling system wiring.
9 - 36
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EBS01075 EBS01053
ELEC
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM

EBS01076
3. Diode 3 Remove the diode 3 from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the diode 3 as shown. Measure the diode 3 for continuity as follows. NOTE: The pocket tester 90890-03112 and the analog pocket tester YU-03112-C readings are shown in the following table.
_
1. The brake light fails to come on. 1. Brake light bulb and bulb socket Check the brake light bulb and bulb socket for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS. Are the brake light bulb and bulb socket OK? YES NO Replace the brake light bulb, bulb socket or both. 2. Brake light switches Check the brake light switches for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the brake light switch OK? YES NO
Positive tester probe yellow/white 1 Continuity Negative tester probe yellow 2 Positive tester probe yellow 2 No continuity Negative tester probe yellow/white 1
1 2
Replace the brake light switch.
Y Y/W
Are the testing readings correct? YES NO Replace the diode 3.
9 - 37
SIGNALING SYSTEM
4. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the tail/brake light connectors (wire harness side) as shown. Positive tester probe yellow 1 Negative tester probe black 2
EBS01078
ELEC
2. The neutral, park, high-range, and/or lowrange indicator light fails to come on. 1. Gear position switch Check the gear position switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the gear position switch OK? YES NO Replace the gear position switch. 2. Voltage
Set the main switch to ON. Pull in the brake lever or push down on the brake pedal. Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of yellow 1 on the tail/brake light connector (wire harness side). Is the voltage within specification? YES This circuit is OK. NO
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter assembly coupler as shown. Positive tester probe brown 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
G/Y G/R Br/B
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the tail/brake light connector is faulty and must be repaired.
Y/L Br B/W
Set the main switch to ON. Measure the voltage (DC 12 V) of brown 1 and black/white 2 at the meter assembly coupler. Is the voltage within specification? YES Replace the meter assembly or ECU. NO The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter assembly coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
9 - 38
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EBS01079 EBS01081
ELEC
3. The reverse indicator light fails to come on. 1. Reverse switch Check the reverse switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the reverse switch OK? YES NO Replace the reverse switch. 2. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter assembly coupler as shown. Positive tester probe brown 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
4. The differential gear lock indicator light and/ or four-wheel-drive motor indicator light fails to come on. 1. Four-wheel-drive motor switch (differential gear motor) Check the four-wheel-drive motor switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the four-wheel-drive motor switch OK? YES NO Replace the differential gear motor. 2. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter assembly coupler as shown. Positive tester probe brown 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
G/Y G/R Br/B Y/L Br B/W
2
Set the main switch to ON. Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 and black/white 2 at the meter assembly coupler. Is the voltage within specification? YES Replace the meter assembly or ECU. NO The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter assembly coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
9 - 39
SIGNALING SYSTEM
5. While the override switch is pushed, the segments of the speedometer digits will not appear as shown in the illustration. 2. Voltage
ELEC
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter assembly coupler as shown. Positive tester probe brown 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
G/Y G/R Br/B
1. Override switch Check the override switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the override switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch.
Y/L Br B/W
9 - 40
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EBS01083
ELEC
6. The coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the main switch is set to ON, or if the coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the temperature is high (more than 112 C (233.6 F)).
EBS00812
1. Coolant temperature sensor Remove the coolant temperature sensor from the cylinder head. Connect the pocket tester ( 100) to the coolant temperature sensor 1 as shown. Immerse the coolant temperature sensor in a container filled with coolant 2. NOTE: Make sure the coolant temperature sensor terminals do not get wet.
_
Place a thermometer 3 in the coolant. Slowly heat the coolant, and then let it cool to the specified temperature indicated in the table. Measure the coolant temperature sensor resistance. Coolant temperature sensor resistance 290 ~ 354 at 80 C (176 F) WARNING
_
Does the coolant temperature sensor operate properly? YES NO Replace the coolant temperature sensor.
Handle the coolant temperature sensor with special care. Never subject the coolant temperature sensor to strong shocks. If the coolant temperature sensor is dropped, replace it. Coolant temperature sensor 18 Nm (1.8 m kg, 13 ft lb)
T.
R.
9 - 41
SIGNALING SYSTEM
2. Voltage Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the meter assembly coupler as shown. Positive tester probe brown 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
ELEC
7. The fuel level indicator light fails to come on. 1. Fuel sender Drain the fuel from the fuel tank and then remove the fuel pump assembly (fuel sender) from the fuel tank. Connect the pocket tester ( 10) to the fuel pump terminals as shown. Positive tester probe green/yellow 1 Negative tester probe black/white 2
Move the fuel sender float to the minimum 3 and maximum 4 level positions. Measure the fuel sender resistance. Fuel sender resistance Minimum 3: 139.0 ~ 141.0 Maximum 4: 19.0 ~ 21.0
Set the main switch to ON. Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 and black/white 2 at the meter assembly coupler. Is the voltage within specification? YES Replace the meter assembly or ECU. NO
R/L B B/W G/Y
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter assembly coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
1 2 4
3
Is the fuel sender OK? YES NO Replace the fuel pump assembly.
9 - 42
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC
8. The speedometer fails to come on. 1. Speed sensor Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the speed sensor coupler (wire harness side) as shown. Positive tester probe white 1 Negative tester probe black/blue 2
1
W L/Y
L W B /L
B/ L
Set the main switch to ON. Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 and black/white 2 at the meter assembly coupler. Is the voltage within specification? YES Replace the meter assembly. NO The wiring circuit from the main switch to the meter assembly coupler is faulty and must be repaired.
2
Turn the main switch to ON. Elevate the rear wheels and slowly rotate them. Measure the voltage of white and black/ blue. With each full rotation of the rear wheels, the voltage reading should cycle from 0.6 V to 4.8 V to 0.6 V to 4.8 V. Is the speed sensor OK? YES NO Replace the speed sensor.
9 - 43
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC
9 - 44
EBS00532
B
C L M
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
COOLING SYSTEM
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
9 - 45
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
(BLACK) R/Y Y L/B Lg B (GRAY) Br R/B L/G L/R L/Y Sb (BLACK) Y Y L L/R G/R Gy B (GRAY) (GRAY) L/R L/G Sb L/B (BLACK) G/R Gy B Br (LIGHT GRAY) L Y L Y R/Y B Lg L/B B L R/B R/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
COOLING SYSTEM
Y L (BLACK)
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Sb B/Y W/B L/Y Br Br/B B/R Br L/Y W/B B/R B Sb Br/B B/Y
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
B B Y G B G Y G Y Y G B
_
(GRAY)
ELEC
h
B
a
G/R
4 Main switch 6 Main fuse x 8 Battery z K ECU (engine control unit) P Coolant temperature sensor s Ignition fuse
B B
q { Radiator fan motor | Radiator fan motor relay } Radiator fan motor r r circuit breaker ~ Radiator fan motor fuse
COOLING SYSTEM
EBS01085 EBS01044
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING The radiator fan motor fails to turn. Check: 1. main, ignition, and radiator fan motor fuses 2. battery 3. main switch 4. radiator fan motor 5. radiator fan motor relay 6. radiator fan motor circuit breaker 7. coolant temperature sensor 8. wiring connections (the entire cooling system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. side panels 4. front fenders Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
EBS01041
3. Main switch Check the main switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the main switch OK? YES Replace switch. NO the main

EBS01043
1. Main, ignition, and radiator fan motor fuses Check the main, ignition, and radiator fan motor fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main, ignition, and radiator fan motor fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s).
9 - 46
COOLING SYSTEM
EBS01086
ELEC
5. Radiator fan motor relay Remove the radiator fan motor relay from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the radiator fan motor relay terminal as shown. Check the radiator fan motor relay of continuity. Positive battery lead brown 1 Negative battery lead yellow/red 2 Positive tester probe red/black 3 Negative tester probe blue 4
4. Radiator fan motor Disconnect the radiator fan motor coupler from the wire harness. Connect the battery (12 V) as shown. Positive battery lead blue 1 Negative battery lead black 2
Does the radiator fan motor turn? YES NO The radiator fan motor is faulty and must be replaced.
Does the radiator fan motor relay have continuity between red/black and blue? YES NO The radiator fan motor relay is faulty and must be replaced.
9 - 47
COOLING SYSTEM
6. Radiator fan motor circuit breaker Remove the radiator fan motor circuit breaker from the wire harness. NOTE: The radiator fan motor circuit breaker 1 is attached to the wire harness with black tape near the tail/brake light connectors 2.
ELEC
Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the radiator fan motor circuit breaker.
Radiator fan motor circuit breaker resistance Zero at 20 C (68 F) YES NO Replace the radiator fan motor circuit breaker.
9 - 48
COOLING SYSTEM
EBS00812
ELEC
7. Coolant temperature sensor Remove the coolant temperature sensor from the cylinder head. Connect the pocket tester ( 100) to the coolant temperature sensor 1 as shown. Immerse the coolant temperature sensor in a container filled with coolant 2. NOTE: Make sure the coolant temperature sensor terminals do not get wet.
_
Place a thermometer 3 in the coolant. Slowly heat the coolant, and then let it cool to the specified temperature indicated in the table. Measure the coolant temperature sensor resistance. Coolant temperature sensor resistance 290 ~ 354 at 80 C (176 F) WARNING
_
Does the coolant temperature sensor operate properly? YES NO Replace the coolant temperature sensor.
EBS01090
Handle the coolant temperature sensor with special care. Never subject the coolant temperature sensor to strong shocks. If the coolant temperature sensor is dropped, replace it. Coolant temperature sensor 18 Nm (1.8 m kg, 13 ft lb)
8. Wiring Check the entire cooling systems wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the cooling systems wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Replace the ECU. NO Properly connect or repair the cooling systems wiring.
T.
R.
9 - 49
B
C L M
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
P Br/R B/Y Br/R Br/R B L/R Br/B Br/R G W/B Br B P Br/R Y/B B Gy (BLACK) Br/B B/Y Br/R B L/G Br/R Br/R (BLACK) Br/R Br/R P
9 - 50
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF OFF PUSH
v n o p
Y/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
Y L
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
r
_ h
B
ELEC
a
G/R
4 Main switch 6 Main fuse 8 Battery 9 Fuel injection x system fuse z H Fuel injection system relay K ECU (engine control unit) c Fuel pump n Engine stop switch s Ignition fuse
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING The fuel pump fails to operate. Check: 1. main, ignition, and fuel injection system fuses 2. battery 3. main switch 4. engine stop switch 5. fuel injection system relay 6. fuel pump 7. wiring connections (the entire fuel pump system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover 3. rear fender Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
ELEC
EBS01044
EBS01041
3. Main switch Check the main switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the main switch OK? YES Replace switch. 4. Engine stop switch Check the engine stop switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the engine stop switch OK? YES NO Replace the left handlebar switch. NO the main

EBS01043
1. Main, ignition, and fuel injection system fuses Check the main, ignition, and fuel injection system fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main, ignition, and fuel injection system fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s).
9 - 51
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM

5. Fuel injection system relay Remove the fuel injection system relay from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the fuel injection system relay terminal as shown. Check the fuel injection system relay of continuity. Positive battery lead red/black 1 Negative battery lead blue/red 2 Positive tester probe brown/black 3 Negative tester probe red/blue 4 7. Wiring 6. Fuel pump
ELEC
Check the condition of the fuel pump. Refer to CHECKING THE FUEL PUMP BODY in chapter 6. YES NO Replace the fuel pump assembly.
Check the entire fuel pump system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the fuel pump system wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Replace the ECU. NO Properly connect or repair the fuel pump system wiring.
Does the fuel injection system relay have continuity between brown/black and red/ blue? YES NO The fuel injection system relay is faulty and must be replaced.
9 - 52
EBS00535
B
C L M
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK)
L W B/L
2WD/4WD SELECTING SYSTEM
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
P P Br/R Br/R B L/R Br/B Br/R G W/B Br B P Br/R Y/B B Gy (BLACK) Br/B B/Y Br/R B L/G Br/R Br/R (BLACK) Br/R Br/R B/Y Br/R
9 - 53
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
w m
Br OFF PUSH
v n o p
OFF
Y/W
(BLACK) R/Y Y L/B Lg B (GRAY) Br R/B L/G L/R L/Y Sb (BLACK) Y Y L/R G/R Gy L B (GRAY) G/R Gy B Br (LIGHT GRAY) (GRAY) L/R L/G Sb L/B (BLACK) L Y L Y R/Y B Lg L/B B L R/B R/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
q
B G
Y L
(BLACK)
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
B B Y B B B G Y Y G B
r
_ h
B
ELEC
Y G B
a
G/R
4 Main switch 6 Main fuse y 8 Battery K ECU (engine control unit) d Four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 e Four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 f Four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 x z g On-command four-wheel-drive r motor switch and differential gear lock switch h Differential gear motor i Four-wheel-drive motor fuse

EBS01095 EBS01043
ELEC
TROUBLESHOOTING The four-wheel-drive motor indicator light fails to come on. Check: 1. main and four-wheel-drive motor fuses 2. battery 3. main switch 4. four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 5. four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 6. four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 7. on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch 8. differential gear motor 9. wiring connection (the entire 2WD/4WD selecting system) NOTE: Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s): 1. seat 2. battery cover Troubleshoot with the following special tool(s).
_
1. Main and four-wheel-drive motor fuses Check the main and four-wheel-drive motor fuses for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE FUSES in chapter 3. Are the main and four-wheel-drive motor fuses OK? YES NO Replace the fuse(s).
EBS01044
EBS01041
3. Main switch Check the main switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the main switch OK? YES Replace switch. NO the main
9 - 54

EBS01096 EBS01097
ELEC
4. Four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 Remove the four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and the battery (12 V) to the four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 terminals. Positive tester probe black/yellow 1 Negative tester probe black 2 Positive battery terminal brown/red 3 Negative battery terminal blue/red 4 Positive tester probe black/yellow 1 Negative tester probe brown/red 5
5. Four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 Remove the four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and the battery (12 V) to the four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 terminals. Positive tester probe brown/black 1 Negative tester probe black 2 Positive battery terminal brown/red 3 Negative battery terminal blue/green 4 Positive tester probe brown/black 1 Negative tester probe brown/red 5
Check the four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 for continuity. YES NO Replace the fourwheel-drive motor relay 1.
9 - 55

EBS01098 EBS01092
ELEC
6. Four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 Remove the four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 from the wire harness. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and the battery (12 V) to the four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 terminals. Positive battery terminal brown/red 1 Negative battery terminal yellow/black 2 Positive tester probe brown 3 Negative tester probe gray 4
7. On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch Check the on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch for continuity. Refer to CHECKING THE SWITCHES. Is the on-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch OK? YES NO Replace the on-command four-wheeldrive motor switch and differential gear lock switch.
9 - 56

8. Differential gear motor Disconnect the differential gear motor coupler. Remove the differential gear motor from the differential gear case. Refer to FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND DIFFERENTIAL GEAR in chapter 7. Connect two C size batteries to the differential gear motor terminals 1 (as shown illustrations).
Check that the pinion gear 2 turns counterclockwise. Check that the pinion gear 2 turns clockwise.
EBS01094
ELEC
9. Wiring connection Check the connections of the entire 2WD/ 4WD selecting system. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. Is the 2WD/4WD system wiring properly connected and without defects? YES Replace the ECU. NO Properly connect or repair the 2WD/4WD selecting system wiring.
3V
3V
2 1
Make sure that the drive gear (shift fork sliding gear) operates correctly. NOTE: When installing the differential gear motor, refer to FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINTS AND DIFFERENTIAL GEAR in chapter 7. YES NO Replace the differential gear motor.
9 - 57
EBS00532
B
C L M
B/L Gy R/B R B (BLACK) R/B B Br B G
Gy Gy O/W G/W
B/L
G/Y B
1 D
L/B L R/L R/B G/W R/B (GRAY) R/B W G/R O/W L/B L
(BLACK)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2 E N
R/L R R/B L/B Br O R G W G/R (BLACK) (BLACK) G/R W L R R (BLACK) R Br/B Br/B L/W L/B Sb L/B L/R B/Y Y/W Y/W G/Y B/L (GREEN) G/Y G/Y B/Y L/W Br L/W L/W R/B R/B L/W R/B R/B Br/B R/L Br/B R Br L/W Br/W Br/W R R R/B O/W Br L/B
W W W
W W W
W W W
(GRAY)
6 J
Br/W B/L
7 O
~ 8
(BLACK) B Br
R/W
B/L
R/W
4 9
L/W Br
ON
OFF
R Br/L
} 0
B B Br L/B R/L B/Y L/R Sb B/Y L/B B B
(GRAY)
K
L W B/L
P
B/L
L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
Br/L
G H
Br/L R
(BLACK) B B B B B
R/B
L W B/L
A
Sb L/R R/L
R/B Br R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
P L/B Y/G Y/G B/L L
B/L
L (BLACK)
R/B
L Br/L Br/L
Br
Y/R
| c
L P B/L
B/L
L (BLACK)
L Y/R
j
P Br/R B/Y Br/R Br/R B L/R Br/B Br/R G W/B Br B P Br/R Y/B B Gy (BLACK) Br/B B/Y Br/R B L/G Br/R Br/R Br/R Br/R (BLACK) P
EPS (ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) SYSTEM
9 - 58
k e
L/G B L/R B
Br/L
Br
Y/G B/L
T
B/W B
(GRAY)
{ d
Br/L
Br/Y
Br/L
R/Y
Br/Y
Br/Y
L/B Sb
f l
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
L/B W/R Gy/G
W/R Gy/G
P Gy W
Y OFF OFF PUSH
m
Br
Y/W
Y/W
Y/W
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
Y L
Y/WB/Y
\ ]
Y/W B/Y Y G Y G
r
_ h
B
ELEC
a
G/R
4 Main switch w v 6 Main fuse 7 EPS fuse 8 Battery y B EPS torque sensor C EPS motor D EPS (electric power steering) control unit E EPS self-diagnosis signal x z connectors K ECU (engine control unit) Q Speed sensor a EPS warning light s Ignition fuse
ELEC
EPS CONTROL UNITS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION The EPS control unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. If this function detects a malfunction in the EPS system, it lights the EPS warning light to alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred in the system. Once a malfunction has been detected, it becomes stored in the EPS control unit memory in the form of a fault code. The EPS warning light comes on when the main switch is turned to ON, and then goes off once the engine is started. If the warning light remains on or comes on after 1 the engine is started, the EPS system may be defective. The electrical circuit of the warning light can be checked by turning the main switch to ON. If the warning light does not come on, the electrical circuit may be defective.
1 EPS warning light
NOTE: If the engine is stopped using the engine stop switch and the main switch is in the ON position, the EPS warning light comes on to indicate that the power assistance for the steering is not functioning. If the steering usage is too heavy (i.e., excessive steering use when the vehicle is traveling at a slow speed), the power assist is reduced to protect the EPS motor from overheating.
9 - 59
ELEC
EPS WARNING LIGHT DURING NORMAL OPERATION The EPS warning light comes on initially for 2 seconds after the main switch is turned to ON. However, the warning light remains on until the engine is started. In addition, if a malfunction is detected while the warning light comes on initially, the warning light remains on. Furthermore, the warning light comes on whenever a malfunction has occurred. NOTE: The EPS system does not operate while the EPS warning light is on.
g b f i
g c f h
a. b. c. d. e. Main switch EPS warning light (no malfunction detected) EPS warning light (malfunction detected) OFF ON f. g. h. i. Off Comes on. Initial lighting: 2 seconds Goes off.
9 - 60

1
ELEC
DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting the diagnostic mode (present and past malfunctions) 1. Turn the main switch to ON. 2. Disconnect the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector 1.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector before turning the main switch to ON. 3. Select the signaling mode by grounding the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector (male side) to the EPS control unit 2 or disconnecting it from the unit as follows. a) Present malfunction signaling mode Ground the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector within 5 seconds after turning the main switch to ON, and leave it grounded. The signaling mode is activated after 5 seconds. b) Past malfunction signaling mode While the present malfunction mode is activated, briefly disconnect the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector, ground it again, and leave it grounded. The signaling mode is activated after 5 seconds. 4. Turn the main switch to OFF to cancel the diagnostic mode. NOTE: The diagnostic mode can also be canceled by riding the vehicle at speeds above 2 km/h. When the diagnostic mode is selected and during the initial lighting of the EPS warning light, the EPS control unit does not receive input from the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector.
9 - 61
ELEC
Identifying fault codes When the diagnostic mode is activated, the fault codes determined by the fail-safe specifications are signaled by the EPS warning light as follows. Present malfunction signaling mode: Currently detected fault codes are signaled. Past malfunction signaling mode: Both previously detected fault codes and currently detected fault codes are signaled. Signaling method Example 1: Fault code No. 23
a d g h j d 5 i g k
b e 1 c f
5 i
2 0.5 3
1 0.5 5
g. Grounded a. EPS self-diagnosis signal connector h. Normal mode (diagnostic mode not activated) b. Diagnostic mode i. Mode selection judgment c. EPS warning light j. Present malfunction signaling mode d. Disconnected k. Past malfunction signaling mode e. On f. Off *1 The EPS warning light comes on for 5 seconds during the diagnostic mode selection judgment. *2 Display of the present malfunctions stops when the past malfunction display mode is selected. After the mode selection judgment is completed (present or past malfunction mode), the current fault code signaling stops immediately, and then the first code of the mode is signaled 2 seconds later.
When a fault code is signaled, the EPS warning light goes off for 1 second between the units of 10 and the units of 1 for the code. After a fault code is signaled, the warning light goes off for 3 seconds, and then the next code is signaled. Example 2: No malfunctions are detected
a c d b e 5 g 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1
e. Goes off. a. EPS self-diagnosis signal connector f. Grounded b. EPS warning light g. Mode selection judgment c. Disconnected d. Comes on. *1 The EPS warning light comes on for 5 seconds during the diagnostic mode selection judgment. After the mode selection judgment is completed (present display or past malfunction mode), the current fault code signaling stops immediately, and then the EPS warning light starts flashing at 1.5-second intervals.
9 - 62
ELEC
Deleting fault codes To delete fault codes, ground the EPS self-diagnosis signal connector 3 or more times within 5 seconds while the present or past malfunction mode is activated. The currently selected mode remains active after the fault codes of that mode are deleted.
b a c T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T2
a. EPS self-diagnosis signal connector c. Grounded b. Disconnected T1: Connector grounded - - - - 0.1 T1 1.6 seconds T2: Fault codes deleted - - - - - Maximum 1.5 seconds required
9 - 63

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE (EPS SYSTEM)
Fault code No. 11 13 15 16 21 Item Symptom No normal signals are received from the torque sensor. No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. No normal signals are received from the ECU. No normal signals are received from the EPS motor. Relay contacts in the EPS control unit are welded together. Battery voltage has dropped. Relay contacts in the EPS control unit are welded together. Battery voltage has increased. Abnormality exists between the EPS and the ECU.
ELEC
Probable cause of malfunction Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in torque sensor. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in speed sensor. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in EPS motor. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Faulty battery. Malfunction in the charging system. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Malfunction in EPS control unit. Malfunction in the charging system. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM. Malfunction in EPS control unit.
EPS torque sensor
Speed sensor
22 41 42 43 45 52
Engine speed signal
EPS motor
EPS control unit
53
EPS control unit
54 55
EPS control unit EPS control unit
9 - 64

TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS (EPS SYSTEM)
ELEC
NOTE: The malfunction history is stored even if the main switch is turned to OFF, therefore, be sure to erase the history (present and past malfunction signaling modes) after repairing the cause of the EPS system malfunction. The malfunction history must be erased in the diagnostic mode. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC MODE and Deleting fault codes. Fault code No. 11, 13, Symptom EPS torque sensor: open or short circuit detected. 15, 16 Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE EPS TORQUE SENSOR. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections EPS torque sensor coupler
Defective EPS torque sensor.
Open or short circuit in EPS torque Repair or replace if there is an sensor lead. open or short circuit. Between EPS torque sensor coupler and EPS control unit coupler. (whitewhite) (redred) (greengreen) (blackblack)
9 - 65

Fault code No. 21
ELEC
Symptom Speed sensor: open or short circuit detected. Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Reinstatement method
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections Speed sensor coupler EPS control unit coupler at the wire harness
Defective speed sensor.
Starting the engine and activating the vehicle speed sensor by operating the vehicle above 5 km/h, or turning the main Repair or replace if there is an switch to OFF, open or short circuit. then to ON, Between speed sensor coupler and then deletand EPS control unit coupler. ing the fault (whitewhite) codes. Refer to Execute the diagnostic mode. DIAGNOSTIC (Code No.21) MODE and Replace if defective. Deleting fault Refer to SIGNALING SYSTEM. codes.
Fault code No.
22
Symptom No normal signals are received from the ECU. Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between ECU coupler and EPS control unit coupler. (orange/whiteorange/white) Replace the ECU. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections EPS control unit coupler at the wire harness ECU coupler at the wire harness
Malfunction in ECU.
9 - 66

Fault code No.
ELEC
41, 42, Symptom EPS motor: open or short circuit detected. 43, 45 Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between EPS motor and EPS control unit coupler. (redred) (blackblack) Replace if defective. Refer to CHECKING THE EPS MOTOR. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Connections EPS motor coupler
Open or short circuit in EPS motor lead.
Defective EPS motor.
Fault code No.
52
Symptom Relay contacts in the EPS control unit are welded together. Check or maintenance job Replace the EPS control unit. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Malfunction in EPS control unit.
Fault code No.
53
Symptom Power supply to the EPS control unit is not normal (low battery voltage). Check or maintenance job Replace or charge the battery. Refer to CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY in chapter 3. Replace if defective. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM. Replace the EPS control unit. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Faulty battery.
2 3
Malfunction in rectifier/regulator or charging system. Malfunction in EPS control unit.
9 - 67

Fault code No. 54
ELEC
Symptom Relay contacts in the EPS control unit are welded together. Check or maintenance job Replace the EPS control unit. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Malfunction in EPS control unit.
Fault code No.
55
Symptom Power supply to the EPS control unit is not normal (High battery voltage). Malfunction in control unit. Check or maintenance job Replace the battery. Refer to CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY in chapter 3. Replace if defective. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM. Replace the EPS control unit. Reinstatement method Turning the main switch to OFF.
Order Item/components and probable cause 1 Faulty battery.
2 3
Malfunction in rectifier/regulator. Malfunction in EPS control unit.
9 - 68
ELEC
CHECKING THE EPS MOTOR 1. Remove: EPS unit 2. Check: EPS motor Out of specification Replace. NOTE: The pocket tester and the analog pocket tester readings are shown in the following table. Continuity Positive tester probe red 1 Negative tester probe black 2 No continuity Positive tester probe red 1 Negative tester probe EPS motor body 3 No continuity Positive tester probe black 2 Negative tester probe EPS motor body 3 a. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the EPS motor coupler terminal and EPS motor body. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C b. Check the EPS motor for continuity. c. Check the EPS motor for no continuity.
2
B R
CHECKING THE EPS TORQUE SENSOR 1. Remove: EPS unit 2. Check: EPS torque sensor resistance Out of specification Replace. EPS torque sensor resistance 1.00 ~ 1.50 k
9 - 69
ELEC
1 2
G B R W
a. Connect the pocket tester ( 1k) to the EPS torque sensor coupler terminal as shown. Pocket tester 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester YU-03112-C Positive tester probe red 1 Negative tester probe black 2 b. Measure the EPS torque sensor resistance.
9 - 70
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING

EBS00537
TRBL SHTG
TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE: The following troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of trouble. It should be helpful, however, as a guide to troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this manual for check, adjustment and replacement of parts.
_
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING

FUEL SYSTEM Fuel tank Empty Clogged fuel tank drain hose Deteriorated or contaminated fuel Fuel pump Faulty fuel pump Faulty fuel injection system relay ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Spark plug Improper plug gap Worn electrodes Wire between terminals broken Improper heat range Faulty spark plug cap Ignition coil Broken or shorted primary/secondary Faulty spark plug lead Broken body Ignition system Faulty ECU Faulty crankshaft position sensor Broken AC magneto rotor woodruff key Throttle body Deteriorated or contaminated fuel Sucked-in air Air filter Clogged air filter element
Switches and wiring Faulty main switch Faulty engine stop switch Broken or shorted wiring Faulty gear position switch Faulty start switch Faulty brake light switch Starting system Faulty starter motor Faulty starter relay Faulty starter circuit cut-off relay Faulty starter clutch Battery Faulty battery Fuse(s) Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse Improperly installed fuse
10
10 - 1
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING/POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE/POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE COMPRESSION SYSTEM Cylinder and cylinder head Loose spark plug Loose cylinder head or cylinder Broken cylinder head gasket Broken cylinder gasket Worn, damaged or seized cylinder Valve, camshaft and crankshaft Improperly sealed valve Improperly contacted valve and valve seat Improper valve timing Broken valve spring Seized camshaft Seized crankshaft
EBS00538
TRBL SHTG
Piston and piston rings Improperly installed piston ring Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring Seized piston ring Seized or damaged piston Crankcase and crankshaft Improperly seated crankcase Seized crankshaft Valve train Improperly adjusted valve clearance Improperly adjusted valve timing
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE Throttle body Damaged or loose throttle body joint Improperly adjusted idle speed (throttle stop screw) Improper throttle cable play Flooded throttle body Electrical system Faulty spark plug Faulty ECU Faulty crankshaft position sensor Faulty ignition coil Valve train Improperly adjusted valve clearance Air filter Clogged air filter element
EBS00539
POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE Refer to STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING and POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE. Fuel pump Air filter Faulty fuel pump Clogged air filter element
10 - 2
FAULTY DRIVE TRAIN

EBS00540
TRBL SHTG
FAULTY DRIVE TRAIN

The following conditions may indicate damaged shaft drive components: Symptoms 1. A pronounced hesitation or jerky movement during acceleration, deceleration, or sustained speed. (This must not be confused with engine surging or transmission characteristics.) 2. A rolling rumble noticeable at low speed; a high-pitched whine; a clunk from a shaft drive component or area. 3. A locked-up condition of the shaft drive mechanism, no power transmitted from the engine to the front and/or rear wheels.
_
Possible Causes A. Bearing damage. B. Improper gear lash. C. Gear tooth damage. D. Broken drive shaft. E. Broken gear teeth. F. Seizure due to lack of lubrication. G. Small foreign objects lodged between the moving parts.
NOTE: Areas A, B, and C above may be extremely difficult to diagnose. The symptoms are quite subtle and difficult to distinguish from normal vehicle operating noise. If there is reason to believe these components are damaged, remove the components and check them.
10 - 3
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/ FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE

EBS00542
TRBL SHTG
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING

HARD SHIFTING Refer to FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE. SHIFT LEVER DOES NOT MOVE Shift drum, shift forks Groove jammed with impurities Seized shift fork Bent shift fork guide bar
Transmission Seized transmission gear Jammed impurities Incorrectly assembled transmission Shift guide Broken shift guide
JUMPS OUT OF GEAR Shift forks Worn shift fork
Shift drum Improper thrust play Worn shift drum groove Transmission Worn gear dog
EBS00543
FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE

ENGINE OPERATES BUT VEHICLE WILL NOT MOVE Transmission V-belt Damaged transmission gears Bent, damaged or worn V-belt V-belt slips Primary pulley cam and primary pulley slider Damaged or worn primary pulley cam Damaged or worn primary pulley slider CLUTCH SLIPPING Clutch spring Damaged, loose or worn clutch shoe spring Clutch shoe Damaged or worn clutch shoe POOR STARTING PERFORMANCE V-belt V-belt slips Oil or grease on the V-belt Primary sliding sheave Faulty operation Worn pin groove Worn pin
Primary sliding sheave Seized primary sliding sheave
Clutch shoe Bent, damaged or worn clutch shoe
10 - 4
FAULTY CLUTCH PERFORMANCE/ OVERHEATING/OVERCOOLING/FAULTY BRAKE

POOR SPEED PERFORMANCE V-belt Oil or grease on the V-belt Primary pulley weight Faulty operation Worn primary pulley weight Primary fixed sheave Worn primary fixed sheave
EBS00546
TRBL SHTG
Primary sliding sheave Worn primary sliding sheave Secondary fixed sheave Worn secondary fixed sheave Secondary sliding sheave Worn secondary sliding sheave
OVERHEATING
OVERHEATING Ignition system Improper spark plug gap Improper spark plug heat range Faulty ECU Fuel system Faulty throttle body Damaged or loose throttle body joint Clogged air filter element Compression system Heavy carbon build-up Engine oil Improper oil level Improper oil viscosity Inferior oil quality Brake Brake drag Cooling system Low coolant level Clogged or damaged radiator Damaged or faulty water pump Faulty fan motor Faulty coolant temperature sensor
EBS00548
OVERCOOLING
COOLING SYSTEM Thermostat Thermostat stays open
EBS00550
FAULTY BRAKE
POOR BRAKING EFFECT Disc brake Worn brake pads Worn disc Air in brake fluid Leaking brake fluid Faulty master cylinder kit cup Faulty caliper kit seal Loose union bolt Broken brake hose and pipe Oily or greasy disc/brake pads Improper brake fluid level
10 - 5
SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION/ UNSTABLE HANDLING/LIGHTING SYSTEM

EBS00551
TRBL SHTG
SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION

MALFUNCTION Bent or damaged damper rod Damaged oil seal lip Fatigued shock absorber spring
EBS00552
UNSTABLE HANDLING
UNSTABLE HANDLING Handlebar Improperly installed or bent Steering Incorrect toe-in Bent steering stem Improperly installed steering stem Damaged bearing or bearing race Bent tie-rods Deformed steering knuckles Tires Uneven tire pressures on both sides Incorrect tire pressure Uneven tire wear
EBS00553
Wheels Deformed wheel Loose bearing Bent or loose wheel axle Excessive wheel runout Frame Bent Damaged frame
LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT COME ON Improper bulb Too many electric accessories Hard charging (broken stator coil and/or faulty rectifier/regulator) Incorrect connection Improperly grounded Poor contacts (main or light switch) Bulb life expired BULB BURNT OUT Improper bulb Faulty battery Faulty rectifier/regulator Improperly grounded Faulty main and/or light switch Bulb life expired
10 - 6
TRBL SHTG
10 - 7
YFM7FGPW 2007 WIRING DIAGRAM

1 Crankshaft position sensor 2 AC magneto 3 Rectifier/regulator 4 Main switch 5 Frame ground 6 Main fuse 7 EPS fuse 8 Battery 9 Fuel injection system fuse 0 Starter relay A Starter motor B EPS torque sensor C EPS motor D EPS (electric power steering) control unit E EPS self-diagnosis signal connectors F Diode 1 G Starting circuit cut-off relay H Fuel injection system relay I Diode 2 J Reverse switch K ECU (engine control unit) L Ignition coil M Spark plug N Fuel injector O Intake air temperature sensor P Coolant temperature sensor Q Speed sensor R TPS (throttle position sensor) S Intake air pressure sensor T Lean angle sensor U Gear position switch V Meter assembly W Multifunction meter X Engine trouble warning light Y Coolant temperature warning light Z Park indicator light [ Reverse indicator light \ Neutral indicator light ] High-range indicator light _ Low-range indicator light a EPS warning light b Fuel sender c Fuel pump d Four-wheel-drive motor relay 1 e Four-wheel-drive motor relay 2 f Four-wheel-drive motor relay 3 g On-command four-wheel-drive motor switch and differential gear lock switch h Differential gear motor i Four-wheel-drive motor fuse j Auxiliary DC jack fuse k Auxiliary DC jack l Left handlebar switch m Light switch n Engine stop switch o Start switch p Override switch q Headlight relay r Headlight s Ignition fuse t Signaling system fuse u Headlight fuse v Rear brake light switch w Front brake light switch x Tail/brake light y Diode 3 z Rear brake relay { Radiator fan motor | Radiator fan motor relay } Radiator fan motor circuit breaker ~ Radiator fan motor fuse COLOR CODE B............ Black Br .......... Brown G ........... Green Gy ......... Gray L ............ Blue Lg .......... Light green O ........... Orange P............ Pink R ........... Red Sb.......... Sky blue W........... White Y............ Yellow B/L......... Black/Blue B/R ........ Black/Red B/W ....... Black/White B/Y ........ Black/Yellow Br/B ....... Brown/Black Br/L ....... Brown/Blue Br/R ....... Brown/Red Br/W ...... Brown/White Br/Y ....... Brown/Yellow G/R........ Green/Red G/W ....... Green/White G/Y ........ Green/Yellow Gy/G...... Gray/Green L/B......... Blue/Black L/G ........ Blue/Green L/R ........ Blue/Red L/W........ Blue/White L/Y......... Blue/Yellow O/G ....... Orange/Green O/W ....... Orange/White R/B ........ Red/Black R/L ........ Red/Blue R/W ....... Red/White R/Y ........ Red/Yellow W/B ....... White/Black W/L........ White/Blue W/R ....... White/Red Y/B ........ Yellow/Black Y/G ........ Yellow/Green Y/L......... Yellow/Blue Y/R ........ Yellow/Red Y/W ....... Yellow/White
YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

2500 SHINGAI IWATA SHIZUOKA JAPAN
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
YFM7FGPW 2007 WIRING DIAGRAM
B
G B B R W W R G B R W R G B R R W G B
C
B B B R B Gy O/W G/W W G/R O/W L/B L L/B Br O O/W Br L/B G/R W L R/B O O R Y P Y/G G/Y Br/W L W Sb Gy Br Y/B Y/L Y/W B/L R/B O L/W W/B B/R Gy/G W/R G/W Lg G/R R/L L/R Y/R O/W Y/W B/W L/B B R/B
L M
B/L Gy
Gy
B/L B R
5
R/B B R/B B Br (BLACK) W W W W W W
G/Y B
1 2
W W W
G B (BLACK)
D
G W G/R (BLACK)
R R (GRAY) B R R
R/B R R/B R
L/B L
E
G/W
R/L R/B (GRAY) R/B
N
R/L
(BLACK)
J
Br L/W Br/W
Br/W B/L (BLACK)
~
R/W R R R/W R R Br/B Br/B L/W L/B L/W Br L/W L/W R/B R/B L/W B/Y R/B R/B Br/B Br/B R/L L/R Sb L/B B/Y
O
B/L
Br/W
4
8
B B B
9 0
B Br
L/W Br (BLACK)
G/Y B/L Y/W Y/W
}
R/B
F
Br
G
B/Y L/B
H
L/R R/L
I
Sb B/Y L/B
K
G/Y L W B/L
(GREEN) G/Y
P
B/L
L W B/L L W B/L
W L/Y B/L
B B B B B
Sb L/R R/L Y Lg Y/R Y/B G/R W/B B/R Gy/G W/R Y/L
R/B Br R/B L Br Y/R L Y/R R/L G/Y
B/L Y L
R S
B/L
(BLACK) L P B/L
|
Br/L Br/L
c
B B/W
R/L B B/W G/Y (GRAY)
P L/B Y/G L Y/G B/L
B/L
(BLACK)
L Br/L
s
Br
j
P P Br/Y
i
Br/R B/Y Br/R Br/R B L/R Br/B Br/R G W/B Br B P B Gy Br/R Y/B (BLACK) Br/R B L/G Br/R Br/R Br/R Br/R
Y/G B/L (GRAY)
{
B
t
Br/L
T
B/W B
u
Br/L R/Y
(BLACK)
e
Br/B L/G B L/R B
d
B/Y L/B Sb L/B W/R Gy/G
Br/Y
Br/Y
f l w
Y Y/W (BLACK) Y/W Y Y Y/W R/Y Y L R/B R/W (GRAY) Br R/B (GRAY) R/Y Br R/B L/B Lg Br/R Y/B Gy
V W
G/Y Br Br/B Y/L B/W
Sb
W/R Gy/G
m
OFF
p
OFF PUSH
Br
Gy W
y
L Y B
L/B Lg B
L/R L/G
G/R L/R
X
G/Y G/R Br/B
L Y R/Y B Lg L/B Y L Y Y Y L (BLACK) Y/WB/Y Y/W B/Y B B B G G B Y
L/G L/R L/Y Sb (BLACK) L/R G/R Gy B
L/R L/G Sb L/B (BLACK) G/R Gy B Br
g
2WD 4WD LOCK
Y Z [
L/Y Sb Gy B
Y/L Br B/W (BLACK)
q
L
(GRAY)
(LIGHT GRAY)
\ ]
z
B B
x
Y G Y G
r
B Y G B G B B B Y G
r
Br L/Y W/B B/R B Sb Br/B B/Y Y B Y G B (GRAY)
_ a
G/R
h
B

Grizzly Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grizzly Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grizzly Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What information is provided on page 2?

What information is provided on page 2?

YFM7FGPW

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Symbols A to H indicate the following

CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 3 PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

CHAPTER 5 COOLING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 6 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

CHAPTER 7 DRIVE TRAIN

Speed information from speed sensor

Engine starting RPM information from ECU

4. EPS control unit calculates assist power

5. Electricity output switched by EPS control unit

3. Sends the torque sensor signal

2. Twists torsion bar

6. Activates EPS motor

EPS control unit

EPS motor EPS unit

Indicator and warning lights

EPS control unit Engine rpm signal

INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS Multifunction display

Connect: lead coupler connector

NOTE: Make sure all connections are tight.

This tool is necessary for adjusting the valve clearance.

This tool is used to check the cooling system. Locknut wrench

This tool is used to measure fuel pressure. Valve spring compressor

90890-85505 This bond is used on crankcase mating surfaces, etc.

API service SE, SF, SG type or higher JASO standard MA

Final gear oil Differential gear oil

Cylinder Bore Measuring point

102.000 ~ 102.010 mm (4.0157 ~ 4.0161 in) 50.0 mm (1.97 in)

102.080 mm (4.0189 in) ----

Maximum camshaft runout

1.60 mm (0.0630 in) 1.60 mm (0.0630 in)

38.79 mm (1.53 in) 38.79 mm (1.53 in)

36.85 mm (1.45 in) 36.85 mm (1.45 in) -------------

Intake Exhaust Winding direction (top view) Intake Exhaust

2.5/1.70 mm (2.5/0.067 in) 2.5/1.70 mm (2.5/0.067 in) -------

------0.60 mm (0.024 in) 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)

Ring type Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Ring side clearance

------1.25 mm (0.049 in) 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)

Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Ring side clearance Crankshaft

Panel wheel 12 7.5 AT Aluminum -------

---------------------------5.00 mm (0.20 in) ---27.0 mm (1.06 in) ----

Use a lock washer.

Left-hand thread 140 Stake.

130 Stake. 23 21 85 58 Left-hand thread

M60 M16 M8 M16 M36 M16 M6 M14 M14 M6 M5 M12 M6 M10 M6

130 150 25 140 90 100 14 18 18 7 7 18 7 17 10

94 110 18 100 65 72 10 13 13 5.1 5.1 13 5.1 12 7.2

HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE/ GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

HOW TO USE THE CONVERSION TABLE

GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

COOLANT FLOW DIAGRAMS